Note - Emerson Process Management
Instruction Manual
D102794X012
September 2013
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Fisherr FIELDVUEt DVC6000
Digital Valve Controllers
Introduction and Specifications
1
Installation
2
Basic Setup
3
Detailed Setup
4
Calibration
5
Viewing Device Variables and Diagnostics
6
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
7
Parts
8
This manual applies to:
Instrument Level
AC, HC, AD, PD
HC, AD, PD, ODV
AC
Device Type
03
03
07
Device Revision
1
2
2
Hardware Revision
1
1
1
Firmware Revision
2−6
7, 9, 10, 11
7, 9, 10, 11
DD Revision
4
8
1
9
Appendices
A
Principle of Operation
A
Loop Schematics/Nameplates
B
Refer to Related Documents on page 1-3 for other documents containing
information related to DVC6000 digital valve controllers
www.Fisher.com
C
Glossary
Glossary
Index
14
Index
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Fast Key Sequence for Instrument Level HC, AD, PD, and ODV
Function/Variable
A Minus B
Actuator Style
Alert Conditions
Alert Record Full Enable
Alert Record Has Entries Enable
Analog Input
Analog Input Calibration
Analog Input Range Hi
Analog Input Range Lo
Analog Input Units
Auto Calibration
Autocalibration in Progress Enable
Auxiliary Input
Auxiliary Terminal Action
Auxiliary Terminal Alert Enable
Burst Command
Burst Enable
Calibration in Progress Enable
Clear ALL Records
Command 3 Configured Pressure
Control Mode
Critical NVM Shutdown
Custom Characterization Table
Cutoff Hi
Cutoff Lo
Cycle Counter
Cycle Counter Alert Enable
Cycle Count Alert Point
Date
Dead Band (Cycle Count / Travel
Accumulator)
Descriptor
Device Description Information
Device ID
Device Revision
Diagnostic Data Available Enable
Diagnostic in Progress Enable
Drive Current Shutdown
Drive Signal Alert Enable
Drive Signal
Fast-Key
Sequence
Coordinates(1)
3-5-3
1-2-6-4
2-1
1-2-3-6-2
1-2-3-7-2
1-2-3-6-1
1-2-3-7-1
3-1
1-3-2-3
1-2-5-3-1
1-2-5-3-2
1-2-5-2-3
1-3-1-1
1-2-4-2-2
3-6-1
1-2-3-3-1-2
1-2-3-3-1-3
1-2-5-7
1-2-3-3-1-1
1-2-1-4-3
4-G
3-D
2-F
10-H
10-H
2-G
4-E
6-H
6-H
6-G
4-E
8-H
4-H
12-D
12-E
4-G
12-E
6-B
1-2-1-4-1
1-2-4-2-1
1-2-3-6-4
1-2-3-7-4
1-2-1-4-5
Hot Key-2
1-2-1-2
1-2-3-1-3-4
1-2-2-4
1-2-3-4-7-3
1-2-2-2-2-1
1-2-3-4-7-4
1-2-2-2-2-2
1-2-3-5-1-2
3-6-5
1-2-3-5-1-1
1-2-3-5-1-3
6-B
8-G
6−B
1-A
4-B
12-C
4-C
12-G
10-B
12-G
10-B
12-H
4-H
12-G
12-H
1-2-5-1-4
6-G
1-2-3-5-2-1
12-H
1-2-5-1-3
3-8
3-7-2
3-7-5
1-2-4-2-4
6-F
2-G
2-H
2-H
8-H
1-2-4-2-3
1-2-3-1-1
1-2-3-1-2-1
3-4
1-2-3-1-2-2
8-H
8-D
10-D
2-G
10-D
10-H
Function/Variable
End Point Pressure Control(3)
Failure Group Enable
Firmware Revision
Flash ROM Shutdown
Hardware Revision
HART Tag
HART Universal Revision
Input Characterization
Instrument Date and Time
Instrument Level
Instrument Mode
Instrument Serial Number
Instrument Time Invalid Enable
Integral Dead Zone
Integral Enable (Travel Tuning)
Integral Enable (Pressure Tuning)
Integral Gain (Travel Tuning)
Integral Gain (Pressure Tuning)
Integral Limit
Integrator Saturated Hi Enable
Integrator Saturated Lo Enable
Last AutoCalibration Status
Last Calibration Type
Loop Current Validation Enable(6)
Low Power Write Fail Enable(6)
Manual Calibration
Manufacturer (Actuator)
Manufacturer (Instrument)
Maximum Recorded Temperature
Maximum Supply Pressure
Message
Minimum Recorded Temperature
Miscellaneous Group Enable
Model (Device)
Multi-Drop Alert Enable
No Free Time Shutdown
Non-Critical NVM Alert Enable
Number of Power Ups
Offline/Failed Alert Enable
Fast-Key
Sequence
Coordinates(1)
1-2-2-2-4
1-2-3-6-5-1
1-2-3-7-5-1
3-7-6
1-2-3-1-3-5
3-7-7
1-2-5-1-1
3-7-1
3-7-9
1-2-2-3
1-2-4-1-2
1-2-5-8
3-7-8
Hot Key-1
1-2-1-1
1-2-5-1-6
1-2-4-1-1
1-2-4-4-4
1-2-2-1-2-1
1-2-2-1-1-2
8-D
2-H
12-C
2-H
6-F
2-H
2-H
4-C
8-G
4-G
2-H
1-A
4-B
6-G
8-G
8-I
8-B
8-A
1-2-2-1-3-2
1-2-2-1-1-3
1-2-2-1-3-3
1-2-4-4-3
1-2-2-1-2-2
1-2-4-4-1
1-2-4-4-2
1-2-5-9-1
1-2-5-9-2
1-2-3-3-3
1-2-3-1-3-2
1-3-1-2
1-2-6-1
3-7-3
3-6-3
2-3-1
1-2-5-6
8-C
8-A
8-C
8-I
8-B
8-I
8-I
6-H
6-H
9-E
12-B
4-E
3-D
2-H
4-H
3-F
4-G
1-2-5-1-2
6-F
11-I
2-3-2
3-F
3-6-4
1-2-3-6-5-3
1-2-3-7-5-3
3-7-4
1-2-4-3-2
4-H
1-2-3-1-3-6
1-2-3-1-3-3
2-3-4
3-6-9
1-2-3-1-3-1
11-I
2-H
8-H
12-C
12-C
3-G
4-H
12-B
NOTE: Italicized Fast-Key Sequence indicates fast-key sequence is applicable only for instrument level ODV.
1. Coordinates are to help locate the item on the menu tree on the following pages.
3. Instrument level ODV only.
5. Instrument level HC, AD, and PD only.
6. Firmware 9 and 10 only.
i
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Fast Key Sequence for Instrument Level HC, AD, PD, and ODV
Fast-Key
Sequence
Coordinates(1)
Fast-Key
Sequence
Coordinates(1)
2-5
1-2-7-1
1-2-3-6-1
1-2-2-2-4-2
2-F
3-D
10-G
8-D
3-3
1-2-3-4-1
1-2-2-2-1
3-6-6
2-G
9-E
6-C
4-H
1-2-7-2
3-D
1-2-3-5-3-2
12-H
1-1-2
1-2-2-1-1-5
1-2-5-1-7
3-5-1
2-B
8-A
6-G
4-G
Travel Accumulator Alert Enable
Travel Accumulator Alert Point
Travel Alert Dead Band
Travel Alert Hi Enable
1-2-3-5-3-1
1-2-3-5-3-3
1-2-3-4-3
1-2-3-4-6-1
12-H
12-I
9-E
10-F
Pressure B
Pressure Control Active Enable
Pressure Deviation Alert Enable(3)
3-5-2
1-2-4-3-1
1-2-3-6-2
4-G
8-H
10-G
Travel Alert Hi Hi Enable
Travel Alert Hi Hi Point
Travel Alert Hi Point
1-2-3-4-5-1
1-2-3-4-5-3
1-2-3-4-6-3
12-E
12-F
10-F
Pressure Deviation Alert Point(3)
Pressure Deviation Time(3)
1-2-3-6-3
1-2-3-6-4
10-G
10-G
Travel Alert Lo Enable
Travel Alert Lo Lo Enable
1-2-3-4-6-2
1-2-3-4-5-2
10-F
12-E
Pressure Range Hi
Pressure Range Lo
1-2-2-2-3-1
1-2-2-2-3-2
10-D
10-D
Travel Alert Lo Lo Point
Travel Alert Lo Point
1-2-3-4-5-4
1-2-3-4-6-4
12-F
10-F
Pressure Sensor Shutdown(2)
Pressure Sensors—Calibration
Pressure Tuning Set
1-2-3-2-3
1-3-2-1
1-2-2-1-3-1
12-D
4-E
8-B
Travel Deviation Alert Enable
Travel Deviation Alert Point
Travel Deviation Time
1-2-3-4-4-1
1-2-3-4-4-2
1-2-3-4-4-3
10-E
10-E
10-E
Pressure Units
1-2-5-2-1
Hot Key-3
1-2-1-5
3-6-7
1-2-3-1-3-7
1-3-3
1-2-5-4
1-2-1-3
1-3-4
1-2-2-5-2
1-2-2-5-1
1-1-1
Hot Key-4
1-1-2(4)
1-2-2-1-1-4
2-2
2-4
3-5-4
1-2-3-3-2-2
1-2-3-3-2-1
1-2-3-3-2-3
6-G
1-A
4-B
4-H
12-C
3-E
4-F
4-B
3-E
5-D
5-D
2-B
1-A
2-B
8-A
2-F
2-F
4-G
12-E
12-E
12-E
Travel Limit / Cutoff Hi Enable
1-2-3-4-7-1
1-2-3-4-7-2
1-2-3-4-7-6
1-2-2-2-2-4
1-2-3-4-7-7
1-2-2-2-2-5
1−3−2−2
1-2-6-5
1-2-3-2-1
1-2-3-4-2
3-2
1-2-2-1-1-1
1-2-3-6-5-2
1-2-3-7-5-2
1-2-5-1-5
1-2-6-2
1-2-6-3
1-2-3-6-3
1-2-3-7-3
1-2-6-6
1-2-2-5-3
12-F
12-F
12-G
10-C
12-G
10-C
4−E
3-E
12-C
9-E
2-G
8-A
3-6-2
1-2-3-2-2
1-2-5-2-2
4-H
12-D
6-G
View/Edit Lead/Lag(3)
1-2-2-5-3
2-3-3
3-6-8
1-2-5-5
5-D
3-F
4-H
4-G
Function/Variable
Partial Stroke Test(3)
Partial Stroke Test Enable(3)
Partial Stroke Test Pressure Limit(3)
Partial Stroke Test Start Point(3)
Partial Stroke Test Variables
View/Edit(3)
Performance Tuner(2)
Polling Address
Pressure A
Protection
Raw Travel Input
Reference Voltage Shutdown
Relay Adjust
Relay Type
Restart Control Mode
Restore Factory Settings
Set Point Rate Close
Set Point Rate Open
Setup Wizard
Stabilize/Optimize
Status
Stroke Valve
Supply
Pressure(2)
Enable(5)
Supply Pressure Lo Alert
Supply Pressure Lo Alert Point(5)
Temperature
Temperature Sensor Shutdown
Temperature Units
Function/Variable
Travel
Travel / Pressure Select
Travel Accumulatorv
Travel Limit / Cutoff Lo Enable
Travel Limit Hi
Travel Limit Lo
Travel Sensor Adjust
Travel Sensor Motion
Travel Sensor Shutdown
Travel Setpoint
Travel Tuning Set
Valve Group Enable
Valve Serial Number
Valve Style
View Alert Records
View/Edit Feedback Connection
View/Edit Lag Time(5)
View Number of Days Powered Up
Zero Power Condition
NOTE: Italicized Fast-Key Sequence indicates fast-key sequence is applicable only for instrument level ODV.
1. Coordinates are to help locate the item on the menu tree on the following pages.
2. Not available in instrument level HC.
3. Instrument level ODV only.
4. Instrument level HC only.
5. Instrument level HC, AD, and PD only.6
7. Firmware 7 only.
ii
10-H
6-F
3-D
3-D
10-H
3-E
5-D
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Field Communicator Menu Tree for
Instrument Level HC, AD, PD, and ODV
Hot Key
1
2
3
4
1‐2‐1‐4
Instrument Mode
Control Mode
Protection
Stabilize/Optimize
1‐2‐1
1‐1
1
2
3
4
5
Guided Setup
1 Setup Wizard
2 Performance Tuner 2
2 Stabilize/Optimize 4
1-2
3
1 Guided Setup
2 Detailed Setup
3 Calibrate
2
1‐2‐2‐2
1‐2‐2‐5
1‐2‐6
1‐2‐3
HART Application 1
Offline
Online
Utility
HART Diagnostics
Travel Calibration
1 Auto Calibration
2 Manual Calibration
Device Information
Notes:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1-1-1 indicates fast-key sequence to reach menu
1
This menu is available by pressing the left
arrow key from the previous menu.
3‐5
3‐7
3‐6
HART Tag
Device ID
Manufacturer
Model
Device Revision
Firmware Revision
Hardware Revision
Instrument Level
HART Universal Revision
2
Not available in instrument level HC
3
Instrument level ODV only.
4
Instrument level HC only.
5
Instrument level HC, AD, and PD only.
6
Fast key sequence for Alert Record with instrument level ODV is 1-2-3-7.
7
This menu item reads Power Starvation Alrt Enab in firmware 7 and below.
8
Only available in firmware 9, 10, and 11.
2
1
2
3
4
3
Instrument Time
Calibration and Diagnostics
Operational
Integrator Saturation
1‐2‐5
General
Units
Analog Input Range
Relay Type
Zero Power Condition
Maximum Supply Pressure
Auxiliary Terminal Action
Instrument Date and Time
Calib Status and Type
Pressure
1
2
3
4
Electronics Alerts
Sensor Alerts
Environment Alerts
Travel Alerts
Travel History Alerts
SIS Alerts
3
Alert Record
6
Status
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
5
3
Alert Setup
1 Pressure Sensors
2 Travel Sensor
3 Analog In
1 Maximum Recorded
Temperature
2 Mininum Recorded
Temperature
3 View Number of Days
Powered Up
4 Number of Power Ups
Analog In
Setpoint
Travel
Drive Signal
Pressure
Variables
Device Information
DD Information
SP Rate Open
SP Rate Close
View/Edit Lag Time
View/Edit Lead/Lag
Sensor Calibration
Device Record
Overview
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1‐2‐4
1‐3‐2
Travel/Pressure Select
Cutoffs and Limits
Pressure Control
End Point Pressure Control
Dynamic Response
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
1‐3‐1
Instrument
2‐3
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
3
Calibrate
Alert Conditions
Status
Device Record
Stroke Valve
Partial Stroke Test 3
Travel/Pressure Control
Tuning
Travel/Pressure Control
Input Characterization
Custom Characterization Table
Dynamic Response
1‐2‐7
Partial Stroke
1 Travel Calibration
2 Sensor Calibration
3 Relay Adjust
4 Restore Factory Settings
5 PST Calibration 3
Service Tools
1
2
3
4
5
Tuning
Response Control
1
2
3
4
5
Manufacturer
Valve Serial Number
Valve Style
Actuator Style
Travel Sensor Motion
View/ Edit Feedback
Connection
7 Assembly Specification Sheet
3
1
1‐2‐2
1
2
3
4
5
6
Online
1
2
3
4
Mode and Protection
Response Control
Alert Setup
Status
Instrument
Valve and Actuator
SIS/Partial Stroke
Valve & Actuator
1‐3
Burst Enable
Change Burst Enable
Burst Command
Change Burst Command
Cmd 3 Configured Pressure
1 Travel Tuning
2 Integral Settings
3 Pressure Tuning
1 PST Enable
2 PST Enable
3 PST Vars View/Edit
Configure
1 Configure
2 Service Tools
3 Overview
1‐2‐2‐1
Detailed Setup
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
Instrument Mode
Control Mode
Restart Control Mode
Burst Mode
Protection
Burst Mode
1
2
3
4
5
Mode and Protection
1‐2‐5‐1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1‐2‐5‐2
Pressure A
Pressure B
A Minus B
Supply 2
General
HART Tag
Message
Descriptor
Date
Valve Serial Number
Instrument Serial Number
Polling Address
Units
1 Pressure Units
2 Temperature Units
3 Analog In Units
1‐2‐5‐3
Variables
Analog Input Range
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 Input Range Hi
2 Input Range Lo
Auxiliary Input
Temperature
Maximum Recorded Temperature
Mininum Recorded Temperature
Cycle Counter
Travel Accumulator
Raw Travel Input
View Number of Days Powered Up
Number of Power Ups
4
1‐2‐5‐9
Calib Status and Type
1 Last AutoCal Status
2 Last Calibration Type
5
6
iii
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
1‐2‐2‐1‐1
Travel Tuning
1
2
3
4
5
A
Travel Tuning Set
Integral Enable
Integral Gain
Stabilize / Optimize
Performance Tuner
2
1‐2‐2‐1‐2
Integral Settings
1 Integral Dead Zone
2 Integral Limit
B
1‐2‐2‐1‐3
1‐2‐3‐1‐3
1‐2‐2‐2‐2
Pressure Tuning
Cutoffs and Limits
1 Pressure Tuning Set
2 Integral Enable
3 Integral Gain
3 1‐2‐2‐2‐4
1
2
3
4
5
6
End Point Pressure Control
1
2
3
4
Electronics Alerts
Drive Signal Alert
1‐2‐3‐3‐1
1 Auxiliary Terminal Alert Enable
2 Auxiliary Input
3 Auxiliary Terminal Action
1‐2‐3‐4‐4
Travel Alerts
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 Supply Pressure Lo Alert Enable
2 Supply
3 Supply Pressure Lo Alert Point
Travel Deviation Alert
1 Travel Deviation Alert Enable
2 Travel Deviation Alert Point
3 Travel Deviation Time
1-2-3-4
Travel
Setpoint
Travel Alert DB
Travel Deviation Alert
Travel Limit Alerts
Travel Limit Hi/Lo Alerts
Travel Limit/Cutoff Alerts
E
1-2-3-4-5
Travel Limit Alerts
1‐2‐3‐4‐6
1
2
3
4
Travel Limit Hi/Lo Alerts
1
2
3
4
Travel Alert Hi Enable
Travel Alert Lo Enable
Travel Alert Hi Point
Travel Alert Lo Point
1‐2‐3‐4‐7
1‐2‐3‐5
1‐2‐4‐1
ODV
1‐2‐3‐6
1 Inst Time Invalid Enable
2 Instrument Date and Time
1‐2‐4‐2
Calibration and Diagnostics
1
2
3
4
1‐2‐4‐3
Calibration in Progress Enable
Autocal in Progress Enable
Diagnostic in Progress Enable
Diagnostic Data Avail Enable
HC, AD, PD
1‐2‐3‐6
ODV
1‐2‐3‐7
Operational
1 Pressure Control Active Enable
2 Multi-Drop Enable
1‐2‐4‐4
Integrator Sat Hi Enable
Integrator Sat Lo Enable
Integral Limit
Integral Dead Zone
8
iv
1
2
3
4
3
PST Pressure Limit
Pressure Deviation Alert Enable
Pressure Deviation Alert Point
Pressure Deviation Time
1
2
3
4
5
1‐2‐3‐5‐1
10
F
G
Cycle Counter
1 Cycle Counter Alert Enable
2 Cycle Counter
3 Cycle Count Alert Point
Alert Record Has Entries Enable
Alert Record Full Enable
View Alert Records
Clear ALL Records
Alert Groups
ODV
1‐2‐3‐7‐5
9
Travel Limit/Cutoff Hi Enable
Travel Limit/Cutoff Lo Enable
Cutoff Hi
Cutoff Lo
Change Cutoffs
Travel Limit Hi
Travel Limit Lo
Change Travel Limits
Alert Record
HC, AD, PD
1‐2‐3‐6‐5
Integrator Saturation
1
2
3
4
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Travel History Alerts
SIS Alerts
Travel Alert Hi Hi Enable
Travel Alert Lo Lo Enable
Travel Alert Hi Hi Point
Travel Alert Lo Lo Point
Travel Limit/Cutoff Alerts
1 Cycle Counter
2 Cycle Count/Travel Accumulator
Deadband
3 Travel Accumulator
Instrument Time
D
Supply Press Lo Alert
Environment Alerts
1 Auxiliary Terminal Alert
2 Supply Pressure Lo Alert
3 Loop Current Validation
Enable 8
C
Auxiliary Terminal Alert
1‐2‐3‐3‐2
1-2-3-3
7
1 Travel Sensor Shutdown
2 Temp Sensor Shutdown
3 Pressure Sensor Shutdown
1 Drive Signal Alert Enable
2 Drive Signal
1 Drive Current Shutdown
2 Drive Signal Alert
3 Processor Impaired Alerts
Offline/Failed Alert Enable
Low Power Write Fail Enable
Non-Critical NVM Alert Enable
Critical NVM Shutdown
Flash ROM Shutdown
No Free Time Shutdown
Reference Voltage Shutdown
Sensor Alerts
Pressure Control
1 Pressure Range Hi
2 Pressure Range Lo
1‐2‐3‐1‐2
1‐2‐3‐1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Cutoff Hi
Cutoff Lo
Change Cutoffs
Travel Limit Hi
Travel Limit Lo
Change Travel Limits
1‐2‐3‐2
1‐2‐2‐2‐3
End Pt Control Enab
PST Start Point
EPPC Setup Point
EPPC Saturation Time
Processor Impaired Alerts
1‐2‐3‐5‐2
Cycle Count/Travel Accumulator
Deadband
1 Deadband
1‐2‐3‐5‐3
H
Travel Accumulator
1 Travel Accumulator Alert Enable
2 Travel Accumulator
3 Travel Accumulator Alert Point
Alert Groups
1 Failure Group Enable
2 Valve Group Enable
3 Miscellaneous Group Enable
11
I
12
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Fast Key Sequence for Instrument Level AC
Fast-Key
Sequence
Coordinates(1)
1-1-2-2-4
4-C
1-3-1
3-F
Analog Input Range Hi
1-2-2-2
4-E
Pressure Range Hi
Analog Input Range Lo
1-2-2-3
4-E
Pressure Range Lo
Analog Input Units
1-2-2-1
4-E
1-1-2-3-4
4-D
Function/Variable
Actuator Style
Analog Input Calibration
1-3-2
3-F
1-1-1-3
3-C
1-3-5
3-G
Date
1-2-1-4
3-D
Descriptor
1-2-1-3
3-D
Auto Travel Calibration
Calibration Location
Device Description Revision
Function/Variable
Pressure Proportional Gain
Pressure Tuning Set
Pressure Units
Protection
Relay Adjust
Fast-Key
Sequence
Coordinates(1)
1-1-2-3-2-2
6-D
1-2-3-4-1-2
5-H
1-2-3-5-1
4-G
1-2-3-5-2
4-G
1-1-2-3-2-1
6-D
1-2-3-4-1-1
6-G
1-1-2-2-2
4-C
1-2-2-4
4-E
Hot Key-2
1-B
1-1-1-2
3-B
1-1-2-3-3
4-D
2-2
2-F
1-3-6
3-G
Device Identification
2-1-6
3-H
Relay Type
1-2-4
3-E
Device Revision
2-1-2
3-G
Restore Factory Settings
1-3-4
3-F
1-1-2-2-5
4-C
Setup Wizard
1-1-1-1
3-D
Firmware Revision
2-1-3
3-G
Travel Integral Gain
1-2-3-2-3
6-F
Hardware Revision
2-1-4
3-G
Travel Integral Enable
1-2-3-2-2
6-F
1-2-1-1
3-D
1-1-2-3-1-4
6-C
2-1-1
3-G
1-2-3-6
4-F
2-1-5
3-H
Hot Key-1
1-B
1-1-2-1
3-C
1-2-1-6
3-D
Travel Sensor Adjust
Integral Dead Zone
1-2-3-3-1
6-F
Travel Sensor Motion
Integral Limit
1-2-3-3-2
6-F
1-3-3
3-F
1-1-2-2-3
4-C
Message
1-2-1-2
3-D
Polling Address
1-2-1-7
3-E
Valve Serial Number
Pressure Integral Control Enable
1-2-3-4-2
6-G
Pressure Integral Gain
1-2-3-4-3
6-G
1-1-2-3-2-3
6-D
1-2-3-4-1-3
5-H
Feedback Connection
HART Tag
HART Universal Revision
Input Characterization
Instrument Level
Instrument Mode
Instrument Serial Number
Manual Travel Calibration
Maximum Supply Pressure
Pressure MLFB Gain
Travel MLFB Gain
Travel / Pressure Select
Travel Proportional Gain
Travel Tuning Set
Travel Velocity Gain
1-2-3-2-1-4
6-E
1-1-2-2-1
4-C
1-2-3-1
4-F
1-1-2-3-1-2
6-C
1-2-3-2-1-2
6-E
1-3-7
3-G
1-1-2-2-6
4-C
1-1-2-3-1-1
6-C
1-2-3-2-1-1
6-E
1-1-2-3-1-3
6-C
1-2-3-2-1-3
6-E
1-2-1-5
3-D
Valve Style
1-1-2-2-7
4-C
Zero Power Condition
1-1-2-2-8
4-C
1. Coordinates are to help locate the item on the menu tree on the facing page.
v
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Field Communicator Menu Tree for
Instrument Level AC
A
Hot Key
1 Instrument Mode
2 Protection
1‐1‐1
B
Auto Setup
1 Setup Wizard
2 Relay Adjust
3 Auto Travel Calib
1‐1
1‐1‐2
Basic Setup
1‐1‐2‐2
Press & Actuator
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Manual Setup
1 Instrument Mode
2 Press & Actuator
3 Tuning & Calib
1 Auto Setup
2 Manual Setup
1‐1‐2‐3
General
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
HART Tag
Message
Descriptor
Date
Valve Serial Num
Inst Serial Num
Polling Address
1‐2‐2
1‐2
1
2
3
4
Detailed Setup
1
2
3
4
General
Measured Var
Response Control
Relay Type
1‐2‐3
1‐3
2
Display
1
2
3
4
5
6
2‐1
1
Offline
Online
Utility
HART Diagnostics
Analog In Calib
Auto Travel Calib
Man Travel Calib
Restore Factory Settings
Calib Loc
Relay Adjust
Tvl Sensor Adjust
Device Information
1
2
3
4
5
6
HART Application
1
2
3
4
Calibrate
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 Device Information
2 DD Revision
1
2
3
4
Tvl Tuning Set
Press Tuning Set
Relay Adjust
Auto Travel Calib
1‐1‐2‐3‐2
Tvl Tuning Set
Tvl Prop Gain
Tvl Velocity Gain
Tvl MLFB Gain
C
Press Tuning Set
1 Press Tuning Set
2 Press Prop Gain
3 Press MLFB Gain
Analog In Units
Input Range Hi
Input Range Lo
Pressure Units
D
1‐2‐3‐2‐1
Tvl Tuning Set
1
2
3
4
Response Control
Online
1 Setup
2 Display
Tvl Tuning Set
Measured Var
Setup
1 Basic Setup
2 Detailed Setup
3 Calibrate
1‐1‐2‐3‐1
Tuning & Calib
1
2
3
4
1‐2‐1
Tvl/Press Select
Pressure Units
Max Supply Press
Actuator Style
Feedback Conn
Tvl Sensor Motion
Valve Style
Zero Pwr Cond
Tvl/Press Select
Tvl Tuning
Integral Settings
Press Tuning
Pressure Control
Input Char
1‐2‐3‐2
F
Integral Settings
1 Integ DeadZ
2 Integ Limit
1-2-3-5
1‐2‐3‐4
1 Press Range Hi
2 Press Range Lo
HART Univ Rev
Device Rev
Firmware Rev
Hardware Rev
Inst Level
Device ID
Tvl Tuning
1 Tvl Tuning Set
2 Tvl Integ Enab
3 Tvl Integ Gain
1‐2‐3‐3
Pressure Control
E
Tvl Tuning Set
Tvl Prop Gain
Tvl Velocity Gain
Tvl MLFB Gain
Press Tuning
1 Press Tuning Set
2 Press Integ Enab
3 Press Integ Gain
G
1‐2‐3‐4‐1
Press Tuning Set
1 Press Tuning Set
2 Press Prop Gain
3 Press MLFB Gain
H
Notes:
1‐1‐1 indicates fast‐key sequence to reach menu
1
This menu is available by pressing the left
arrow key from the previous menu.
I
1
vi
2
3
4
5
6
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
THE FIELDVUE DVC6000 DIGITAL VALVE CONTROLLERS IS A CORE COMPONENT OF THE PLANTWEBt
DIGITAL PLANT ARCHITECTURE. THE DIGITAL VALVE CONTROLLER POWERS PLANTWEB BY
CAPTURING AND DELIVERING VALVE DIAGNOSTIC DATA. COUPLED WITH VALVELINKt SOFTWARE,
THE DVC6000 PROVIDES USERS WITH AN ACCURATE PICTURE OF VALVE PERFORMANCE, INCLUDING
ACTUAL STEM POSITION, INSTRUMENT INPUT SIGNAL AND PNEUMATIC PRESSURE TO THE
ACTUATOR. USING THIS INFORMATION, THE DIGITAL VALVE CONTROLLER DIAGNOSES NOT ONLY
ITSELF, BUT ALSO THE VALVE AND ACTUATOR TO WHICH IT IS MOUNTED.
FIELDVUE DVC6000 Digital Valve Controller
vii
Introduction and Specifications
Section 1 Introduction
1
Scope of Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
Conventions Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3
Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3
Educational Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
September 2013
1-1
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Table 1-1. Instrument Level Capabilities
DIAGNOSTIC LEVEL(1)
CAPABILITY
1
AC
HC
AD
PD
ODV
Auto Calibration
X
X
X
X
X
Custom Characterization
X
X
X
X
X
Burst Communication
X
X
X
X
Alerts
X
X
X
X
Step Response, Drive Signal Test & Dynamic Error Band
X
X
X
Advanced Diagnostics (Valve Signature)
X
X
X
Performance Tuner
X
X
X
Travel Control - Pressure Fallback
X
X
X
Performance Diagnostics
X
X
Solenoid Valve Testing
X
X
Lead/Lag Input Filter(2)
X
1. See page 6-8 for additional diagnostic level information.
2. Refer to brochure part # D351146X012/D351146X412 for information on Fisher optimized digital valves for compressor antisurge applications.
Scope of Manual
This instruction manual includes specifications,
installation, operating, and maintenance information
for device revision 1, firmware revision 2−6 and device
revision 2, firmware 7, 9, 10, and 11 digital valve
controllers, instrument level AC, HC, AD, PD, and
ODV.
This instruction manual describes using the 475 Field
Communicator with device description revision 8 to
setup and calibrate the instrument. You can also use
Fisher ValveLink software version 7.3 or higher to
setup, calibrate, and diagnose the valve and
instrument. For information on using ValveLink
software with the instrument refer to ValveLink
software help or documentation.
Do not install, operate, or maintain a DVC6000 digital
valve controller without being fully trained and qualified
in valve, actuator, and accessory installation,
operation, and maintenance. To avoid personal
injury or property damage, it is important to
carefully read, understand, and follow all of the
contents of this manual, including all safety
cautions and warnings. If you have any questions
about these instructions, contact your Emerson
Process Management sales office before proceeding.
Conventions Used in this Manual
Procedures that require the use of the 475 Field
Communicator have the Field Communicator symbol
in the heading.
Procedures that are accessible with the Hot Key
on the Field Communicator will also have the Hot Key
symbol in the heading.
1-2
W7957 / IL
Figure 1-1. Sliding-Stem Control Valve with
FIELDVUE DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller
Some of the procedures also contain the sequence of
numeric keys required to display the desired Field
Communicator menu. For example, to access the
Setup Wizard, from the Online menu, press 1 (selects
Configure) followed by a second 1 (selects Basic
Setup) followed by a third 1 (selects Setup Wizard).
The key sequence in the procedure heading is shown
as (1-1-1). The path required to accomplish various
tasks, the sequence of steps through the Field
Communicator menus, is also presented in textual
format. Menu selections are shown in italics, e.g.,
Calibrate. An overview of the Field Communicator
menu trees are shown at the beginning of this manual.
September 2013
Introduction and Specifications
with the DVC6000 digital valve controller. You can
obtain general information concerning software
revision level, messages, tag, descriptor, and date.
Diagnostic information is available to aid you when
troubleshooting. Input and output configuration
parameters can be set, and the digital valve controller
can be calibrated. Refer to table 1-1 for details on the
capabilities of each diagnostic tier.
Using the HART protocol, information from the field
can be integrated into control systems or be received
on a single loop basis.
DVC6000 digital valve controllers are designed to
directly replace standard pneumatic and
electro-pneumatic valve mounted positioners.
W9418
Figure 1-2. Rotary Control Valve with
FIELDVUE DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller
Specifications
Note
475 Field Communicator menu
sequences used in this manual are for
instrument level HC, AD, PD, and ODV,
firmware 7 and above. Refer to the AC
menu tree at the beginning of this
manual for AC menu sequences.
These menu sequences are also
applicable to the 375 Field
Communicator.
WARNING
Refer to table 1-2 for specifications.
Incorrect configuration of a
positioning instrument could result in
the malfunction of the product,
property damage or personal injury.
Specifications for DVC6000 digital valve controllers
are shown in table 1-2. Specifications for the Field
Communicator can be found in the product manual for
the Field Communicator.
Description
DVC6000 digital valve controllers (figures 1-1 and 1-2)
are communicating, microprocessor-based
current-to-pneumatic instruments. In addition to the
normal function of converting an input current signal to
a pneumatic output pressure, the DVC6000 digital
valve controller, using the HART communications
protocol, gives easy access to information critical to
process operation. You can gain information from the
principal component of the process, the control valve
itself, using the Field Communicator at the valve, or at
a field junction box, or by using a personal computer
or operator’s console within the control room.
Using a personal computer and ValveLink software or
AMS Suite: Intelligent Device Manager, or a Field
Communicator, you can perform several operations
September 2013
Related Documents
Other documents containing information related to
DVC6000 digital valve controllers include:
Bulletin 62.1:DVC6000—Fisher FIELDVUE
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers (D102758X012)
Bulletin 62.1:DVC6000(S1)—Fisher FIELDVUE
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controller Dimensions
(D103308X012)
Fisher FIELDVUE DVC6000 Digital Valve
Controllers Quick Start Guide (D102762X012)
1-3
1
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
FIELDVUE Digital Valve Controller Split
Ranging − Supplement to HART Communicating
Fisher FIELDVUE Digital Valve Controller Instruction
Manuals (D103262X012)
1
Using FIELDVUE Instruments with the Smart
HART Loop Interface and Monitor (HIM) −
Supplement to HART Communicating Fisher
FIELDVUE Instrument Instruction Manuals
(D103263X012)
Using FIELDVUE Instruments with the Smart
Wireless THUM Adapter and a HART Interface
Module (HIM) − Supplement to HART Communicating
Fisher FIELDVUE Instrument Instruction Manuals
Audio Monitor for HART Communications −
Supplement to HART Communicating Fisher
FIELDVUE Instrument Instruction Manuals
(D103265X012)
HART Field Device Specification − Supplement
to Fisher FIELDVUE DVC6000 Digital Valve Controller
Instruction Manual (D103649X012)
Using the HART Tri-Loop HART -to-Analog
Signal Converter with FIELDVUE Digital Valve
Controllers − Supplement to HART Communicating
Fisher FIELDVUE Instrument Instruction Manuals
(D103267X012)
Hot Swap Procedure − Supplement to HART
Communicating Fisher FIELDVUE DVC5000
(Obsolete Product) and DVC6000 Digital Valve
Controllers Instruction Manuals (D103264X012)
1-4
Implementation of Lock-in-Last Strategy −
Supplement to Fisher FIELDVUE DVC6000 and
DVC6200 Digital Valve Controllers Instruction Manual
(D103261X012)
Fisher HF340 Filter Instruction Manual
(D102796X012)
ValveLink software help or documentation
Field Communicator User’s Manual
All documents are available from your Emerson
Process Management sales office. Also visit our
website at www.FIELDVUE.com.
Educational Services
For information on available courses for DVC6000
digital valve controllers, as well as a variety of other
products, contact:
Emerson Process Management
Educational Services, Registration
P.O. Box 190; 301 S. 1st Ave.
Marshalltown, IA 50158-2823
Phone: 800-338-8158 or
Phone: 641-754-3771
FAX: 641-754-3431
e-mail: [email protected]
September 2013
Introduction and Specifications
Table 1-2. Specifications
Available Configurations
Maximum: 10 bar (145 psig) or maximum pressure
rating of the actuator, whichever is lower
DVC6010: Sliding-stem applications
DVC6020: Rotary and long-stroke sliding-stem
applications [over 102 mm (4 inch) travel]
DVC6030: Quarter-turn rotary applications
Medium: Air or Natural Gas
Air: Supply pressure must be clean, dry air that
meets the requirements of ISA Standard 7.0.01.
Remote-Mounted Instrument(1)
Natural Gas: Natural gas must be clean, dry,
oil-free, and noncorrosive. H2S content should not
exceed 20 ppm.
DVC6005: Base unit for 2 inch pipestand or wall
mounting
DVC6015: Feedback unit for sliding-stem
applications
DVC6025: Feedback unit for rotary or long-stroke
sliding-stem applications
DVC6035: Feedback unit for quarter-turn rotary
applications
A maximum 40 micrometer particle size in the air
system is acceptable. Further filtration down to 5
micrometer particle size is recommended. Lubricant
content is not to exceed 1 ppm weight (w/w) or
volume (v/v) basis. Condensation in the air supply
should be minimized
DVC6000 digital valve controllers can be mounted
on Fisher and other manufacturers rotary and
sliding-stem actuators.
Steady-State Air Consumption(3)(4)
Standard Relay:
At 1.4 bar (20 psig) supply pressure: Less than 0.38
normal m3/hr (14 scfh)
At 5.5 bar (80 psig) supply pressure: Less than 1.3
normal m3/hr (49 scfh)
Input Signal
Point-to-Point:
Analog Input Signal: 4-20 mA DC, nominal
Minimum Voltage Available at instrument terminals
must be 10.5 volts DC for analog control, 11 volts
DC for HART communication
Minimum Control Current: 4.0 mA
Minimum Current w/o Microprocessor Restart:
3.5 mA
Maximum Voltage: 30 volts DC
Overcurrent Protection: Input circuitry limits current
to prevent internal damage.
Reverse Polarity Protection: No damage occurs
from reversal of loop current.
Multi-drop:
Instrument Power: 11-30 volts DC at approximately
8 mA
Reverse Polarity Protection: No damage occurs
from reversal of loop current.
Output Signal
Pneumatic signal as required by the actuator, up to
full supply pressure.
Minimum Span: 0.4 bar (6 psig)
Maximum Span: 9.5 bar (140 psig)
Action: Double, Single direct, and Single reverse
Low Bleed Relay:
At 1.4 bar (20 psig) supply pressure: Average value
0.056 normal m3/hr (2.1 scfh)
At 5.5 bar (80 psig) supply pressure: Average value
0.184 normal m3/hr (6.9 scfh)
Maximum Output Capacity(3)(4)
At 1.4 bar (20 psig) supply pressure: 10.0 normal
m3/hr (375 scfh)
At 5.5 bar (80 psig) supply pressure: 29.5 normal
m3/hr (1100 scfh)
Independent Linearity(5)
±0.50% of output span
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Meets EN 61326-1 (First Edition)
Immunity—Industrial locations per Table 2 of the
EN 61326-1 standard. Performance is shown
in table 1-3 below.
Emissions—Class A
ISM equipment rating: Group 1, Class A
Lightning and Surge Protection—The degree of
immunity to lightning is specified as Surge immunity
in table 1-3. For additional surge protection
commercially available transient protection devices
can be used.
Supply Pressure(2)
Recommended: 0.3 bar (5 psi) higher than
maximum actuator requirements, up to maximum
supply pressure
-continued-
September 2013
1-5
1
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Table 1-2. Specifications (continued)
Vibration Testing Method
1
Electrical Housing:
CSA—Type 4X, IP66
Tested per ANSI/ISA-S75.13.01 Section 5.3.5. A
resonant frequency search is performed on all three
axes. The instrument is subjected to the ISA
specified 1/2 hour endurance test at each major
resonance, plus an additional two million cycles.
FM—Type 4X, IP66
ATEX—IP66
IECEx—IP66
Other Classifications/Certifications
Gas Certified, Single Seal Device— CSA, FM,
ATEX, and IECEx
FSETAN— Federal Service of Technological,
Ecological and Nuclear Inspectorate (Russia)
GOST -R— Russian GOST-R
INMETRO— National Institute of Metrology,
Quality, and Technology (Brazil)
KGS— Korea Gas Safety Corporation
(South Korea)
KISCO— Korea Industrial Safety Corporation
(South Korea)
NEPSI— National Supervision and Inspection
Centre for Explosion Protection and Safety of
Instrumentation (China)
Input Impedance
The input impedance of the DVC6000 active
electronic circuit is not purely resistive. For
comparison to resistive load specifications, an
equivalent impedance of 550 ohms may be used.
This value corresponds to 11V @ 20 mA.
Operating Ambient Temperature Limits(2)(6)
-40 to 85C (-40 to 185F) for most approved
valve-mounted instruments
-60 to 125C (-76 to 257F) for remote-mounted
feedback unit.
-52 to 85C (-62 to 185F) for valve-mounted
instruments utilizing the Extreme Temperature
option (fluorosilicone elastomers)
PESO CCOE— Petroleum and Explosives Safety
Organisation − Chief Controller of Explosives (India)
Humidity Limits
TIIS— Technology Institution of Industrial Safety
(Japan)
0 to 100% condensing relative humidity with
minimal zero or span shifts
Contact your Emerson Process Management sales
office for classification/certification specific
information
Electrical Classification
Hazardous Area:
IEC 61010 Compliance Requirements
(Valve-Mounted Instruments only)
CSA—Intrinsically Safe, Explosion-proof,
Division 2, Dust Ignition-proof
Power Source: The loop current must be derived
from a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power
source.
FM—Intrinsically Safe, Explosion-proof,
Non-incendive, Dust Ignition-proof
Environmental Conditions: Installation Category I
ATEX—Intrinsically Safe, Flameproof, Type n
IECEx—Intrinsically Safe, Flameproof, Type n
Refer to tables 1-4, 1-5, 1-6, and 1-7, Hazardous
Areas Classifications and Special Instructions for
“Safe Use” and Installation in Hazardous Locations
in section 2, and Appendix B.
Pollution Degree 2, Overvoltage Category III per
ANSI/ISA-82.02.01 (IEC 61010-1 Mod).
Connections
Supply Pressure: 1/4 NPT internal and integral
pad for mounting 67CFR regulator
Output Pressure: 1/4 NPT internal
Tubing: 3/8-inch, recommended
Vent: 3/8 NPT internal
Electrical: 1/2 NPT internal conduit connection,
M20 adapter optional
-continued-
1-6
September 2013
Introduction and Specifications
Table 1-2. Specifications (continued)
Stem/Shaft Travel
Cover: Thermoplastic polyester
Elastomers: Nitrile (standard)
Linear Actuators with rated travel between 6.35 mm
(0.25 inch) and 606 mm (23.375 inches)
Options
Rotary Actuators with rated travel between 50
degrees and 180 degrees
Supply and output pressure gauges or Tire
valves, Integral mounted filter regulator,
Stainless steel housing, module base and
terminal box Low bleed relay, Inline 10
micrometer air filter Safety Instrumented System
(SIS) Solutions Safety Related Nuclear
Applications Natural Gas Certified, Single Seal
Device Feedback Assembly PTFE Sleeve
Mounting (7)
Designed for direct actuator mounting or remote
pipestand or wall mounting. Mounting the
instrument vertically, with the vent at the bottom of
the assembly, or horizontally, with the vent pointing
down, is recommended to allow drainage of
moisture that may be introduced via the instrument
air supply.
Protective Kit for aluminum units in saltwater or
particulate environments
Weight
Declaration of SEP
Valve-Mounted Instruments
Aluminum: 3.5 kg (7.7 lbs)
Stainless Steel: 7.7 kg (17 lbs)
Fisher Controls International LLC declares this
product to be in compliance with Article 3 paragraph
3 of the Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) 97 /
23 / EC. It was designed and manufactured in
accordance with Sound Engineering Practice (SEP)
and cannot bear the CE marking related to PED
compliance.
Remote-Mounted Instruments
DVC6005 Base Unit: 4.1 kg (9 lbs)
DVC6015 Feedback Unit: 1.3 kg (2.9 lbs)
DVC6025 Feedback Unit: 1.4 kg (3.1 lbs)
DVC6035 Feedback Unit: 0.9 kg (2.0 lbs)
Construction Materials
However, the product may bear the CE marking to
indicate compliance with other applicable European
Community Directives.
Housing, module base and terminal box:
A03600 low copper aluminum alloy
NOTE: Specialized instrument terms are defined in ISA Standard 51.1 - Process Instrument Terminology.
1. 3-conductor shielded cable, 22 AWG minimum wire size, is required for connection between base unit and feedback unit. Pneumatic tubing between base unit output connection and actuator
has been tested to 91 meters (300 feet). At 15 meters (50 feet) there was no performance degradation. At 91 meters there was minimal pneumatic lag.
2. The pressure/temperature limits in this document and any applicable code or standard should not be exceeded.
3. Values at 1.4 bar (20 psig) based on a single-acting direct relay; values at 5.5 bar (80 psig) based on double-acting relay.
4. Normal m3/hour - Normal cubic meters per hour at 0C and 1.01325 bar, absolute. Scfh - Standard cubic feet per hour at 60F and 14.7 psia
5. Typical Value. Not applicable for travels less than 19 mm (0.75 inch) or for shaft rotation less than 60 degrees. Also, not applicable to DVC6020 digital valve controllers in long-stroke
applications.
6. Temperature limits vary based on hazardous area approval.
7. Do not use the DVC6010S or DVC6020S in high vibration service where the mounting bracket uses standoffs (spacers) to mount to the actuator. Due to NAMUR mounting limitations, do
not use the DVC6030S in high vibration service.
Table 1-3. EMC Summary Results—Immunity
Performance Criteria(1)
Port
Enclosure
Phenomenon
Basic Standard
Test Level
Point-toPoint Mode
Multi-drop
Mode
A(2)
A
Electrostatic discharge
(ESD)
IEC 61000-4-2
4 kV contact
8 kV air
Radiated EM field
IEC 61000-4-3
80 to 1000 MHz @ 10V/m with 1 kHz AM at 80%
1400 to 2000 MHz @ 3V/m with 1 kHz AM at 80%
2000 to 2700 MHz @ 1V/m with 1 kHz AM at 80%
A
A
Rated power frequency
magnetic field
IEC 61000-4-8
30 A/m at 50/60 Hz
A
A
Burst
IEC 61000-4-4
1 kV
A(2)
A
IEC 61000-4-5
1 kV (line to ground only, each)
B
B
IEC 61000-4-6
150 kHz to 80 MHz at 3 Vrms
A
A
I/O signal/control Surge
Conducted RF
Performance Criteria:+/− 1% effect.
1. A = No degradation during testing. B = Temporary degradation during testing, but is self-recovering.
2. Excluding auxiliary switch function, which meets Performance Criteria B.
September 2013
1-7
1
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Table 1-4. Hazardous Area Classifications—CSA (Canada)
Certification
Body
Type
Certification Obtained
Ex ia Intrinsically Safe
Class I,II,III Division 1 GP A,B,C,D,E,
F,G per drawing GE42818
Natural Gas Approved
1
DVC60x0
DVC60x0S
(x = 1,2,3)
DVC6005
1-8
Enclosure
Rating
T5(Tamb ≤ 80C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 75C)
Type 4X, IP66
Single Seal Device
−−−
T5(Tamb ≤ 80C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 75C)
Type 4X, IP66
Single Seal Device
Class I Division 2 GP A,B,C,D
Class II Division 1 GP E,F,G
Class II Division 2 GP F,G
Class III
Natural Gas Approved
−−−
T5(Tamb ≤ 80C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 75C)
Type 4X, IP66
Single Seal Device
T5(Tamb ≤ 80C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 75C)
Type 4X, IP66
Single Seal Device
Vmax = 30 VDC
Imax = 226 mA
Ci = 5 nF
Li = 0.55 mH
Pi = 1.4 W
Voc = 30 VDC
Isc = 12 mA
Ca = 66 nF
La = 246 mH
Po = 86 mW
Explosion-proof
Class I Division 1 GP B,C,D
Natural Gas Approved
−−−
T5(Tamb ≤ 80C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 75C)
Type 4X, IP66
Single Seal Device
Class I Division 2 GP A,B,C,D
Class II Division 1 GP E,F,G
Class II Division 2 GP F,G
Class III
Natural Gas Approved
−−−
T5(Tamb ≤ 80C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 75C)
Type 4X, IP66
Single Seal Device
T4(Tamb ≤ 125C)
T5(Tamb ≤ 95C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 80C)
Type 4X, IP66
Ex ia Intrinsically Safe
Class I,II,III Division 1 GP A,B,C,D,
E,F,G per drawing GE42818
DVC60x5
(x = 1,2,3)
Vmax = 30 VDC
Imax = 226 mA
Ci = 5 nF
Li = 0.55 mH
Pi = 1.4 W
Temperature Code
Explosion-proof
Class I Division 1 GP B,C,D
Natural Gas Approved
Ex ia Intrinsically Safe
Class I,II,III Division 1 GP A,B,C,D,
E,F,G per drawing GE42818
Natural Gas Approved
CSA
Entity Rating
Vmax = 30 VDC
Imax = 100 mA
Ci = 0 uF
Li = 0 mH
Pmax = 160 mW
Explosion-proof
Class I Division 1 GP B,C,D
−−−
T4(Tamb ≤ 125C)
T5(Tamb ≤ 95C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 80C)
Type 4X, IP66
Class I Division 2 GP A,B,C,D
Class II Division 1 GP E,F,G
Class II Division 2 GP F,G
Class III
−−−
T4(Tamb ≤ 125C)
T5(Tamb ≤ 95C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 80C)
Type 4X, IP66
September 2013
Introduction and Specifications
Table 1-5. Hazardous Area Classifications—FM (United States)
Certification
Body
Type
Certification Obtained
IS Intrinsically Safe
Class I,II,III Division 1 GP A,B,C,D,
E,F,G per drawing GE42819
Natural Gas Approved
DVC60x0
DVC60x0S
(x = 1,2,3)
DVC6005
September 2013
Vmax = 30 VDC
Imax = 226 mA
Ci = 5 nF
Li = 0.55 mH
Pi = 1.4 W
XP Explosion-proof
Class I Division 1 GP A,B,C,D
NI Non-incendive
Class I Division 2 GP A,B,C,D
DIP Dust Ignition-proof
Class II, III Division 1 GP E,F,G
S Suitable for Use
Class II, III Division 2 GP F,G
Temperature Code
T5(Tamb ≤ 80C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 75C)
Enclosure
Rating
Type 4X, IP66
Single Seal Device
1
−−−
XP Explosion-proof
Class I Division 1 GP B,C,D
NI Non-incendive
Class I Division 2 GP A,B,C,D
DIP Dust Ignition-proof
Class II, III Division 1 GP E,F,G
S Suitable for Use
Class II, III Division 2 GP F,G
Natural Gas Approved
IS Intrinsically Safe
Class I,II,III Division 1 GP A,B,C,D,
E,F,G per drawing GE42819
DVC60x5
(x = 1,2,3)
Vmax = 30 VDC
Imax = 226 mA
Ci = 5 nF
Li = 0.55 mH
Pi = 1.4 W
XP Explosion-proof
Class I Division 1 GP B,C,D
NI Non-incendive
Class I Division 2 GP A,B,C,D
DIP Dust Ignition-proof
Class II, III Division 1 GP E,F,G
S Suitable for Use
Class II, III Division 2 GP F,G
Natural Gas Approved
IS Intrinsically Safe
Class I,II,III Division 1 GP A,B,C,D,E,
F,G per drawing GE42819
Natural Gas Approved
FM
Entity Rating
Voc = 9.6 VDC
Isc = 3.5 mA
Ca = 3.6 uF
La = 100 mH
Po = 8.4 mW
−−−
Vmax = 30 VDC
Imax = 100 mA
Ci = 0 uF
Li = 0 mH
Pi = 160 mW
−−−
T5(Tamb ≤ 80C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 75C)
Type 4X, IP66
Single Seal Device
T5(Tamb ≤ 80C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 75C)
Type 4X, IP66
Single Seal Device
T5(Tamb ≤ 80C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 75C)
Type 4X, IP66
Single Seal Device
T4(Tamb ≤ 125C)
T5(Tamb ≤ 95C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 80C)
Type 4X, IP66
T4(Tamb ≤ 125C)
T5(Tamb ≤ 95C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 80C)
Type 4X, IP66
1-9
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Table 1-6. Hazardous Area Classifications—ATEX
Certificate
Type
1
DVC60x0
DVC60x0S
(x = 1,2,3)
ATEX
DVC6005
DVC60x5
(x = 1,2,3)
1-10
Certification Obtained
II 1 G & D
Intrinsically Safe
Gas
Ex ia IIC T5/T6 Ga
Dust
Ex ia IIIC T85C (Ta ≤ +73C), T92C
(Ta ≤ +80C) Da
Per drawing GE60771
Natural Gas Approved
Entity Rating
Ui = 30 VDC
Ii = 226 mA
Ci = 5 nF
Li = 0.55 mH
Pi = 1.4 W
Temperature Code
Enclosure
Rating
T5(Tamb ≤ 80C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 75C)
IP66
Single Seal Device
II 2 G
Flameproof
Gas
Ex d IIC T5/T6 Gb
Natural Gas Approved
−−−
T5(Tamb ≤ 85C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 80C)
IP66
Single Seal Device
II 3 G
Type n
Gas
Ex nC IIC T5/T6 Gc
−−−
T5(Tamb ≤ 80C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 75C)
IP66
Single Seal Device
T5(Tamb ≤ 80C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 75C)
IP66
Single Seal Device
II 1 G & D
Intrinsically Safe
Gas
Ex ia IIC T5/T6 Ga
Dust
Ex ia IIIC T85C (Ta ≤ +76C), T89C
Ta ≤ +80C) Da
Per drawing GE60771
Natural Gas Approved
Ui = 30 VDC
Ii = 226 mA
Ci = 5 nF
Li = 0.55 mH
Pi = 1.4 W
Uo = 9.6 VDC
Io = 3.5 mA
Co = 3.6 uF
Lo = 100 mH
Po = 8.4 mW
II 2 G
Flameproof
Gas
Ex d IIC T5/T6 Gb
Natural Gas Approved
−−−
T5(Tamb ≤ 85C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 80C)
IP66
Single Seal Device
II 3 G
Type n
Gas
Ex nC IIC T5/T6 Gc
−−−
T5(Tamb ≤ 80C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 75C)
IP66
Single Seal Device
T4(Tamb ≤ 125C)
T5(Tamb ≤ 95C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 80C)
IP66
II 1 G & D
Intrinsically Safe
Gas
Ex ia IIC T4/T5/T6 Ga
Dust
Ex ia IIIC T85C (Tamb ≤ +64C) T100C
(Tamb ≤ +79C), T135C (Tamb ≤ +114C)
T146C (Tamb ≤ +125C) Da
Per drawing GE60771
Ui = 30 VDC
Ii = 100 mA
Ci = 0 uF
Li = 0 mH
Pi = 160 mW
II 2 G
Flameproof
Gas
Ex d IIC T4/T5/T6 Gb
−−−
T4(Tamb ≤ 125C)
T5(Tamb ≤ 95C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 80C)
IP66
II 3 G
Type n
Gas
Ex nA IIC T4/T5/T6 Gc
−−−
T4(Tamb ≤ 125C)
T5(Tamb ≤ 95C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 80C)
IP66
September 2013
Introduction and Specifications
Table 1-7. Hazardous Area Classifications—IECEx
Certificate
Type
Certification Obtained
Intrinsically Safe
Gas
Ex ia IIC T5/T6 per drawing GE42990
Natural Gas Approved
DVC60x0
DVC60x0S
(x = 1,2,3)
DVC6005
September 2013
Enclosure
Rating
T5(Tamb ≤ 80C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 75C)
IP66
Single Seal Device
IP66
Single Seal Device
1
−−−
T5(Tamb ≤ 80C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 75C)
Type n
Gas
Ex nC IIC T5/T6
Natural Gas Approved
−−−
T5(Tamb ≤ 80C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 75C)
IP66
Single Seal Device
T5(Tamb ≤ 80C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 75C)
IP66
Single Seal Device
Ui = 30 VDC
Ii = 226 mA
Ci = 5 nF
Li = 0.55 mH
Pi = 1.4 W
Uo = 9.6 VDC
Io = 3.5 mA
Ca = 3.6 uF
La = 100 mH
Po = 8.4 mW
Flameproof
Gas
Ex d IIC T5/T6
Natural Gas Approved
−−−
T5(Tamb ≤ 80C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 75C)
IP66
Single Seal Device
Type n
Gas
Ex nC IIC T5/T6
Natural Gas Approved
−−−
T5(Tamb ≤ 80C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 75C)
IP66
Single Seal Device
T4(Tamb ≤ 125C)
T5(Tamb ≤ 95C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 80C)
IP66
Intrinsically Safe
Gas
Ex ia IIC T4/T5/T6 per drawing GE42990
DVC60x5
(x = 1,2,3)
Ui = 30 VDC
Ii = 226 mA
Ci = 5 nF
Li = 0.55 mH
Pi = 1.4 W
Temperature Code
Flameproof
Gas
Ex d IIC T5/T6
Natural Gas Approved
Intrinsically Safe
Gas
Ex ia IIC T5/T6 per drawing GE42990
Natural Gas Approved
IECEx
Entity Rating
Ui = 30 VDC
Ii = 100 mA
Ci = 0 uF
Li = 0 mH
Pi = 160 mW
Flameproof
Gas
Ex d IIC T4/T5/T6
−−−
T4(Tamb ≤ 125C)
T5(Tamb ≤ 95C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 80C)
IP66
Type n
Gas
Ex nA IIC T4/T5/T6
−−−
T4(Tamb ≤ 125C)
T5(Tamb ≤ 95C)
T6(Tamb ≤ 80C)
IP66
1-11
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
1
1-12
September 2013
Installation
2-2
Section 2 Installation
Hazardous Area Classifications and Special Instructions for “Safe Use” and
Installations in Hazardous Areas
CSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
ATEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
IECEx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
Mounting Guidelines
DVC6010 on Sliding-Stem Actuators (up to 4 inches travel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
DVC6020 on Long-Stroke
Sliding-Stem Actuators (4 to 24 inches travel) and Rotary Actuators . . . . . . .
2-8
DVC6030 on Quarter-Turn Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-10
DVC6005 Base Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wall Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pipestand Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-13
2-13
2-13
DVC6015 on Sliding-Stem Actuators (up to 4 inches travel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-13
DVC6025 on Long-Stroke Sliding-Stem Actuators
(4 to 24 inches travel) and Rotary Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-15
DVC6035 on Quarter-Turn Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-16
67CFR Filter Regulator
Integral-Mounted Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Yoke-Mounted Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Casing-Mounted Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-18
2-18
2-18
Pneumatic Connections
Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-19
Output Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single-Acting Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Double-Acting Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Construction to Support Solenoid Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-21
2-21
2-21
2-22
Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-22
Electrical Connections
4-20 mA Loop Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-24
Remote Travel Sensor Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-25
Test Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-29
September 2013
2-1
2
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Communication Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-29
Wiring Practices
Control System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2-2
HART Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compliance Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-30
2-30
2-31
2-32
Maximum Cable Capacitance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-33
Installation in Conjunction with a Rosemount
333 HART Tri-Loop HART-to-Analog
Signal Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-33
September 2013
Installation
Installation
WARNING
The DVC6000 can be used with either air or natural
gas as the supply medium. If using natural gas as the
pneumatic supply medium, natural gas will be used in
the pneumatic output connections of the DVC6000 to
any connected equipment. In normal operation the unit
will vent the supply medium into the surrounding
atmosphere unless it is remotely vented. When using
natural gas as the supply medium, in a non-hazardous
location in a confined area, remote venting of the unit
is required. Failure to do so could result in personal
injury, property damage, and area re-classification. For
hazardous locations remote venting of the unit may be
required, depending upon the area classification, and
as specified by the requirements of local, regional, and
federal codes, rules and regulations. Failure to do so
when necessary could result in personal injury,
property damage, and area re-classification.
WARNING
Avoid personal injury or property
damage from sudden release of
process pressure or bursting of parts.
Before proceeding with any
Installation procedures:
Always wear protective clothing,
gloves, and eyewear.
Personal injury or property
damage may result from fire or
explosion if natural gas is used as the
supply medium and appropriate
preventive measures are not taken.
Preventive measures may include, but
are not limited to, one or more of the
following: Remote venting of the unit,
re-evaluating the hazardous area
classification, ensuring adequate
ventilation, and the removal of any
ignition sources. For information on
remote venting of this controller, refer
to page 2-22.
If installing this into an existing
application, also refer to the
WARNING at the beginning of the
Maintenance section of this
instruction manual.
Check with your process or
safety engineer for any additional
measures that must be taken to
protect against process media.
September 2013
To avoid static discharge from the
plastic cover when flammable gases
or dust are present, do not rub or
clean the cover with solvents. To do
so could result in a spark that may
cause the flammable gases or dust to
explode, resulting in personal injury
or property damage. Clean with a mild
detergent and water only.
2
WARNING
This unit vents the supply medium
into the surrounding atmosphere.
When installing this unit in a
non-hazardous (non-classified)
location in a confined area, with
natural gas as the supply medium,
you must remotely vent this unit to a
safe location. Failure to do so could
result in personal injury or property
damage from fire or explosion, and
area re-classification.
When installing this unit in a
hazardous (classified) location remote
venting of the unit may be required,
depending upon the area
classification, and as specified by the
requirements of local, regional, and
federal codes, rules and regulations.
Failure to do so when necessary
could result in personal injury or
property damage from fire or
explosion, and area re-classification.
Vent line piping should comply with
local and regional codes and should
be as short as possible with adequate
inside diameter and few bends to
reduce case pressure buildup.
In addition to remote venting of the
unit, ensure that all caps and covers
are correctly installed. Failure to do
so could result in personal injury or
property damage from fire or
explosion, and area re-classification.
2-3
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Hazardous Area Classifications and
Special Instructions for “Safe Use”
and Installations in Hazardous
Locations
2
Certain nameplates may carry more than one
approval, and each approval may have unique
installation/wiring requirements and/or conditions of
safe use. These special instructions for “safe use” are
in addition to, and may override, the standard
installation procedures. Special instructions are listed
by approval.
Note
FM
Special Conditions of Safe Use
Intrinsically Safe, Explosion-proof, Non-incendive,
Dust Ignition-proof
1. When product is used with natural gas as the
pneumatic medium, the maximum working pressure of
the natural gas supply shall be limited to 145 psi.
2. When product is used with natural gas as the
pneumatic medium the product shall not be permitted
in a Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D location
without the proper venting installation as per the
manufacturer’s instruction manual.
3. The apparatus enclosure contains aluminum and is
considered to constitute a potential risk of ignition by
impact or friction. Care must be taken into account
during installation and use to prevent impact or friction.
This information supplements the
nameplate markings affixed to the
product.
4. Part of the enclosure is constructed from plastic.
To prevent the risk of electrostatic sparking the plastic
surface should only be cleaned with a damp cloth.
Always refer to the nameplate itself to
identify the appropriate certification.
Contact your Emerson Process
Management sales office for
approval/certification information not
listed here.
Refer to table 1-5 for approval information, figures B-6
and B-7 for FM loop schematics, and figures B-2 and
B-9 for typical FM nameplates.
Approval information is for both
aluminum and stainless steel
constructions.
ATEX
Special Conditions for Safe Use
Intrinsically Safe
1. This apparatus can only be connected to an
intrinsically safe certified equipment and this
combination must be compatible as regards the
intrinsically safe rules.
WARNING
Failure to follow these conditions of
“safe use” could result in personal
injury or property damage from fire or
explosion, or area re-classification.
2. The electrical parameters of this equipment must
not exceed any following values:
Uo ≤ 30 V; Io ≤ 226 mA; Po ≤ 1.4 W
3. Operating ambient temperature: −52C or −40C
to + 80C
4. For the model with aluminum body: the apparatus
must not be submitted to frictions or mechanical
impacts.
CSA
Intrinsically Safe, Explosion-proof, Division 2,
Dust Ignition-proof
No special conditions for safe use.
Refer to table 1-4 for approval information, figures B-1
and B-3 for CSA loop schematics, and figures B-2 and
B-5 for typical CSA nameplates.
2-4
5. Covered by standards EN 60079-0 (2009),
EN 60079-11 (2012), EN 60079-26 (2007).
6. Install per drawing GE60771.
Refer to table 1-6 for additional approval information,
figure B-10, B-12, and B-13 for ATEX loop schematics
and figure B-11 for typical ATEX Intrinsic Safety
nameplates.
September 2013
Installation
Flameproof
IECEx
Operating ambient temperature: −52C or −40C to
+ 85C
Conditions of Certification
Refer to table 1-6 for additional approval information,
and figure B-14 for typical ATEX Flameproof
nameplates.
Ex ia / Ex nC / Ex nA/ Ex d
Type n
Operating ambient temperature: −52C or −40C to
+ 80C
Refer to table 1-6 for additional approval information,
and figure B-15 for typical ATEX Type n nameplates.
September 2013
Intrinsically Safe, Type n, Flameproof
1. Warning: Electrostatic charge hazard. Do not rub
or clean with solvents. To do so could result in an
explosion.
Ex nC / Ex nA, Ex d
2. Do not open while energized.
Refer to table 1-7 for additional approval information,
figures B-16 and B-17 for IECEx loop schematics, and
figures B-19 and B-20 for typical IECEx nameplates.
2-5
2
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
CAP SCREW, FLANGED
2
MACHINE SCREW
SHIELD
ADJUSTMENT ARM
CONNECTOR ARM
CAP SCREW
PLAIN WASHER
29B1674-A / DOC
Figure 2-1. FIELDVUE DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller Mounted on Sliding-Stem Actuator with up to 2 Inches Travel
Mounting Guidelines
DVC6010 on Sliding-Stem Actuators Up
to 102 mm (4 Inches) of Travel
If ordered as part of a control valve assembly, the
factory mounts the digital valve controller on the
actuator, makes pneumatic connections to the
actuator, sets up, and calibrates the instrument. If you
purchased the digital valve controller separately, you
will need a mounting kit to mount the digital valve
controller on the actuator. See the instructions that
come with the mounting kit for detailed information on
mounting the digital valve controller to a specific
actuator model.
The DVC6010 digital valve controller mounts on
sliding-stem actuators with up to 102 mm (4 inch)
travel. Figure 2-1 shows a typical mounting on an
actuator with up to 51 mm (2 inch) travel. Figure 2-2
shows a typical mounting on actuators with 51 to 102
mm (2 to 4 inch) travel. For actuators with greater than
102 mm (4 inch) travel, see the guidelines for
mounting a DVC6020 digital valve controller.
2-6
Note
Do not use the stainless steel
DVC6010S in high vibration service
where the mounting bracket uses
standoffs (spacers) to mount to the
actuator.
Refer to the following guidelines when mounting on
sliding-stem actuators with up to 4 inches of travel.
Where a key number is referenced, refer
to figure 8-2.
1. Isolate the control valve from the process line
pressure and release pressure from both sides of the
valve body. Shut off all pressure lines to the actuator,
releasing all pressure from the actuator. Use lock-out
procedures to be sure that the above measures stay in
effect while you work on the equipment.
2. Attach the connector arm to the valve stem
connector.
September 2013
Installation
HEX NUT
CAP SCREW, FLANGED
FEEDBACK ARM
EXTENSION,
BIAS SPRING
LOCK WASHER
ADJUSTMENT ARM
SPACER
MACHINE SCREW, FLAT
HEAD
2
HEX NUT, FLANGED
MACHINE SCREW
LOCK WASHER
MACHINE SCREW,
LOCK WASHER,
HEX NUT
SHIELD
PLAIN WASHER
CONNECTOR ARM
Figure 2-2. FIELDVUE DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller Mounted on Sliding-Stem Actuator with 2 to 4 Inches Travel
3. Attach the mounting bracket to the digital valve
controller housing.
4. If valve travel exceeds 2 inches, a feedback arm
extension is attached to the existing 2-inch feedback
arm. Remove the existing bias spring (key 78) from
the 2-inch feedback arm (key 79). Attach the feedback
arm extension to the feedback arm (key 79) as shown
in figure 2-2.
5. Mount the digital valve controller on the actuator as
described in the mounting kit instructions.
6. Set the position of the feedback arm (key 79) on
the digital valve controller to the no air position by
inserting the alignment pin (key 46) through the hole
on the feedback arm as follows:
For air-to-open actuators (i.e., the actuator
stem retracts into the actuator casing or cylinder as air
pressure to the casing or lower cylinder increases),
insert the alignment pin into the hole marked ‘‘A’’. For
this style actuator, the feedback arm rotates
counterclockwise, from A to B, as air pressure to the
casing or lower cylinder increases.
For air-to-close actuators (i.e., the actuator
stem extends from the actuator casing or cylinder as
air pressure to the casing or upper cylinder increases),
insert the alignment pin into the hole marked ‘‘B’’. For
this style actuator, the feedback arm rotates
clockwise, from B to A, as air pressure to the casing or
upper cylinder increases.
September 2013
SPRING RELAXED
FEEDBACK ARM
BIAS SPRING
ADJUSTMENT
ARM PIN
A7209-1
BIAS
SPRING
SPRING UNDER TENSION OF
ADJUSTMENT ARM PIN
Figure 2-3. Locating Adjustment Arm Pin in Feedback Arm
2-7
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Note
When performing the following steps,
ensure there is enough clearance
between the adjustment arm and the
feedback arm to prevent interference
with the bias spring.
2
7. Apply anti-seize (key 64) to the pin of the
adjustment arm. As shown in figure 2-3, place the pin
into the slot of the feedback arm or feedback arm
extension so that the bias spring loads the pin against
the side of the arm with the valve travel markings.
8. Install the external lock washer on the adjustment
arm. Position the adjustment arm in the slot of the
connector arm and loosely install the flanged hex nut.
9. Slide the adjustment arm pin in the slot of the
connector arm until the pin is in line with the desired
valve travel marking. Tighten the flanged hex nut.
10. Remove the alignment pin (key 46) and store it in
the module base next to the I/P assembly.
11. After calibrating the instrument, attach the shield
with two machine screws.
DVC6020 on Long-Stroke (4 to 24 Inch
Travel) Sliding-Stem Actuators and
Rotary Actuators
If ordered as part of a control valve assembly, the
factory mounts the digital valve controller on the
actuator, makes pneumatic connections to the
actuator, sets up, and calibrates the instrument. If you
purchased the digital valve controller separately, you
will need a mounting kit to mount the digital valve
controller on the actuator. See the instructions that
come with the mounting kit for detailed information on
mounting the digital valve controller to a specific
actuator model.
Note
Do not use the stainless steel
DVC6020S in high vibration service
where the mounting bracket uses
standoffs (spacers) to mount to the
actuator.
DVC6020 digital valve controllers use a cam (designed
for linear response) and roller as the feedback
mechanism. Figure 2-4 shows an example of
mounting on sliding-stem actuators with travels from 4
inches to 24 inches. Some long-stroke applications will
require an actuator with a tapped lower yoke boss.
Figures 2-5 and 2-6 show the DVC6020 mounted on
rotary actuators.
As shown in figure 2-5, two feedback arms are
available for the digital valve controller. Most
long-stroke sliding-stem and rotary actuator
installations use the long feedback arm [62 mm (2.45
inches) from roller to pivot point]. Installations on
Fisher 1051 size 33 and 1052 size 20 and 33
actuators use the short feedback arm [54 mm (2.13
inches) from roller to pivot point]. Make sure the
correct feedback arm is installed on the digital valve
controller before beginning the mounting procedure.
Refer to figures 2-4, 2-5, and 2-6 for parts locations.
Also, where a key number is referenced, refer to figure
8-3. Refer to the following guidelines when mounting
on sliding-stem actuators with 4 to 24 inches of travel
or on rotary actuators:
1. Isolate the control valve from the process line
pressure and release pressure from both sides of the
valve body. Shut off all pressure lines to the
pneumatic actuator, releasing all pressure from the
actuator. Use lock-out procedures to be sure that the
above measures stay in effect while working on the
equipment.
2. If a cam is not already installed on the actuator,
install the cam as described in the instructions
included with the mounting kit. For sliding-stem
actuators, the cam is installed on the stem connector.
3. If a mounting plate is required, fasten the mounting
plate to the actuator.
Note
All cams supplied with FIELDVUE
mounting kits are characterized to
provide a linear response.
2-8
4. For applications that require remote venting, a
pipe-away bracket kit is available. Follow the
instructions included with the kit to replace the existing
mounting bracket on the digital valve controller with
the pipe-away bracket and to transfer the feedback
parts from the existing mounting bracket to the
pipe-away bracket.
September 2013
Installation
CAM/ROLLER POSITION MARK
A
LOCK WASHER
CAP SCREW
CAP SCREW, HEX
SOCKET
PLAIN WASHER
HEX NUT
2
STUD, CONT
THREAD
CAM
MOUNTING PLATE
VENT
STUD, CONT THREAD
HEX NUT
29B1665-B / DOC
VENT ADAPTOR
A
PLAIN WASHER
SECTION A‐A
SPACER
Figure 2-4. FIELDVUE DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller Mounted on Long-Stroke Sliding-Stem Actuator
MACHINE SCREW
MOUNTING ADAPTOR
CAP SCREW, HEX SOCKET
CAP SCREW,
HEX SOCKET
CAM
29B1672-A / DOC
MACHINE SCREW
CAM
29B2094-A / DOC
TYPICAL MOUNTING WITH SHORT FEEDBACK ARM
(FISHER 1052 SIZE 33 ACTUATOR SHOWN)
TYPICAL MOUNTING WITH LONG FEEDBACK ARM
(FISHER 1061 SIZE 30-68 ACTUATOR SHOWN)
Figure 2-5. FIELDVUE DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller Mounted on Rotary Actuator
September 2013
2-9
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
FOLLOWER ARM
EXTENSION
MOUNTING
ADAPTER
MACHINE SCREW,
LOCK WASHER,
HEX NUT
CAP SCREW,
HEX SOCKET
MOUNTING
BRACKET
BIAS SPRING
ARM ASSEMBLY PIN
2
ARM ASSEMBLY
FEEDBACK
ARM ASSEMBLY
CAP SCREW
29B1673-A / DOC
CAM
Figure 2-7. Locating Adjustment Arm Pin in Feedback Arm of a
FIELDVUE DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller
Figure 2-6. FIELDVUE DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller with
Long Feedback Arm and Follower Arm Extension Mounted on a
Rotary Actuator
5. Larger size actuators may require a follower arm
extension, as shown in figure 2-6. If required, the
follower arm extension is included in the mounting kit.
Follow the instructions included with the mounting kit
to install the follower arm extension.
6. Apply anti-seize (key 64) to the arm assembly pin
as shown in figure 2-7.
7. Mount the DVC6020 on the actuator as follows:
If required, a mounting adaptor is included in the
mounting kit. Attach the adaptor to the actuator as
shown in figure 2-5. Then attach the digital valve
controller assembly to the adaptor. The roller on the
digital valve controller feedback arm will contact the
actuator cam as it is being attached.
If no mounting adaptor is required, attach the
digital valve controller assembly to the actuator or
mounting plate. The roller on the digital valve
controller feedback arm will contact the actuator cam
as it is being attached.
8. For long-stroke sliding-stem actuators, after the
mounting is complete, check to be sure the roller
aligns with the position mark on the cam (see
figure 2-4). If necessary, reposition the cam to attain
alignment.
2-10
DVC6030 on Quarter-Turn Actuators
If ordered as part of a control valve assembly, the
factory mounts the digital valve controller on the
actuator, makes pneumatic connections to the
actuator, sets up, and calibrates the instrument. If you
purchased the digital valve controller separately, you
will need a mounting kit to mount the digital valve
controller on the actuator. See the instructions that
come with the mounting kit for detailed information on
mounting the digital valve controller to a specific
actuator model.
Figure 2-8 shows the DVC6030 digital valve controller
mounted on a quarter-turn actuator. Refer to figure 2-8
for parts locations. Refer to the following guidelines
when mounting on quarter-turn actuators:
Note
Due to NAMUR mounting limitations,
do not use the stainless steel
DVC6030S in high vibration service.
1. Isolate the control valve from the process line
pressure and release pressure from both sides of the
valve body. Shut off all pressure lines to the
pneumatic actuator, releasing all pressure from the
actuator. Use lock-out procedures to be sure that the
above measures stay in effect while working on the
equipment.
2. If necessary, remove the existing hub from the
actuator shaft.
3. If a positioner plate is required, attach the
positioner plate to the actuator as described in the
mounting kit instructions.
September 2013
Installation
MOUNTING BRACKET
FEEDBACK ARM
TRAVEL INDICATOR PIN
2
29B1703-A / DOC
SPACER
TRAVEL INDICATOR
19B3879−A / DOC
Figure 2-8. Mounting a FIELDVUE DVC6030 Digital Valve Controller on a Rotary Actuator (Fisher 1032 Size 425A Shown)
4. If required, attach the spacer to the actuator shaft.
Refer to figures 2-9 and 2-10. The travel indicator
assembly can have a starting position of 7:30 or
10:30. Determine the desired starting position then
proceed with the next step. Considering the top of the
digital valve controller as the 12 o’clock position, in the
next step attach the travel indicator, so that the pin is
positioned as follows:
If increasing pressure from the digital valve
controller output A rotates the potentiometer shaft
clockwise (as viewed from the back of the
instrument), mount the travel indicator assembly such
that the arrow is in the 10:30 position, as shown in
figure 2-9.
If increasing pressure from the digital valve
controller output A rotates the potentiometer shaft
counterclockwise (as viewed from the back of the
instrument), mount the travel indicator assembly such
that the arrow is in the 7:30 position, as shown in
figure 2-10.
September 2013
Note
ValveLink software and the Field
Communicator use the convention of
clockwise (figure 2-9) and
counterclockwise (figure 2-10) when
viewing the potentiometer shaft from
the back of the FIELDVUE instrument.
5. Attach the travel indicator, to the shaft connector or
spacer as described in the mounting kit instructions.
6. Attach the mounting bracket to the digital valve
controller.
7. Position the digital valve controller so that the pin
on the travel indicator engages the slot in the feedback
arm and that the bias spring loads the pin as shown in
figure 2-11. Attach the digital valve controller to the
actuator or positioner plate.
8. If a travel indicator scale is included in the
mounting kit, attach the scale as described in the
mounting kit instructions.
2-11
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
STARTING POSITION OF TRAVEL
INDICATOR ASSEMBLY (DIGITAL
VALVE CONTROLLER OUTPUT A
AT 0 PSI. )
IN THIS POSITION, THE “B” HOLE
IN THE FEEDBACK ARM WILL BE
ALIGNED WITH THE REFERENCE
HOLE IN THE DIGITAL VALVE
CONTROLLERS HOUSING.
E0989 / DOC
2
DVC6030 FEEDBACK
ARM MOVEMENT
MOVEMENT OF TRAVEL
INDICATOR ASSEMBLY WITH
INCREASING PRESSURE FROM
OUTPUT A.
ACTUATOR SHAFT MOVEMENT
STARTING POSITION OF THE ACTUATOR TRAVEL
INDICATOR ASSEMBLY IF INCREASING PRESSURE
FROM OUTPUT A DRIVES THE INDICATOR
COUNTERCLOCKWISE (THE POTENTIOMETER
SHAFT WILL ROTATE CLOCKWISE AS VIEWED
FROM THE BACK OF THE FIELDVUE INSTRUMENT)
19B3879-A / DOC-1
NOTE: DVC6030 TRAVEL COUNTS (CLOCKWISE) = 3400 200
Figure 2-9. Explanation of FIELDVUE DVC6030 Travel Indicator Starting Position and Movement, if Clockwise Orientation is Selected
for “Travel Sensor Motion” in ValveLink Software or the Field Communicator
MOVEMENT OF TRAVEL
INDICATOR ASSEMBLY WITH
INCREASING PRESSURE FROM
OUTPUT A.
E0989
DVC6030 FEEDBACK
ARM MOVEMENT
19B3879-A / DOC-2
STARTING POSITION OF
TRAVEL INDICATOR ASSEMBLY
(DIGITAL VALVE CONTROLLER
OUTPUT A AT 0 PSI).
IN THIS POSITION, THE “A” HOLE
IN THE FEEDBACK ARM WILL BE
ALIGNED WITH THE REFERENCE
HOLE IN THE DIGITAL VALVE
CONTROLLERS HOUSING.
ACTUATOR SHAFT MOVEMENT
STARTING POSITION OF THE TRAVEL INDICATOR
ASSEMBLY IF INCREASING PRESSURE FROM
OUTPUT A DRIVES THE INDICATOR CLOCKWISE.
THE POTENTIOMETER SHAFT WILL ROTATE
COUNTERCLOCKWISE AS VIEWED FROM THE
BACK OF THE FIELDVUE INSTRUMENT.
NOTE: DVC6030 TRAVEL COUNTS (COUNTERCLOCKWISE) = 600 200
Figure 2-10. Explanation of FIELDVUE DVC6030 Travel Indicator Starting Position and Movement if Counterclockwise Orientation is
Selected for “Travel Sensor Motion” in ValveLink Software or the Field Communicator
2-12
September 2013
Installation
HOLE A
HOLE B
2
10C1796-A / Doc
TRAVEL
INDICATOR PIN
48B4164-B / DOC
FEEDBACK ARM
BIAS SPRING
Figure 2-12. FIELDVUE DVC6005 Base Unit with Mounting
Bracket (Rear View)
Figure 2-11. Positioning Travel Indicator Pin in the Feedback Arm
(Viewed as if Looking from the FIELDVUE DVC6030 toward the
Actuator)
DVC6015 on Sliding-Stem Actuators Up
to 102 mm (4 Inches) of Travel
DVC6005 Base Unit
For remote-mounted digital valve controllers, the
DVC6005 base unit ships separately from the control
valve and does not include tubing, fittings or wiring.
See the instructions that come with the mounting kit
for detailed information on mounting the base unit to a
specific actuator model.
For remote-mounted instruments, mount the DVC6005
base unit on a 50.8 mm (2-inch) pipestand or wall. The
included bracket is used for either mounting method.
If ordered as part of a control valve assembly, the
factory mounts the remote feedback unit on the
actuator, makes pneumatic connections to the
actuator, sets up, and calibrates the instrument. If you
purchased the remote feedback unit, you will need a
mounting kit to mount the remote feedback unit on the
actuator. See the instructions that come with the
mounting kit for detailed information on mounting the
remote feedback unit to a specific actuator model.
Wall Mounting
Refer to figures 2-12 and 2-13. Drill two holes in the
wall using the dimensions shown in figure 2-12. Attach
the mounting bracket to the base unit using four
spacers and 25.4 mm (1-inch) 1/4-20 hex head
screws. Attach the base unit to the wall using suitable
screws or bolts.
Pipestand Mounting
Refer to figure 2-13. Position a standoff on the back of
the base unit. Using two 101.6 mm (4-inch) 1/4-20 hex
head screws loosely attach the base unit to the
pipestand with the mounting bracket. Position the
second standoff, then using the remaining 101.6 mm
(4-inch) hex head screws, securely fasten the base
unit to the pipe stand.
September 2013
Note
Refer to the DVC6005 Base Unit
mounting instructions for off-actuator
mounting instructions.
The DVC6015 remote feedback unit mounts on
sliding-stem actuators with up to 102 mm (4-inch)
travel. Figure 2-1 shows a typical mounting on an
actuator with up to 51 mm (2 inch) travel. Figure 2-2
shows a typical mounting on actuators with 51 to 102
mm (2 to 4 inch) travel. For actuators with greater than
102 mm (4 inch) travel, see the guidelines for
mounting a DVC6025 remote feedback unit.
2-13
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
SPACER
Note
1-INCH 1/4-20
HEX HEAD SCREW
While the housing differs on the
DVC6015 and the DVC6010, feedback
parts are the same.
2
Refer to the following guidelines when mounting on
sliding-stem actuators with up to 4 inches of travel.
Where a key number is referenced, figure 8-7.
1. Isolate the control valve from the process line
pressure and release pressure from both sides of the
valve body. Shut off all pressure lines to the actuator,
releasing all pressure from the actuator. Use lock-out
procedures to be sure that the above measures stay in
effect while you work on the equipment.
MOUNTING BRACKET
W8473 / IL
WALL MOUNTING
2. Attach the connector arm to the valve stem
connector.
3. Attach the mounting bracket to the remote
feedback unit housing.
4. If valve travel exceeds 2 inches, a feedback arm
extension is attached to the existing 2-inch feedback
arm. Remove the existing bias spring (key 78) from
the 2-inch feedback arm (key 79). Attach the feedback
arm extension to the feedback arm (key 79) as shown
in figure 2-2.
STANDOFF
4-INCH 1/4-20
HEX HEAD SCREW
5. Mount the remote feedback unit on the actuator as
described in the mounting kit instructions.
6. Set the position of the feedback arm (key 79) on
the remote feedback unit to the no air position by
inserting the alignment pin (key 46) through the hole
on the feedback arm as follows:
For air-to-open actuators (i.e., the actuator
stem retracts into the actuator casing or cylinder as air
pressure to the casing or lower cylinder increases),
insert the alignment pin into the hole marked ‘‘A’’. For
this style actuator, the feedback arm rotates
counterclockwise, from A to B, as air pressure to the
casing or lower cylinder increases.
For air-to-close actuators (i.e., the actuator
stem extends from the actuator casing or cylinder as
air pressure to the casing or upper cylinder increases),
insert the alignment pin into the hole marked ‘‘B’’. For
this style actuator, the feedback arm rotates
clockwise, from B to A, as air pressure to the casing or
upper cylinder increases.
2-14
MOUNTING BRACKET
W8474 / IL
PIPESTAND MOUNTING
Figure 2-13. FIELDVUE DVC6005 Base Unit Mounting
Note
When performing the following steps,
ensure there is enough clearance
between the adjustment arm and the
feedback arm to prevent interference
with the bias spring.
7. Apply lubricant to the pin of the adjustment arm. As
shown in figure 2-3, place the pin into the slot of the
feedback arm or feedback arm extension so that the
bias spring loads the pin against the side of the arm
with the valve travel markings.
September 2013
Installation
8. Install the external lock washer on the adjustment
arm. Position the adjustment arm in the slot of the
connector arm and loosely install the flanged hex nut.
9. Slide the adjustment arm pin in the slot of the
connector arm until the pin is in line with the desired
valve travel marking. Tighten the flanged hex nut.
10. Remove the alignment pin (key 46) and store it in
the module base next to the I/P assembly.
11. After calibrating the instrument, attach the shield
with two machine screws.
DVC6025 on Long-Stroke (4 to 24 Inch
Travel) Sliding-Stem Actuators and
Rotary Actuators
If ordered as part of a control valve assembly, the
factory mounts the remote feedback unit on the
actuator, makes pneumatic connections to the
actuator, sets up, and calibrates the instrument. If you
purchased the remote feedback unit separately, you
will need a mounting kit to mount the remote feedback
unit on the actuator. See the instructions that come
with the mounting kit for detailed information on
mounting the remote feedback unit to a specific
actuator model.
Note
Refer to the DVC6005 Base Unit
mounting instructions on page 2-13 for
off-actuator mounting instructions.
DVC6025 remote feedback units use a cam and roller
as the feedback mechanism. Figure 2-4 shows an
example of mounting on sliding-stem actuators with
travels from 4 inches to 24 inches. Some long-stroke
applications will require an actuator with a tapped
lower yoke boss. Figures 2-5 and 2-6 show examples
of mounting on rotary actuators.
Note
While the housing differs on the
DVC6025 and the DVC6020, feedback
parts are the same.
As shown in figure 2-5, two feedback arms are
available for the remote feedback unit. Most
long-stroke sliding-stem and rotary actuator
September 2013
installations use the long feedback arm [62 mm (2.45
inches) from roller to pivot point]. Installations on 1051
size 33 and 1052 size 20 and 33 actuators use the
short feedback arm [54 mm (2.13 inches) from roller to
pivot point]. Make sure the correct feedback arm is
installed on the remote feedback unit before beginning
the mounting procedure.
Refer to figures 2-4, 2-5, and 2-6 for parts locations.
Refer to the following guidelines when mounting on
sliding-stem actuators with 4 to 24 inches of travel or
on rotary actuators:
1. Isolate the control valve from the process line
pressure and release pressure from both sides of the
valve body. Shut off all pressure lines to the
pneumatic actuator, releasing all pressure from the
actuator. Use lock-out procedures to be sure that the
above measures stay in effect while working on the
equipment.
2. If a cam is not already installed on the actuator,
install the cam as described in the instructions
included with the mounting kit. For sliding-stem
actuators, the cam is installed on the stem connector.
3. If a mounting plate is required, fasten the mounting
plate to the actuator.
4. For applications that require remote venting, a
pipe-away bracket kit is available. Follow the
instructions included with the kit to replace the existing
mounting bracket on the remote feedback unit with the
pipe-away bracket and to transfer the feedback parts
from the existing mounting bracket to the pipe-away
bracket.
5. Larger size actuators may require a follower arm
extension, as shown in figure 2-6. If required, the
follower arm extension is included in the mounting kit.
Follow the instructions included with the mounting kit
to install the follower arm extension.
6. Apply anti-seize (key 64) to the arm assembly pin
as shown in figure 2-7.
7. Mount the DVC6025 on the actuator as follows:
If required, a mounting adaptor is included in the
mounting kit. Attach the adaptor to the actuator as
shown in figure 2-5. Then attach the remote feedback
unit assembly to the adaptor. The roller on the remote
feedback unit feedback arm will contact the actuator
cam as it is being attached.
If no mounting adaptor is required, attach the
remote feedback unit assembly to the actuator or
mounting plate. The roller on the remote feedback unit
feedback arm will contact the actuator cam as it is
being attached.
8. For long-stroke sliding-stem actuators, after the
mounting is complete, check to be sure the roller
aligns with the position mark on the cam (see
2-15
2
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
figure 2-4). If necessary, reposition the cam to attain
alignment.
DVC6035 on Quarter-Turn Actuators
2
If ordered as part of a control valve assembly, the
factory mounts the remote feedback unit on the
actuator, makes pneumatic connections to the
actuator, sets up, and calibrates the instrument. If you
purchased the remote feedback unit separately, you
will need a mounting kit to mount the remote feedback
unit on the actuator. See the instructions that come
with the mounting kit for detailed information on
mounting the remote feedback unit to a specific
actuator model.
DVC6035
FEEDBACK ARM
MOVEMENT
DVC6035
FEEDBACK ARM
MOVEMENT
E0989
49B7988 / Doc
ACTUATOR SHAFT MOVEMENT
Note
Refer to the DVC6005 Base Unit
mounting instructions on page 2-13 for
off-actuator mounting instructions.
Figure 2-8 shows an example of mounting on a
quarter-turn actuator. Refer to figure 2-8 for parts
locations. Refer to the following guidelines when
mounting on quarter-turn actuators:
STARTING POSITION OF THE TRAVEL
INDICATOR ASSEMBLY IF INCREASING
PRESSURE FROM OUTPUT A DRIVES
THE INDICATOR CLOCKWISE. THE
POTENTIOMETER SHAFT WILL ROTATE
COUNTERCLOCKWISE AS VIEWED FROM
THE BACK OF THE INSTRUMENT.
NOTE: DVC6035 TRAVEL COUNTS
(COUNTERCLOCKWISE) = 600 200
ACTUATOR SHAFT MOVEMENT
STARTING POSITION OF THE TRAVEL
INDICATOR ASSEMBLY IF INCREASING
PRESSURE FROM OUTPUT A DRIVES
THE INDICATOR COUNTERCLOCKWISE.
THE POTENTIOMETER SHAFT WILL
ROTATE CLOCKWISE AS VIEWED
FROM THE BACK OF THE INSTRUMENT
NOTE: DVC6035 TRAVEL COUNTS
(CLOCKWISE) = 3400 200
Figure 2-14. FIELDVUE DVC6035 Travel Indicator Installation
4. If required, attach the spacer to the actuator shaft.
Note
While the housing differs on the
DVC6035 and the DVC6030, feedback
parts are the same.
1. Isolate the control valve from the process line
pressure and release pressure from both sides of the
valve body. Shut off all pressure lines to the pneumatic
actuator, releasing all pressure from the actuator. Use
lock-out procedures to be sure that the above
measures stay in effect while working on the
equipment.
2. If necessary, remove the existing hub from the
actuator shaft.
3. If a positioner plate is required, attach the
positioner plate to the actuator as described in the
mounting kit instructions.
2-16
Refer to figure 2-14. The travel indicator assembly can
have a starting position of 7:30 or 10:30. Determine
the desired starting position then proceed with the next
step. Considering the top of the remote travel sensor
as the 12 o’clock position, in the next step attach the
travel indicator, so that the pin is positioned as follows:
If increasing pressure from the base unit
output A rotates the remote feedback units
potentiometer shaft counterclockwise (as viewed
from the back of the instrument), mount the travel
indicator assembly such that the arrow is in the 7:30
position, as shown in figures 2-10 and 2-14.
If increasing pressure from the base unit
output A rotates the remote feedback units
potentiometer shaft clockwise (as viewed from the
back of the instrument), mount the travel indicator
assembly such that the arrow is in the 10:30 position,
as shown in figures 2-9 and 2-14.
September 2013
Installation
5. Attach the travel indicator, to the shaft connector or
spacer as described in the mounting kit instructions.
Note
ValveLink software and the Field
Communicator use the convention of
clockwise (figure 2-9) and
counterclockwise (figure 2-10) when
viewing the potentiometer shaft from
the back of the FIELDVUE instrument.
September 2013
6. Attach the mounting bracket to the remote
feedback unit.
7. Position the remote feedback unit so that the pin on
the travel indicator, engages the slot in the feedback
arm and that the bias spring loads the pin as shown in
figure 2-11. Attach the remote feedback unit to the
actuator or positioner plate.
8. If a travel indicator scale is included in the
mounting kit, attach the scale as described in the
mounting kit instructions.
2-17
2
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
FISHER 67CFR
2
CAP SCREWS
NOTE:
APPLY LUBRICANT
1
W8077 / IL
O-RING
1
SUPPLY CONNECTION
Figure 2-15. Mounting the Fisher 67CFR Regulator on a FIELDVUE DVC6000 Digital Valve Controller
67CFR Filter Regulator
Casing-Mounted Regulator
A 67CFR filter regulator, when used with DVC6000
digital valve controllers, can be mounted three ways.
Use the separate 67CFR filter regulator casing
mounting bracket provided with the filter regulator.
Attach the mounting bracket to the 67CFR and then
attach this assembly to the actuator casing. Thread a
1/4-inch socket-head pipe plug into the unused outlet
on the filter regulator. The O-ring is not required.
Integral-Mounted Regulator
Refer to figure 2-15. Lubricate an O-ring and insert it
in the recess around the SUPPLY connection on the
digital valve controller. Attach the 67CFR filter
regulator to the side of the digital valve controller.
Thread a 1/4-inch socket-head pipe plug into the
unused outlet on the filter regulator. This is the
standard method of mounting the filter regulator.
Pressure Connections
WARNING
Refer to the Installation WARNING at
the beginning of this section.
Yoke-Mounted Regulator
Mount the filter regulator with 2 cap screws to the
pre-drilled and tapped holes in the actuator yoke.
Thread a 1/4-inch socket-head pipe plug into the
unused outlet on the filter regulator. The O-ring is not
required.
2-18
Pressure connections are shown in figure 2-16. All
pressure connections on the digital valve controller are
1/4 NPT internal connections. Use at least 10 mm
(3/8-inch) tubing for all pneumatic connections. If
remote venting is required, refer to the vent
subsection.
September 2013
Installation
Supply Connections
LOOP CONNECTIONS
TERMINAL BOX
WARNING
To avoid personal injury and property
damage resulting from bursting of
parts, do not exceed maximum supply
pressure.
1/2 NPT
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
2
Personal injury or property damage
may result from fire or explosion if
natural gas is used as the supply
medium and appropriate preventive
measures are not taken. Preventive
measures may include, but are not
limited to, one or more of the
following: Remote venting of the unit,
re-evaluating the hazardous area
classification, ensuring adequate
ventilation, and the removal of any
ignition sources. For information on
remote venting of this controller, refer
to page 2-22.
FEEDBACK CONNECTIONS
TERMINAL BOX
DVC6005 BASE UNIT
1/2 NPT
CONDUIT
CONNECTIONS
(BOTH SIDES)
OUTPUT A
CONNECTION
Severe personal injury or property
damage may occur from an
uncontrolled process if the
instrument supply medium is not
clean, dry, oil-free, and noncorrosive.
While use and regular maintenance of
a filter that removes particles larger
than 40 micrometers in diameter will
suffice in most applications, check
with an Emerson Process
Management field office and industry
instrument air quality standards for
use with corrosive air or if you are
unsure about the amount of air
filtration or filter maintenance.
SUPPLY
CONNECTION
OUTPUT B
CONNECTION
WARNING
W7963 / IL
VALVE MOUNTED UNIT
NOTE:
PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS APPLICABLE TO BOTH VALVE-MOUNTED
INSTRUMENTS AND DVC6005 BASE UNIT.
Figure 2-16. FIELDVUE DVC6000 Digital Valve Controller
Connections
September 2013
When using natural gas as the supply
medium, or for explosion proof
applications, the following warnings
also apply:
Remove electrical power before
removing the housing cap. Personal
injury or property damage from fire
or explosion may result if power is
not disconnected before removing
the cap.
2-19
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Remove electrical power before
disconnecting any of the pneumatic
connections.
When disconnecting any of the
pneumatic connections or any
pressure retaining part, natural gas
will seep from the unit and any
connected equipment into the
surrounding atmosphere. Personal
injury or property damage may result
from fire or explosion if natural gas
is used as the supply medium and
appropriate preventive measures are
not taken. Preventive measures may
include, but are not limited to, one or
more of the following: Remote
venting of the unit, re-evaluating the
hazardous area classification,
ensuring adequate ventilation, and
the removal of any ignition sources.
For information on remote venting of
this controller, refer to page 2-22.
2
Ensure that that the covers is
correctly installed before putting this
unit back into service. Failure to do
so could result in personal injury or
property damage from fire or
explosion.
The DVC6000 can be used with air or natural gas as
the supply medium. If using natural gas as the
pneumatic supply medium, natural gas will be used in
the pneumatic output connections of the DVC6000 to
any connected equipment. In normal operation the unit
will vent the supply medium into the surrounding
atmosphere unless it is remotely vented.
Natural Gas Certified, Single Seal instruments can be
identified by the natural gas approval label shown in
figure 2-17. The Natural Gas Certified, Single Seal
device option simplifies conduit sealing requirements.
Read and follow all local, regional, and federal wiring
requirements for natural gas installations. Contact your
Emerson Process Management sales office for
information on obtaining a Natural Gas Certified,
Single Seal DVC6000 digital valve controller.
Supply pressure must be clean, dry air that meets the
requirements of ISA Standard 7.0.01.
Alternatively, natural gas must be clean, dry, oil-free,
and noncorrosive. H2S content should not exceed 20
ppm.
2-20
LABEL LOCATED ON
TOP OF TERMINAL
BOX
Figure 2-17. Gas Certified Label
A maximum 40 micrometer particle size in the air
system is acceptable. Further filtration down to 5
micrometer particle size is recommended. Lubricant
content is not to exceed 1 ppm weight (w/w) or volume
(v/v) basis. Condensation in the air supply should be
minimized.
A 67CFR filter regulator with standard 5 micrometer
filter, or equivalent, may be used to filter and regulate
supply medium. A filter regulator can be integrally
mounted onto the side of the digital valve controller,
casing mounted separate from the digital valve
controller, or mounted on the actuator mounting boss.
Supply and output pressure gauges may be supplied
on the digital valve controller. The output pressure
gauges can be used as an aid for calibration.
Connect the nearest suitable supply source to the
1/4 NPT IN connection on the filter regulator (if
furnished) or to the 1/4 NPT SUPPLY connection on
the digital valve controller housing (if 67CFR filter
regulator is not attached).
September 2013
Installation
Output Connections
A factory mounted digital valve controller has its
output piped to the pneumatic input connection on the
actuator. If mounting the digital valve controller in the
field, or installing the remote-mounted DVC6005 base
unit, connect the 1/4 NPT digital valve controller
output connections to the pneumatic actuator input
connections.
2
Single-Acting Actuators
When using a single-acting direct digital valve
controller (relay A or C) on a single-acting actuator
connect OUTPUT A to the actuator pneumatic input.
When using a single-acting reverse digital valve
controller (relay B) on a single-acting actuator connect
OUTPUT B to the actuator diaphragm casing.
Double-Acting Actuators
DVC6000 digital valve controllers on double-acting
actuators always use relay A. With no input current,
OUTPUT A is at 0 pressure and OUTPUT B is at full
supply pressure when the relay is properly adjusted.
To have the actuator stem extend from the cylinder
with increasing input signal, connect OUTPUT A to the
upper actuator cylinder connection. Connect OUTPUT
B to the lower cylinder connection. Figure 2-18 shows
the digital valve controller connected to a
double-acting piston actuator.
September 2013
W9131-1
Figure 2-18. FIELDVUE DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller
Mounted on Fisher 585C Piston Actuator
To have the actuator stem retract into the cylinder with
increasing input signal, connect OUTPUT A to the
lower actuator cylinder connection. Connect OUTPUT
B to the upper cylinder connection.
2-21
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
24/48 VDC
110/220 VAC, etc.
CONTROL SIGNAL
(4-20 mA, 0-20 mA,
0-24 VDC)
CONTROL LINE
Port A
2
Port B
DVC6000 DIGITAL VALVE
CONTROLLER WITH RELAY C
SUPPLY PRESSURE
MONITORING LINE
NOTES:
1/4-18 NPT X 3/8 OD TUBING
ELECTRICAL WIRING
SPRING RETURN ACTUATOR
E1048
Figure 2-19. Pneumatic Hookup for Solenoid Testing
Special Construction to Support Solenoid
Valve Testing
In single-acting actuator applications with a solenoid
valve installed, the DVC6000 can be configured to test
the operation of the solenoid valve. This is
accomplished by connecting the “unused” output port
from the DVC6000 to the pneumatic line between the
solenoid valve and the actuator, as shown in figure
2-19. When single-acting, direct relay C is installed,
the “unused” output port is port B. When single-acting,
reverse relay B is used, the unused port is port A.
Note
This application is called “special
application” in the Setup Wizard relay
selection.
This configuration is not possible with
a double-acting actuator or when
using relay A in single-acting mode.
Vent
WARNING
Note
Solenoid valve testing is only available
for instrument level PD and ODV.
2-22
Personal injury or property damage
can occur from cover failure due to
overpressure. Ensure that the
housing vent opening is open and
free of debris to prevent pressure
buildup under the cover.
September 2013
Installation
WARNING
This unit vents the supply medium
into the surrounding atmosphere.
When installing this unit in a
non-hazardous (non-classified)
location in a confined area, with
natural gas as the supply medium,
you must remotely vent this unit to a
safe location. Failure to do so could
result in personal injury or property
damage from fire or explosion, and
area re-classification.
When installing this unit in a
hazardous (classified) location remote
venting of the unit may be required,
depending upon the area
classification, and as specified by the
requirements of local, regional, and
federal codes, rules and regulations.
Failure to do so when necessary
could result in personal injury or
property damage from fire or
explosion, and area re-classification.
Vent line piping should comply with
local and regional codes and should
be as short as possible with adequate
inside diameter and few bends to
reduce case pressure buildup.
In addition to remote venting of the
unit, ensure that all caps and covers
are correctly installed. Failure to do
so could result in personal injury or
property damage from fire or
explosion, and area re-classification.
The relay output constantly bleeds supply medium into
the area under the cover. The vent opening at the
back of the housing should be left open to prevent
pressure buildup under the cover. If a remote vent is
required, the vent line must be as short as possible
with a minimum number of bends and elbows.
To connect a remote vent to DVC6010 and
DVC6030 digital valve controllers and DVC6005
base unit—remove the plastic vent (key 52, figures
8-2 and 8-5). The vent connection is 3/8 NPT internal.
At a minimum, 12.7 mm (1/2-inch) tubing should be
used when installing a remote vent to prevent
excessive pressure from building up under the cover.
September 2013
To connect a remote vent to DVC6020 digital valve
controllers—replace the standard mounting bracket
(key 74, figures 8-3 and 8-5) with the vent-away
bracket (key 74). Install a pipe plug in the vent-away
mounting bracket (key 74). Mount the digital valve
controller on the actuator as described in the
Installation section of this manual. The vent
connection is 3/8 NPT internal. At a minimum, 12.7
mm (1/2-inch) tubing should be used when installing a
remote vent to prevent excessive pressure from
building up under the cover.
Electrical Connections
WARNING
To avoid personal injury resulting
from electrical shock, do not exceed
the maximum input voltage specified
in table 1-2 of this instruction manual,
or on the product nameplate. If the
input voltage specified differs, do not
exceed the lowest specified maximum
input voltage.
Select wiring and/or cable glands that
are rated for the environment of use
(such as hazardous area, ingress
protection and temperature). Failure
to use properly rated wiring and/or
cable glands can result in personal
injury or property damage from fire or
explosion.
Wiring connections must be in
accordance with local, regional, and
national codes for any given
hazardous area approval. Failure to
follow the local, regional, and national
codes could result in personal injury
or property damage from fire or
explosion.
The valve may move in an unexpected
direction when power is applied to the
DVC6000 digital valve controller. To
avoid personal injury and property
damage caused by moving parts,
keep hands, tools, and other objects
away from the valve/actuator
assembly when applying power to the
instrument.
2-23
2
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
WARNING
SAFETY GROUND
TALK−
TALK+
To avoid personal injury or property
damage caused by fire or explosion,
remove power to the instrument
before removing the terminal box
cover in an area which contains a
potentially explosive atmosphere or
has been classified as hazardous.
2
EARTH GROUND
LOOP+
39B3399-B Sheet 2
4-20 mA Loop Connections
The digital valve controller is normally powered by a
control system output card. The use of shielded cable
will ensure proper operation in electrically noisy
environments.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or property
damage from the sudden release of
process pressure, be sure the valve is
not controlling the process. The valve
may move when the source is applied.
Wire the digital valve controller as follows: (unless
indicated otherwise, refer to figures 8-2 through 8-4 for
identification of parts).
1. Remove the terminal box cap (key 4) from the
terminal box (key 3).
2. Bring the field wiring into the terminal box. When
applicable, install conduit using local and national
electrical codes which apply to the application.
3. Refer to figure 2-20. Connect the control system
output card positive wire ‘‘current output’’ to the LOOP
+ screw terminal in the terminal box. Connect the
control system output card negative (or return) wire to
the LOOP − screw terminal.
2-24
LOOP−
Figure 2-20. FIELDVUE DVC6000 Digital Valve Controller
Terminal Box
WARNING
Personal injury or property damage,
caused by fire or explosion, can
result from the discharge of static
electricity. Connect a 14 AWG (2.08
mm2) ground strap between the
digital valve controller and earth
ground when flammable or
hazardous gases are present. Refer
to national and local codes and
standards for grounding
requirements.
To avoid static discharge from the
plastic cover when flammable gases
or dust are present, do not rub or
clean the cover with solvents. To do
so could result in a spark that may
cause the flammable gases or dust
to explode, resulting in personal
injury or property damage. Clean
with a mild detergent and water
only.
4. As shown in figure 2-20, two ground terminals are
available for connecting a safety ground, earth ground,
or drain wire. These ground terminals are electrically
identical. Make connections to these terminals
following national and local codes and plant standards.
5. Replace and hand tighten the terminal box cap.
When the loop is ready for startup, apply power to the
control system output card.
September 2013
Installation
Remote Travel Sensor Connections
The DVC6005 base unit is designed to receive travel
information via a remote sensor. The remote can be
any of the following:
Emerson Process Management supplied
DVC6015, DVC6025 or DVC6035 feedback unit,
An under-traveled 10 kOhm potentiometer used
in conjunction with onboard 30 kOhm resistor, or
A potentiometer used in conjunction with two
fixed resistors (potentiometer travel is the same as
actuator travel).
WARNING
Personal injury or property damage,
caused by wiring failure, can result if
the feedback wiring connecting the
base unit with the remote feedback
unit shares a conduit with any other
power or signal wiring.
Do not place feedback wiring in the
same conduit as other power or
signal wiring.
national electrical codes. Route the 3-conductor
shielded cable between the two units (refer to
figure 2-21).
4. Connect one wire of the 3-conductor shielded cable
between terminal 1 on the feedback unit and terminal
1 on the base unit.
5. Connect the second wire of the 3-conductor
shielded cable between terminal 2 on the feedback
unit and terminal 2 on the base unit.
6. Connect the third wire of the 3-conductor shielded
cable between terminal 3 on the feedback unit and
terminal 3 on the base unit.
7. Connect the cable shield or drain wire to the
ground screw in the feedback connections terminal
box of the base unit.
Note
Do not connect the shield or drain wire
to any terminal on the feedback unit,
to the earth ground, or any other
alternative ground.
8. Replace and hand-tighten all covers.
Note
3-conductor shielded cable, 22 AWG
minimum wire size, is required for
connection between base unit and
feedback unit. Pneumatic tubing
between base unit output connection
and actuator has been tested to 15
meters (50 feet) maximum without
performance degradation.
Using the DVC6015, DVC6025 & DVC6035
Feedback Unit as a Remote Travel Sensor
1. On the feedback unit, remove the housing cap.
2. On the base unit, remove the feedback
connections terminal box cap (see figure 2-16).
3. If necessary, install conduit between the feedback
unit and the base unit following applicable local and
September 2013
Using an External 10 kOhm External
Potentiometer as a Remote Travel Sensor
Note
Potentiometer travel must be between
1.3 and 1.6 times greater than the
actuator travel. For example: if an
actuator has a travel of 9 inches, then
a linear potentiometer must be
selected with a rated travel between
11.7 and 14.4 inches. The resistive
element must be tapered from 0 kOhm
to 10 kOhm over rated travel of the
potentiometer. The actuator will only
use 63 to 76 % of the potentiometer
rated travel.
2-25
2
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
FEEDBACK CONNECTIONS
TERMINAL BOX
2
W8477 / IL
W8475 / IL
GROUND
SCREW
BASE UNIT
FEEDBACK UNIT
TO FEEDBACK UNIT TERMINAL 3
TO FEEDBACK UNIT TERMINAL 2
TO FEEDBACK UNIT TERMINAL 1
TERMINAL 1
TERMINAL 2
TERMINAL 3
W8476 / IL
W8478-1 / IL
FEEDBACK UNIT
FEEDBACK CONNECTIONS TERMINAL BOX
Figure 2-21. Terminal Details for Connecting Base Unit and Feedback Units of Remote-Mounted Digital Valve Controllers
3
Note
The base unit (DVC6005) was designed to work with a
40 kOhm potentiometer for travel feedback. However,
there are linear potentiometers that are readily
available with a rated resistance of 10 kOhm.
Therefore, the feedback connections terminal box of
the DVC6005 contains an additional 30 kOhm fixed
resistor that may be added to the circuit. This brings
the total resistance up to the required 40 kOhm.
1. Mount the external 10 kOhm potentiometer to the
actuator such that the mid-travel position of the
potentiometer (5 kOhm) corresponds to the mid-travel
position of the actuator. This will leave an equal
amount of unused resistive element on both ends of
the travel, which is required by the digital valve
controller to function properly.
2-26
2
INTERNAL
1
(30k W)
The digital valve controller must be
configured using the SStem/Roller
selection on the menu of the
appropriate setup device.
"
10k W
30k
BASE UNIT TERMINATION BOX
(DVC6005)
3RD PARTY FEEDBACK ELEMENT
(WITH 10k W POTENTIOMETER)
Figure 2-22. Terminal Details for Connecting a FIELDVUE
DVC6005 Base Unit and a 10k Ohm External Potentiometer
2. On the base unit, remove the feedback
connections terminal box cap (see figure 2-16).
3. If necessary, install conduit between the
potentiometer and the base unit following applicable
local and national electrical codes. Route the
3-conductor shielded cable between the two units
(refer to figure 2-22).
September 2013
Installation
4. Connect one wire of the 3-conductor shielded cable
between the terminal labeled “30kW” on the base unit
and one end lead of the potentiometer.
3
5. Connect the second wire of the 3-conductor
shielded cable between the middle lead (wiper) of the
10 kOhm potentiometer to Terminal 2 on the base
unit.
6. Connect the third wire of the 3-conductor shielded
cable between Terminal 3 on the base unit and the
other end-lead of the 10 kOhm potentiometer.
7. Connect the cable shield or drain wire to the
ground screw in the feedback connections terminal
box of the base unit. Do not connect the shield or
drain wire to the external potentiometer.
8. Replace and tighten the base unit cover.
Using a Potentiometer with Two Fixed
Resistors as a Remote Travel Sensor
Perform the following procedure if a potentiometer is
used with the same, or slightly longer travel than the
actuator’s travel.
Note
The potentiometer must be capable of
resistance close to 0 Ohms.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the
potentiometer, ensure that it is free to
travel the entire length of the
actuator’s travel.
Note
The digital valve controller must be
configured using the SStem/Roller
selection on the menu of the
appropriate setup device.
This procedure uses three resistors connected in
series, two fixed resistors and one potentiometer.
Three conditions must be met for the resistor
combination to correctly operate the digital valve
controller:
September 2013
2
(R2)
1
30kW
"
(R1)
(Rpot)
2
BASE UNIT TERMINATION BOX
(DVC6005)
THREE-RESISTOR SERIES
Figure 2-23. Terminal Details for Connecting a FIELDVUE
DVC6005 Base Unit and a Three-Resistor Series
The maximum resistance of the potentiometer
(Rpot(max)) must be between 3.9 kOhm and 10 kOhm.
The resistance of R1 is 4.25 times greater than
Rpot(max).
The resistance of R2 is 4 times less than
Rpot(max).
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or property
damage from an uncontrolled process
ensure that the R1 resistor is properly
insulated before installing it in the
terminal box.
1. On the base unit, remove the feedback
connections terminal box cap (see figure 2-16).
2. If necessary, install conduit between the
two-resistor series and the base unit following
applicable local and national electrical codes. Route
the 3-conductor shielded cable between the two units
(refer to figure 2-23).
3. Install the fixed resistor (R1) across the unlabeled
bottom Terminal and Terminal #1. The bottom terminal
does not have a screw. The screw on the 30 kOhm
terminal can be used. R1 must be properly insulated
when installed in the terminal box to prevent personal
injury or property damage.
4. Connect one wire of the 3-conductor shielded cable
between the unlabeled bottom Terminal on the base
unit and an end-lead of the external potentiometer
(Rpot).
5. Connect the second wire of the 3-conductor
shielded cable between the middle lead (wiper) of the
external potentiometer (Rpot) and Terminal 2 on the
base unit.
2-27
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
6. Connect the third wire of the 3-conductor shielded
cable between between a lead on fixed resistor (R2)
and terminal #3 of the base unit.
7. Connect the available end-lead on the
potentiometer (Rpot) with the available lead on fixed
resistor (R2).
2
8. Connect the cable shield or drain wire to the
ground screw in the feedback connections terminal
box of the base unit. Do not connect the shield or
drain wire to the two-resistor series.
2-28
9. Replace and tighten the base unit cover.
Example: Using a linear potentiometer rated at 400
Ohms/inch on an actuator with 16” of travel.
Rpot(max) is 400 Ohms/in x 16” = 6.4 kOhm
R1 = 6.4 kOhm x 4.25 = 27.2 kOhm
R2 = 6.4 kOhm / 4 = 1.6 kOhm
September 2013
Installation
Test Connections
WARNING
Personal injury or property damage
caused by fire or explosion may occur
if this connection is attempted in a
potentially explosive atmosphere, or
in an area that has been classified as
hazardous. Confirm that area
classification and atmosphere
conditions permit the safe removal of
the terminal box cap before
proceeding.
Test connections inside the terminal box can be used
to measure loop current across a 1 ohm resistor.
1. Remove the terminal box cap.
2. Adjust the test meter to measure a range of 0.001
to 0.1 volts.
3. Connect the positive lead of the test meter to the
TEST + connection and the negative lead to the TEST
− connection inside the terminal box.
4. Measure Loop current as:
Voltage (on test meter) 1000 = milliamps
example:
Test meter Voltage X 1000 = Loop Milliamps
0.004 X1000 = 4.0 milliamperes
0.020 X 1000 = 20.0 milliamperes
5. Remove test leads and replace the terminal box
cover.
September 2013
Communication Connections
WARNING
Personal injury or property damage
caused by fire or explosion may occur
if this connection is attempted in a
potentially explosive atmosphere or in
an area that has been classified as
hazardous. Confirm that area
classification and atmosphere
conditions permit the safe removal of
the terminal box cap before
proceeding.
2
A HART communicating device, such as a 475 Field
Communicator or a personal computer running
ValveLink software communicating through a HART
modem, interfaces with the DVC6000 digital valve
controller from any wiring termination point in the 4-20
mA loop. If you choose to connect the HART
communicating device directly to the instrument,
attach the device to the LOOP + and LOOP −
terminals or to the TALK + and TALK − connections
inside the terminal box to provide local
communications with the instrument.
2-29
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
NON-HART BASED
DCS
I/O
I/O
HART
FILTER
2
4-20 mA
DIGITAL VALVE
CONTROLLER
Tx
Tx
VALVE
A6188-1/IL
Figure 2-24. HART Filter Application
Wiring Practices
Control System Requirements
There are several parameters that should be checked
to ensure the control system is compatible with the
DVC6000 digital valve controller.
communication. For more information on the
description and use of the HART filter, refer to the
separate HART filter instruction manual.
Contact your Emerson Process Management sales
office if assistance is needed to determine if your
system requires a filter.
HART Filter
Depending on the control system you are using, a
HART filter may be needed to allow HART
communication. The HART filter is a passive device
that is inserted in field wiring from the HART loop. The
filter is normally installed near the field wiring terminals
of the control system I/O (see figure 2-24). Its purpose
is to effectively isolate the control system output from
modulated HART communication signals and raise the
impedance of the control system to allow HART
2-30
Note
A HART filter is typically NOT required
for any of the Emerson Process
Management control systems,
including PROVOXt, RS3t, and
DeltaVt systems.
September 2013
Installation
TOTAL LOOP
CABLE RESISTANCE
THUM ADAPTER
(IF USED)
COMPLIANCE VOLTAGE
CONTROL
SYSTEM
+
−
INTRINSIC SAFETY
BARRIER
(if used)
HART
FILTER
(if used)
R
Calculate Voltage Available at the Instrument as
follows:
Control system compliance voltage
– Filter voltage drop (if used)
+
−
VOLTAGE
AVAILABLE AT
THE
INSTRUMENT
2
Example Calculation
18.5 volts (at 21.05 mA)
1
– 2.3 volts (for HF300 filter)
– Intrinsic safety barrier resistance (if used) x maximum loop current
– Smart Wireless THUM adapter voltage drop (if used)
– Total loop cable resistance x maximum loop
current
= Voltage available at the instrument
– 2.55 volts (121 ohms x 0.02105 amps)
2
3
– 1.01 volts (48 ohms x 0.02105 amps for
1000 feet of Belden 9501 cable)
= 15.19 volts, available—if safety barrier (2.55 volts)
is not used
NOTES:
1
Obtain filter voltage drop. The measured drop will be different than this value. The measured filter voltage drop
depends upon control system output voltage, the intrinsic safety barrier (if used), and the instrument. See note 3.
2
The voltage drop of the THUM adapter is linear from 2.25 volts at 3.5 mA to 1.2 volts at 25 mA.
3
The voltage available at the instrument is not the voltage measured at the instrument terminals. Once the instrument is
connected, the instrument limits the measured voltage to approximately 9.0 to 10.5 volts.
Figure 2-25. Determining Voltage Available at the Instrument
Voltage Available
The voltage available at the DVC6000 digital valve
controller must be at least 11 volts DC. The voltage
available at the instrument is not the actual voltage
measured at the instrument when the instrument is
connected. The voltage measured at the instrument is
limited by the instrument and is typically less than the
voltage available.
As shown in figure 2-25, the voltage available at the
instrument depends upon:
the control system compliance voltage
if a filter, wireless THUM adapter, or intrinsic
safety barrier is used, and
the wire type and length.
The control system compliance voltage is the
maximum voltage at the control system output
terminals at which the control system can produce
maximum loop current.
September 2013
The voltage available at the instrument may be
calculated from the following equation:
Voltage Available = [Control System Compliance
Voltage (at maximum current)] − [filter voltage drop (if
a HART filter is used)] − [total cable resistance maximum current] − [barrier resistance x maximum
current].
The calculated voltage available should be greater
than or equal to 11 volts DC.
Table 2-1 lists the resistance of some typical cables.
The following example shows how to calculate the
voltage available for a Honeywell TDC2000 control
system with a HF340 HART filter, and 1000 feet of
Belden 9501 cable:
Voltage available = [18.5 volts (at 21.05 mA)] − [2.3
volts] − [48 ohms 0.02105 amps]
Voltage available = [18.5] − [2.3] − [1.01]
Voltage available = 15.19 volts
2-31
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Table 2-1. Cable Characteristics
Capacitance(1)
pF/Ft
Cable Type
2
Capacitance(1)
pF/m
Resistance(2)
Ohms/ft
Resistance(2)
Ohms/m
BS5308/1, 0.5 sq mm
61.0
200
0.022
0.074
BS5308/1, 1.0 sq mm
61.0
200
0.012
0.037
BS5308/1, 1.5 sq mm
61.0
200
0.008
0.025
BS5308/2, 0.5 sq mm
121.9
400
0.022
0.074
BS5308/2, 0.75 sq mm
121.9
400
0.016
0.053
BS5308/2, 1.5 sq mm
121.9
400
0.008
0.025
BELDEN 8303, 22 awg
63.0
206.7
0.030
0.098
BELDEN 8441, 22 awg
83.2
273
0.030
0.098
BELDEN 8767, 22 awg
76.8
252
0.030
0.098
BELDEN 8777, 22 awg
54.9
180
0.030
0.098
BELDEN 9501, 24 awg
50.0
164
0.048
0.157
BELDEN 9680, 24 awg
27.5
90.2
0.048
0.157
BELDEN 9729, 24 awg
22.1
72.5
0.048
0.157
BELDEN 9773, 18 awg
54.9
0.012
0.042
BELDEN 9829, 24 awg
27.1
0.048
0.157
BELDEN 9873, 20 awg
54.9
0.020
0.069
180
88.9
180
1. The capacitance values represent capacitance from one conductor to all other conductors and shield. This is the appropriate value to use in the cable length calculations.
2. The resistance values include both wires of the twisted pair.
1 kW POTENTIOMETER
MILLIAMMETER
VOLTMETER
CIRCUIT
UNDER
TEST
A6192-1/IL
Figure 2-26. Voltage Test Schematic
Compliance Voltage
If the compliance voltage of the control system is not
known, perform the following compliance voltage test.
1. Disconnect the field wiring from the control system
and connect equipment as shown in figure 2-26 to the
control system terminals.
2. Set the control system to provide maximum output
current.
2-32
3. Increase the resistance of the 1 kW potentiometer,
shown in figure 2-26, until the current observed on the
milliammeter begins to drop quickly.
4. Record the voltage shown on the voltmeter. This is
the control system compliance voltage.
For specific parameter information relating to your
control system, contact your Emerson Process
Management sales office.
September 2013
Installation
START HERE
A
B
Unpack the
HART Tri-Loop
Install the HART
Tri-Loop. See
HART Tri-Loop
product manual
Review the HART
Tri-Loop Product
Manual
Digital valve
controller
Installed?
Mount the
HART Tri-Loop
to the DIN rail.
No
Install the digital
valve controller.
Wire the digital
valve controller to
the HART Tri-Loop.
Configure the
HART Tri-Loop
to receive digital
valve controller
burst commands
2
Pass system
test?
No
Check
troubleshooting
procedures in
HART Tri-Loop
product manual.
Yes
Yes
Install Channel 1
wires from HART
Tri-Loop to the
control room.
Set the digital
valve controller
Burst Option
Set the digital
valve controller
Burst Mode
(Optional) Install
Channel 2 and 3 wires
from HART Tri-Loop
to the control room.
A
B
DONE
E0365 / IL
Figure 2-27. HART Tri-Loop Installation Flowchart
Maximum Cable Capacitance
The maximum cable length for HART communication
is limited by the characteristic capacitance of the
cable. Maximum length due to capacitance can be
calculated using the following formulas:
Length(ft) = [160,000 − Cmaster(pF)] [Ccable(pF/ft)]
Length(m) = [160,000 − Cmaster(pF)] [Ccable(pF/m)]
where:
160,000 = a constant derived for FIELDVUE
instruments to ensure that the HART network RC time
constant will be no greater than 65 μs (per the HART
specification).
Cmaster = the capacitance of the control system or
HART filter
Ccable = the capacitance of the cable used
(see table 2-1)
The following example shows how to calculate the
cable length for a Foxboro I/A control system (1988)
with a Cmaster of 50, 000 pF and a Belden 9501 cable
with characteristic capacitance of 50pF/ft.
Length(ft) = [160,000 − 50,000pF] [50pF/ft]
Length = 2200 ft.
The HART communication cable length is limited by
the cable characteristic capacitance. To increase
cable length, select a wire with lower capacitance per
foot. Contact your Emerson Process Management
September 2013
sales office for specific information relating to your
control system.
Installation in Conjunction with a
Rosemountt 333 HART Tri-Loop
HART-to-Analog Signal Converter
Use the DVC6000 digital valve controller in operation
with a Rosemount 333 HART Tri-Loop
HART-to-Analog Signal Converter to acquire an
independent 4-20 mA analog output signal for the
analog input, travel target, pressure, or travel. The
HART Tri-Loop accepts any three of these digital
signals and converts them into three separate 4-20
mA analog channels.
Refer to figure 2-27 for basic installation information.
Refer to the 333 HART Tri-Loop HART-to-Analog
Signal Converter Product Manual for complete
installation information.
Commissioning the Digital Valve
Controller for use with the HART
Tri-Loop Signal Converter
To prepare the digital valve controller for use with a
333 HART Tri-Loop, you must configure the digital
valve controller to burst mode, and select Burst
Command 3. In burst mode, the digital valve controller
provides digital information to the HART Tri-Loop
2-33
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
HART-to-Analog Signal Converter. The HART
Tri-Loop converts the digital information to a 4 to 20
mA analog signal. Each burst message contains the
latest value of the primary (analog input), secondary
(travel target), tertiary (configured output pressure),
and quaternary (travel) variables.
2
To commission a DVC6000 digital valve controller for
use with a HART Tri-Loop, perform the following
procedures.
Set the Burst Operation
(1-2-1-4)
1. From the Online menu, select Configure, Detailed
Setup, Mode and Protection, and Burst Mode.
2. Select Change Burst Enable. Select Enable then
press ENTER and SEND.
3. Select Change Burst Command. Select the desired
command (HART Univ Command 3).
4. Select Cmd 3 Configured Pressure. Select the
pressure you want the HART Tri-Loop to use as the
tertiary variable.
Command 3 provides the following variables:
Primary variable—analog input in % or ma,
Note
Instrument level AC does not support
HART Command 3 or Burst Mode
communications.
Secondary variable—travel target in % of ranged
travel,
Tertiary variable—supply or output pressure in psig,
bar, kPa, or kg/cm2. Select Cmd 3 Press from the
Burst menu to select if the output A, output B,
differential (A−B), or supply pressure is sent.
Quaternary variable—travel in % of ranged travel.
2-34
September 2013
Basic Setup
3-3
Section 3 Basic Setup
Instrument Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Configuration Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Guided Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Using the Performance Tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
Stabilizing/Optimizing Valve Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
September 2013
3
3-1
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Instrument Mode
To setup and calibrate the instrument, the instrument
mode must be Out Of Service.
To view the instrument mode, press the Hot Key and
select Instrument Mode. If the mode is not Out Of
Service, select Out Of Service from the Instrument
Mode menu and press ENTER.
Basic Setup (1-1)
WARNING
Changes to the instrument setup may
cause changes in the output pressure
or valve travel. Depending on the
application, these changes may upset
process control, which may result in
personal injury or property damage.
3
Note
Configuration Protection
To setup and calibrate the instrument, the protection
must be set to None with the Field Communicator. If
the protection is not None, changing the protection
requires placing a jumper across the Auxiliary
terminals in the terminal box.
To remove protection:
1. Connect a 4-20 mA source to the instrument.
2. Connect the Field Communicator to the instrument
and turn it on.
3. Press the Hot key on the Field Communicator and
select Protection.
Note
If the Auxiliary Terminal Action is
configured for Auto Calibration, be
sure the jumper remains across the
auxiliary terminals until the Field
Communicator prompts you to remove
it. Removing the jumper too soon will
cause the instrument to begin auto
travel calibration.
4. From the Protection menu, select None. When
prompted by the Field Communicator, temporarily
attach the jumper to the AUX + and AUX − terminals
in the instrument terminal box.
3-2
To setup and calibrate the instrument,
the protection must be None and the
Instrument Mode must be Out Of
Service. See Configuration Protection
and Instrument Mode at the beginning
of this section for information on
removing instrument protection and
changing the instrument mode.
If you are operating in burst mode, we
recommend that you disable burst
before continuing with calibration.
Once calibration is complete, burst
mode may then be turned back on.
When the DVC6000 digital valve controller is ordered
as part of a control valve assembly, the factory
mounts the digital valve controller and sets up the
instrument as specified on the order. When mounting
to a valve in the field, the instrument needs to be
setup to match the instrument to the valve and
actuator.
Before beginning Basic Setup, be sure the instrument
is correctly mounted as described in the Installation
section.
Setup Wizard (1-1-1)
To have the Field Communicator automatically setup
the instrument using specified actuator information,
from the Online Menu select Configure, Guided Setup,
and Setup Wizard. Follow the prompts on the Field
Communicator display to setup the instrument. Table
4-5 provides the actuator information required to setup
and calibrate the instrument.
1. Select travel or pressure control. Travel control is
the typical mode of operation.
2. Enter the pressure units: psi, bar, kPa, or kg/cm2.
September 2013
Basic Setup
Table 3-1. Factory Default Settings
Setup Parameter
Default Setting
Analog Input Units
Analog In Range High
Analog In Range Low
Control Mode
Restart Control Mode
mA
20.0 mA
4.0 mA
Analog
Resume Last
Self-Test Shutdown
Setpoint Filter Time
Input Characterization
Travel Limit High
Travel Limit Low
All Failures Disabled
0 secs
Linear
125%
−25%
Travel Cutoff High
Travel Cutoff Low
Set Point Rate Open(1)
Set Point Rate Close(2)
Polling Address
99.5%
0.5%
0 %/secs
0 %/secs
0
Auxiliary Terminal Action
Cmd 3 Configured Pressure
For double-acting actuators
For single-acting actuators
Auxiliary Input Alert
differential output pressure
actuator pressure
1. In firmware 2 thru 6 this parameter is labeled Minimum Opening Time. In firmware
10 and below this parameter should be set to zero.
2. In firmware 2 thru 6 this parameter is labeled Minimum Closing Time. In firmware
10 and below this parameter should be set to zero.
3. Enter the maximum instrument supply pressure.
After entering the maximum instrument supply
pressure, the Setup Wizard prompts you for actuator
information.
4. Enter the manufacturer of the actuator on which
the instrument is mounted. If the actuator
manufacturer is not listed, select Other.
5. Enter the actuator model or type. If the actuator
model is not listed, select Other.
6. Enter the actuator size.
7. Select whether the valve is open or closed under
the zero power condition.
WARNING
In the next step, if you answer YES to
the prompt for permission to move
the valve when the Field
Communicator is determining the
travel sensor motion, the instrument
will move the valve through its full
travel range. To avoid personal injury
and property damage caused by the
release of pressure or process fluid,
provide some temporary means of
control for the process.
8. Specify if a volume booster or quick release valve
is present.
9. Specify if factory defaults should be used for basic
setup. If you select YES for factory default, the Field
September 2013
Communicator sets the setup parameters to the
values listed in table 3-1. If you select NO for the
factory defaults, the setup parameters listed in the
table remain at their previous settings.
Typically the Setup Wizard determines the required
setup information based upon the actuator
manufacturer and model specified. However, if you
enter other for the actuator manufacturer or the
actuator model, then you will be prompted for setup
parameters such as:
Actuator style (spring & diaphragm, piston
double-acting without spring, piston single-acting with
spring, piston double-acting with spring),
Valve style (rotary or sliding stem),
On Loss of Instrument Signal (valve opens or
closes), see Zero Power Condition in the Detailed
Setup section.
Feedback connection (rotary-all, sstem-roller, or
sstem-standard), see Feedback Connection in the
Detailed Setup section.
Travel Sensor motion (increasing air pressure
causes the travel sensor shaft to rotate clockwise or
counterclockwise). The Field Communicator will ask if
it can move the valve to determine travel sensor
motion. If you answer yes, the instrument may stroke
the valve the full travel span to determine travel
sensor rotation. If you answer No, then you will have
to specify the rotation for increasing air pressure:
clockwise or counterclockwise. (see Travel Sensor
Motion in the Detailed Setup section).
Volume booster (indicate if volume booster or quick
release is present)
Tuning set (see Tuning Set in the Detailed Setup
section).
After completing the setup information, travel is
automatically calibrated. Follow the prompts on the
Field Communicator display. The calibration procedure
uses the valve and actuator stops as the 0% and
100% calibration points. For additional information,
refer to Auto Calibrate Travel on page 5-2 of the
Calibration section.
When travel calibration is complete, you are asked if
you wish to adjust the relay (double-acting only).
Select yes to adjust the relay. For additional
information, refer to Relay Adjustment on page 5-10 of
the Calibration section.
Note
Relay Adjustment is only available for
the double-acting relay (Relay A).
3-3
3
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
If after completing the Setup Wizard the valve seems
slightly unstable or unresponsive, you can improve
operation by selecting either Performance Tuner or
Stabilize/Optimize from the Guided Setup menu. For
additional information on using the Performance
Tuner, refer to Using the Performance Tuner in this
section. For additional information on stabilizing or
optimizing valve response, refer to Stabilize/Optimize
at the end of this section.
Using the Performance Tuner (1-1-2)
3
Stabilizing/Optimizing
Valve Response
or (1-1-2)
Note
Stabilize/Optimize is only available
through the Guided Setup menu for
instrument level HC.
Note
Performance Tuner is not available for
instrument level AC or HC.
WARNING
During performance tuning the valve
may move, causing process fluid or
pressure to be released. To avoid
personal injury and property damage
caused by the release of process fluid
or pressure, isolate the valve from the
process and equalize pressure on
both sides of the valve or bleed off
the process fluid.
The Performance Tuner is used to optimize digital
valve controller tuning. It can be used with digital valve
controllers mounted on most sliding-stem and rotary
actuators, including Fisher and other manufacturers’
products. Moreover, because the Performance Tuner
can detect internal instabilities before they become
apparent in the travel response, it can generally
optimize tuning more effectively than manual tuning.
Typically, the Performance Tuner takes 3 to 5 minutes
to tune an instrument, although tuning instruments
mounted on larger actuators may take longer.
Access Performance Tuner by selecting Performance
Tuner from the Guided Setup menu. Follow the
prompts on the Field Communicator display to
optimize digital valve controller tuning.
3-4
WARNING
During Stabilize/Optimize the valve
may move, causing process fluid or
pressure to be released. To avoid
personal injury and property damage
caused by the release of process fluid
or pressure, isolate the valve from the
process and equalize pressure on
both sides of the valve or bleed off
the process fluid.
If after completing setup and calibration the valve
seems slightly unstable or unresponsive, you can
improve operation by pressing the Hot Key and
selecting Stabilize/Optimize, or select
Stabilize/Optimize from the Guided Setup menu.
Stabilize/Optimize permits you to adjust valve
response by changing the digital valve controller
If the valve is unstable, select Decrease Response to
stabilize valve operation,. This selects the next lower
tuning set (e.g., F to E). If the valve response is
sluggish, select Increase Response to make the valve
more responsive. This selects the next higher tuning
set (e.g., F to G).
If after selecting Decrease Response or Increase
Response the valve travel overshoot is excessive
select Decrease Damping to select a damping value
that allows more overshoot. Select Increase Damping
to select a damping value that will decrease the
overshoot. When finished, select done.
September 2013
Detailed Setup
4-4
Section 4 Detailed Setup
Menu and Quick Key Sequence Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Cover
Detailed Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
Mode and Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
4-2
4-3
Response Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Travel Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Travel/Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Travel/Pressure Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cutoffs and Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
End Point Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Custom Characterization Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-7
4-9
4-9
4-9
4-9
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-11
Alert Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronics Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensor Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environment Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Travel Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Travel History Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIS Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alert Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12
4-12
4-13
4-13
4-13
4-15
4-15
4-16
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-16
Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-17
Valve and Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-18
SIS/Partial Stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-19
September 2013
4
4-1
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Detailed Setup (1-2)
Table 4-1. Factory Default Detailed Setup Parameters
Setup Parameter
Control Mode
Note
Detailed Setup is not available for
instrument level AC.
Resume Last
Zero Power Condition
Valve Open(2)
Analog In Range Low
4 mA
Analog In Range High
20 mA
4
Rotary − All(2)
Travel Sensor Motion
Clockwise(2)
Auxiliary Terminal Action
20(2)
Pressure Units
PSI
Burst Mode Enable
Burst Command
Cmd 3 Configured Pressure
Tuning Set
0.50%
Set Point Rate Open(3)
0%/sec
Set Point Rate Close(4)
0%/sec
Integral Dead Zone
No
Cycle Counter Alert Point
1000000
Travel Accumulator Alert
Enable
No
Travel Accumulator Deadband
1%
Travel Accumulator Alert Point
1000000
Travel Deviation Alert Enable
Yes
Pressure Deviation Alert
Enable
Yes
5 psi
Pressure Deviation Alert Time
9.99 sec
Drive Signal Alert Enable
Travel Alert Lo Enable
Lo Point
Travel Alert Hi Enable
Hi Point
Travel Alert Lo Lo Enable
Lo Lo Point
Travel Alert Hi Hi Enable
Hi Hi Point
Electronic
Alerts
5%
9.99 sec
Pressure Deviation Alert Point
Supply Pressure Alert Point
Some changes that require the
instrument to be taken Out Of Service
will not take effect until the instrument
is placed back In Service or the
instrument is restarted.
0.26%
1%
Travel Deviation Time
Travel Alerts
Yes
9.4 repeats/minute
Cycle Counter Alert Deadband
Supply Pressure Alert Enable
Note
0 sec
Cycle Counter Alert Enable
Travel Deviation Alert Point
Deviation &
Other Alerts
−25%
99.46%
Travel/Pressure Cutoff Low
Integral Gain
Instrument Mode allows you to either take the
instrument Out Of Service or place it In Service.
Taking the instrument Out Of Service allows you to
perform instrument calibration and also allows you to
change setup variables that affect control, provided
the calibration/configuration protection is properly set.
See Setting Protection.
F(2)
125%
Set Point Filter Lag Time(5)
Travel History
Alerts
3
A−B
Travel Limit High
Integrator Enable
Instrument Mode—You can change the
instrument mode by selecting Mode and Protection,
Instrument Mode from the Detailed Setup menu, or
press the Hot Key and select Instrument Mode.
0
No
Linear
Travel/Pressure Cutoff High
Mode
F
Input Characteristic
Travel Limit Low
Mode and Protection (1-2-1)
Disabled
Maximum Supply Pressure
Polling Address
Dynamic
Response and
Tuning
mA
Feedback Connection
Temperature Units
The Detailed Setup selection from the Configure menu
allows you to configure the digital valve controller to
your application. Table 4-1 lists the default settings for
a standard factory configuration. You can adjust
actuator response, set the various modes, alerts,
ranges, travel cutoffs and limits. You can also restart
the instrument and set the protection.
Analog
Restart Control Mode
Analog Input Units
Instrument
Configuration
Default Setting(1)
Yes
Yes
19 psi
No
−25%
No
125%
No
−25%
No
125%
Deadband
5%
Shutdown Activated
Yes
Low Power Write Fail Enable
No
Non-Critical NVM Alert Enable
No
−continued on next page−
4-2
September 2013
Detailed Setup
Table 4-1. Factory Default Detailed Setup Parameters
(continued)
Setup Parameter
Informational
Status
Alert Record
Default
Setting(1)
Instrument Time Invalid Enable
No
Calibration in Progress Enable
No
Autocal in Progress Enable
No
Diagnostics in Progress Enable
No
Diagnostics Data Available
Enable
Yes
Integrator Saturated Hi Enable
Yes
Integrator Saturated Lo Enable
Yes
Pressure Control Active Enable
Yes
Multi-Drop Alert Enable
No
Valve Alerts Enable
Yes
Failure Alerts Enable
Yes
Miscellaneous Alerts Enable
No
Alert Record Has Entries
Enable
Yes
Alert Record Full Enable
No
1. The settings listed are for standard factory configuration. DVC6000 instruments
can also be ordered with custom configuration settings. For the default custom
settings, refer to the order requisition.
2. If the instrument is shipped mounted on an actuator, these values depend upon
the actuator on which the instrument is mounted.
3. In firmware 2 thru 6 this parameter is labeled Minimum Opening Time.
In firmware 10 and below this parameter should be set to zero (0).
4. In firmware 2 thru 6 this parameter is labeled Minimum Closing Time.
In firmware 10 and below this parameter should be set to zero (0).
5. Only available in firmware 7 and above. In firmware 7, 9, and 10 this parameter
should be set to zero (0).
Control Mode—You can change the control
mode by selecting Control Mode from the Mode and
Protection menu, or press the Hot Key and select
Control Mode.
Control Mode lets you define where the instrument
reads its set point. Follow the prompts on the Field
Communicator display to choose one of the following
control modes: Analog or Digital.
Choose Analog if the instrument is to receive its set
point over the 4-20 mA loop. Normally the instrument
control mode is Analog.
Choose Digital if the instrument is to receive its set
point digitally, via the HART communications link.
A third mode, Test, is also displayed. Normally the
instrument should not be in the Test mode. The Field
Communicator automatically switches to this mode
whenever it needs to stroke the valve during
calibration or stroke valve, for example. However, if
you abort from a procedure where the instrument is in
the Test mode, it may remain in this mode. To take
the instrument out of the Test mode, select Control
Mode then select either Analog or Digital.
Restart Control Mode—Lets you choose which
operating mode you want the instrument to be in after
a restart. Access by selecting Restart Control Mode
from the Mode and Protection menu. Follow the
prompts on the Field Communicator display to define
the restart control mode as Resume Last, Analog, or
Digital.
September 2013
Burst Mode (1-2-1-4)
Enabling burst mode provides continuous
communication from the digital valve controller. Burst
mode applies only to the transmission of burst mode
data (analog input, travel target, pressure, and travel)
and does not affect the way other data is accessed.
Access to information in the instrument is normally
obtained through the poll/response of HART
communication. The Field Communicator or the
control system may request any of the information that
is normally available, even while the instrument is in
burst mode. Between each burst mode transmission
sent by the instrument, a short pause allows the Field
Communicator or control system to initiate a request.
The instrument receives the request, processes the
response message, and then continues “bursting” the
burst mode data.
To enable burst mode, select Burst Mode, and Burst
Enable from the Mode and Protection menu.
Burst Enable—Yes or no. Burst mode must be
enabled before you can change the burst mode
command.
Change Burst Enable—Turns Burst Mode on and
off. Actual values are Burst Enable = Disabled(Polled),
Enabled.
Burst Command—There are four burst mode
commands. Command 3 is recommended for use with
the 333 HART Tri-Loop HART-to-analog signal
converter. The other three are not used at this time.
Change Burst Command—Allows you to pick the
command to be sent from the instrument when Burst
Mode is on. Select HART Univ Cmd 1, HART Univ
Cmd 2, HART Univ Cmd 3, or DVC6000 Cmd 148.
Cmd 3 Configured Presssure—Command 3
provides the following variables:
Primary variable—analog input in % or ma,
Secondary variable—travel target in % of ranged
travel,
Tertiary variable—supply or output pressure in psig,
bar, kPa, or kg/cm2. Select Cmd 3 Configured
Pressure from the Burst menu to select if the output A,
output B, differential (A−B), or supply pressure is sent.
Quaternary variable—travel in % of ranged travel.
Protection
Protection—Some setup parameters may
require changing the protection with the Field
Communicator. To remove protection (change
protection to None) requires placing a jumper across
the Auxiliary terminals in the terminal box in order to
change protection.
4-3
4
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
terminal box when prompted by the Field
Communicator.
Note
If the Auxiliary Terminal Action is
configured for Auto Travel Calibration,
be sure the jumper remains across the
auxiliary terminals until the Field
Communicator prompts you to remove
it. Removing the jumper too soon will
cause the instrument to begin auto
travel calibration.
Response Control (1-2-2)
Select Configure, Detailed Setup, and Response
Control. Follow the prompts on the Field
Communicator display to configure the following
response control parameters: Tuning, Travel/Pressure
Control, Input Characterization, Custom
Characterization Table, and Dynamic Response.
Tuning
Travel Tuning (1-2-2-1-1)
4
WARNING
WARNING
If the jumper is removed too soon,
and auto travel calibration begins, the
valve will move full stroke. To avoid
personal injury and property damage
caused by the release of pressure or
process fluid, provide some
temporary means of control for the
process.
Two levels of protection are available:
Config & Calib—Both setup and calibration are
protected. Prohibits changing calibration and protected
setup parameters.
None—Neither setup nor calibration is protected.
Allows changing calibration and setup parameters.
Table 4-3 lists configurable parameters in the
instrument and the requirements for modifying these
parameters, in terms of instrument mode and
protection.
To change an instrument’s protection, press the Hot
key on the Field Communicator and select Protection
or from the Online menu, select Configure, Detailed
Setup, Mode and Protection, and Protection. Select
the desired level of protection. Follow the prompts on
the Field Communicator display to set the protection
level. If necessary, temporarily attach the jumper to
the AUX + and AUX − terminals in the instrument
4-4
Changes to the tuning set may cause
the valve/actuator assembly to stroke.
To avoid personal injury and property
damage caused by moving parts,
keep hands, tools, and other objects
away from the valve/actuator
assembly.
Travel Tuning Set— There are eleven tuning sets to
choose from. Each tuning set provides a preselected
value for the digital valve controller gain settings.
Tuning set C provides the slowest response and M
provides the fastest response. Table 4-2 lists the
proportional gain, velocity gain and minor loop
feedback gain values for preselected tuning sets.
Table 4-2. Gain Values for Preselected Travel Tuning Sets
Tuning
Set
Proportional Gain
Velocity Gain
Minor Loop
Feedback Gain
C
D
E
F
G
4.4
4.8
5.5
6.2
7.2
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.1
3.6
35
35
35
35
34
H
I
J
K
L
M
X
(Expert)
8.4
9.7
11.3
13.1
15.5
18.0
4.2
4.8
5.6
6.0
6.0
6.0
31
27
23
18
12
12
User Adjusted
User Adjusted
User Adjusted
September 2013
Detailed Setup
Table 4-3. Conditions for Modifying FIELDVUE DVC6000 Digital Valve Controller Parameters
In Service/
Config Protected
In Service/
Config Unprotected
Out of Service/
Config Protected
Out of Service/
Config Unprotected
Control Mode
Restart Ctrl Mode
Burst Mode Enable
Burst Mode Command
Protection
----
--
----
--
--
--
HART Tag
Message
Descriptor
Date
Valve Serial Num
Inst Serial Num
Polling Address
---------------
-----
---------------
Relay Type
Max Supply Pressure
Actuator Style
Feedback Connection
Travel Sensor Motion
Valve Style
Zero Ctrl Signal
---------------
---------------
---------------
Analog In Units
Input Range High
Input Range Low
Pressure Units
Temp Units
--------
--------
--------
Tuning Set
Prop Gain
Velocity Gain
MLFB Gain
Input Char
Define Custom Char
Set Pt Filter Time
---------------
-------------
---------------
Tvl Limit High
Tvl Limit Low
Tvl Cutoff High
Tvl Cutoff Low
---------
---------
---------
Set Point Rate Open(1)
Set Point Rate Close(2)
-----
-----
-----
Tvl Hi/Lo Enab
Tvl HH/LL Enab
Tvl Alert Hi Pt
Tvl Alert Lo Pt
Tvl Alert HiHi Pt
Tvl Alert LoLo Pt
Tvl Alrt DB
Tvl Dev Alrt Enab
Tvl Dev Alrt Pt
Tvl Dev Time
Cycl Cnt Alrt Enab
Cycl Count Alrt Pt
Cycl Count DB
Cycl Count
Tvl Acum Alrt Enab
Tvl Acum Alrt Pt
Tvl Acum DB
Tvl Acum
Aux Terminal Mode
Aux In Alrt Enab
Aux In Alrt State
Drive Alrt Enab
Supply Press Alrt
------
------
------
Parameters
4
—indicates parameter may be modified for instrument mode and protection shown.
−Continued−
September 2013
4-5
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Table 4-3. Conditions for Modifying FIELDVUE DVC6000 Digital Valve Controller Parameters (Continued)
Parameters
In Service/
Config Protected
In Service/
Config Unprotected
Out of Service/
Config Protected
Out of Service/
Config Unprotected
-----------------
-----------------
-----------------
Flash ROM Fail
No Free Time
Ref Voltage Fail
Drive Current Fail
Critical NVM Fail
Temp Sensor Fail
Press Sensor Fail
Tvl Sensor Fail
—indicates parameter may be modified for instrument mode and protection shown.
1. In firmware 2 thru 6 this parameter is labeled Minimum Opening Time.
2. In firmware 2 thru 6 this parameter is labeled Minimum Closing Time.
4
Note
When selecting a tuning set for a
DVC6015, DVC6025 or DVC6035 remote
mount unit, it may be necessary to
reduce the tuning set, due to the
effects of the long tubing between the
digital valve controller and the
actuator.
In addition, you can select User Adjusted or Expert,
which allows you to modify tuning of the digital valve
controller. With User Adjusted, you specify the
proportional gain; an algorithm in the Field
Communicator calculates the velocity gain and minor
loop feedback gain. With Expert you can specify the
proportional gain, velocity gain, and minor loop
feedback gain.
Note
Use Expert tuning only if standard
tuning has not achieved the desired
results.
Stabilize/Optimize or Performance
Tuner may be used to achieve the
desired results more rapidly than
Expert tuning.
4-6
Table 4-5 provides tuning set selection guidelines for
Fisher, Baumann, and Gulde actuators. These tuning
sets are only recommended starting points. After you
finish setting up and calibrating the instrument, you
may have to select either a higher or lower tuning set
to get the desired response. You can use the
Performance Tuner to optimize tuning.
Integral Enable—Yes or No. Enable the integral
setting to improve static performance by correcting for
error that exists between the travel target and actual
travel. Travel Integral Control is enabled by default.
Integral Gain—Travel Integral Gain is the ratio
of the change in output to the change in input, based
on the control action in which the output is proportional
to the time integral of the input.
Stabilize/Optimize —Stabilize/Optimize permits
you to adjust valve response by changing the digital
valve controller tuning.
If the valve is unstable, select Decrease Response to
stabilize valve operation. This selects the next lower
tuning set (e.g., F to E). If the valve response is
sluggish, select Increase Response to make the valve
more responsive. This selects the next higher tuning
set (e.g., F to G).
If after selecting Decrease Response or Increase
Response the valve travel overshoot is excessive,
select Decrease Damping to select a damping value
that allows more overshoot. Select Increase Damping
to select a damping value that will decrease the
overshoot. When finished, select done.
September 2013
Detailed Setup
Performance Tuner
Table 4-4. Gain Values for Preselected Pressure Tuning Sets
Tuning
Set
Note
The Performance Tuner is not
available for instrument level HC.
The Performance Tuner is used to optimize digital
valve controller tuning. It can be used with digital valve
controllers mounted on most sliding-stem and rotary
actuators, including Fisher and other manufacturers’
products. Moreover, because the performance tuner
can detect internal instabilities before they become
apparent in the travel response, it can generally
optimize tuning more effectively than manual tuning.
Typically, the performance tuner takes 3 to 5 minutes
to tune an instrument, although tuning instruments
mounted on larger actuators may take longer.
Integral Settings (1-2-2-1-2)
Integral Dead Zone—A window around the
Primary Setpoint in which integral action is disabled.
This feature is used to eliminate friction induced limit
cycles around the Primary Setpoint when the
integrator is active. The Dead Zone is configurable
from 0% to 2%, corresponding to a symmetric window
from 0% to +/−2% around the Primary Setpoint.
Default value is 0.25%.
Integral Limit—Provides an upper limit to the
integrator output. The high limit is configurable from 0
to 100% of the I/P drive signal.
Pressure Tuning (1-2-2-1-3)
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
X
(Expert)
0.5
2.2
2.4
2.8
3.1
3.6
4.2
4.
5.6
6.6
7.8
9.0
Pressure
Integrator
Gain
0.3
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
Pressure
Minor Loop
Feedback Gain
35
35
35
35
35
34
31
27
23
18
12
12
User Adjusted
User Adjusted
User Adjusted
Pressure
Proportional Gain
Tuning set B is appropriate for controlling a pneumatic
positioner. Table 4-4 lists the proportional gain,
pressure integrator gain and minor loop feedback gain
values for preselected tuning sets.
In addition, you can specify Expert tuning and
individually set the pressure proportional gain,
pressure integrator gain, and pressure minor loop
feedback gain. Individually setting or changing any
tuning parameter will automatically change the tuning
set to X (expert).
Note
When selecting a tuning set for a
DVC6015, DVC6025 or DVC6035 remote
mount unit, it may be necessary to
reduce the tuning set, due to the
effects of the long tubing between the
digital valve controller and the
actuator.
WARNING
Changes to the tuning set may cause
the valve/actuator assembly to stroke.
To avoid personal injury and property
damage caused by moving parts,
keep hands, tools, and other objects
away from the valve/actuator
assembly.
Pressure Tuning Set—There are twelve Pressure
Tuning Sets to choose from. Each tuning set provides
a preselected value for the digital valve controller gain
settings. Tuning set B provides the fastest response.
September 2013
Note
Use Expert tuning only if standard
tuning has not achieved the desired
results.
Stabilize/Optimize and performance
tuner may be used to achieve the
desired results more rapidly than
Expert tuning.
4-7
4
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Table 4-5. Actuator Information for Initial Setup
Actuator
Manufacturer
Actuator
Model
585C & 585CR
657
667
4
1051 & 1052
Actuator Size
Actuator Style
25
50
60
68, 80
100, 130
30
34, 40
45, 50
46, 60, 70, 76, &
80-100
30
34, 40
45, 50
46, 60, 70, 76, &
80-100
20, 30
33
40
60, 70
Piston Dbl w/ or
w/o Spring. See
actuator instruction
manual and
nameplate.
Spring &
Diaphragm
Spring &
Diaphragm
Spring &
Diaphragm
Starting
Tuning
Set
E
I
J
L
M
SStem-Standard
for travels up to
4 inches. SStemRoller for longer
travels
H
K
L
SStem-Standard
Clockwise
Counterclockwise
M
H
K
L
SStem-Standard
Counterclockwise
Clockwise
Rotary
Clockwise
Counterclockwise
M
H
I
K
M
Feedback
Connection
Travel Sensor Motion
Relay A or C
Relay B
Depends upon pneumatic connections.
See description for Travel Sensor
Motion
1061
30
40
60
68, 80, 100, 130
Piston Dbl w/o
Spring
J
K
L
M
Rotary
Depends upon pneumatic connections.
See description for Travel Sensor
Motion
1066SR
20
27, 75
Piston Sgl w/Spring
G
L
Rotary
Depends upon mounting style, see
actuator instruction manual and
table 4-6
2052
1
2
3
Spring &
Diaphragm
H
J
M
Rotary
3024C
30, 30E
34, 34E, 40, 40E
45, 45E
Spring &
Diaphragm
E
H
K
Fisher
X(1)
225
750
GX
1200
16
32
570
10
25
54
Air to Extend
Air to Retract
Baumann
Rotary
SStem-Standard
Spring &
Diaphragm
Spring &
Diaphragm
K
SStem-Standard
M
C
E
H
E
H
J
SStem-Standard
Rotary
Clockwise
Counterclockwise
For Po operating
For Po operating
mode (air opens), mode (air opens),
Counterclockwise
Clockwise
For Ps operating
For Ps operating
mode (air closes), mode (air closes),
Clockwise
Counterclockwise
Air to
Open
Close
Counterclockwise
Clockwise
Clockwise
Counterclockwise
Counterclockwise
Clockwise
Specify
1. X = Expert Tuning. Proportional Gain = 4.2; Velocity Gain = 3.0; Minor Loop Feedback Gain = 18.0
Table 4-6. Travel Sensor Motion Selections for the FIELDVUE
DVC6030 on a Fisher 1066SR Actuator
Mounting Style
4-8
Travel Sensor Motion
Relay A or C
Relay B
A
Clockwise
Counterclockwise
B
Counterclockwise
Clockwise
C
Counterclockwise
Clockwise
D
Clockwise
Counterclockwise
Integral Enable—Yes or No. Enable the
pressure integral setting to improve static performance
by correcting for error that exists between the
pressure target and actual pressure. Pressure Integral
Control is disabled by default.
Integral Gain—Pressure Integral Gain (also
called reset) is the gain factor applied to the time
integral of the error signal between desired and actual
pressure. Changing this parameter will also change
the tuning set to Expert.
September 2013
Detailed Setup
Travel/Pressure Control (1-2-2-2)
Travel/Pressure Select—Determines if the
instrument is set up for position or pressure control.
Select Travel, Pressure, Travel with Pressure
Fallback/Auto recovery or Travel with Pressure
Fallback/Manual Recovery. If the travel sensor fails,
and Travel with Pressure Fallback/Auto Recovery is
selected, it will return to travel control when the travel
sensor starts working again. Travel with Pressure
Fallback/Manual recovery will stay in pressure control
until Travel Pressure Select is changed to Travel or
Travel with Pressure Fallback/Auto recovery. It is not
necessary to enable the Travel Sensor Alert for
Pressure Fallback to occur.
Cutoffs and Limits (1-2-2-2-2)
Cutoff Hi
Travel Cutoff High defines the high cutoff point for the
travel in percent (%) of ranged input current. Above
this cutoff, the travel target is set to 123.0% of the
ranged input current. When a Travel Cutoff High is set,
the Travel Limit High is deactivated, since only one of
these parameters can be active. Travel Cutoff Hi is
deactivated by setting it to 125.0%.
Pressure Cutoff Hi defines the high cutoff point for the
pressure in percent (%) of pre-characterized setpoint.
Above this cutoff, the pressure target is set to 123.0%.
A Pressure Cutoff Hi of 99.5% is recommended to
ensure valve goes fully open. Pressure Cutoff Hi is
deactivated by setting it to 125%.
Cutoff Lo
Travel Cutoff Low defines the low cutoff point for the
travel set point. Travel Cutoff Low can be used to
ensure proper seat load is applied to the valve. When
below the travel cutoff low, the output is set to zero or
to full supply pressure, depending upon the zero
power condition. A Travel Cutoff Low of 0.5% is
recommended to help ensure maximum shutoff seat
loading. When a Travel Cutoff Low is set, the Travel
Limit Low is deactivated, since only one of these
parameters can be active. Travel Cutoff Low is
deactivated by setting it to −25%.
Pressure Cutoff Lo defines the low cutoff point for the
pressure in percent (%) of pre-characterized setpoint.
Below this cutoff, the pressure target is set to −23%. A
Pressure Cutoff Lo of 0.5% is recommended to help
ensure maximum shutoff seat loading. Pressure Cutoff
Lo is deactivated by setting it to −25.0%
Change Cutoffs—Allows you to set hi and lo
cutoffs. When a cutoff is set the corresponding travel
or pressure limit will be disabled.
September 2013
Travel Limit Hi—Defines the high limit for the
travel in percent (%) of ranged travel. It is the
maximum allowable travel (in percent of ranged travel)
for the valve. During operation, the travel target will
not exceed this limit. When a Travel Limit High is set,
the Travel Cutoff High is deactivated, since only one of
these parameters can be active. Travel Limit High is
deactivated by setting it to 125.0%
Travel Limit Lo—Travel Limit Low defines the
low limit for the travel in percent (%) of ranged travel.
It is the minimum allowable travel (in percent of ranged
travel) for the valve. During operation, the travel target
will not exceed this limit. When a Travel Limit Low is
set, the Travel Cutoff Low is deactivated, since only
one of these parameters can be active. Travel Limit
Low is deactivated by setting it to −25.0%.
Change Travel Limits—Allows you to set hi and
lo travel limits. Setting a travel limit will eliminate the
corresponding Tvl/Press Cutoff.
Pressure Control (1-2-2-2-3)
Pressure Range Hi—The high end of output
pressure range. Enter the pressure that corresponds
with 100% valve travel when Zero Power Condition is
closed, or 0% valve travel when Zero Power Condition
is open. This pressure must be greater than the
Pressure Range Lo.
Pressure Range Lo—The low end of the output
pressure range. Enter the pressure that corresponds
to 0% valve travel when Zero Power Condition is
closed, or 100% valve travel when Zero Power
Condition is open. This pressure must be less than the
Pressure Range Hi.
End Point Pressure Control (1-2-2-2-5)
Note
End Point Pressure Control is only
available for instrument level ODV.
End Pt Control Enab— Select Yes or No. End
Point Pressure Control allows the digital valve
controller to pull back from saturation of the pneumatic
output after reaching the travel extreme. Rather than
having the instrument provide full supply pressure
(saturation) continuously at the travel extreme, the
digital valve controller switches to an End Point
Pressure Control where the output pressure (pressure
controller set point) to the actuator is maintained at a
certain value. This value is configured through the
4-9
4
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
100
0
−25
−25
0
Ranged Set Point, %
100
125
Input Characteristic = Linear
125
100
Travel Target, %
EPPC Setup Point—Used in conjunction with
End Point Pressure Control, Pressure Set Point allows
the user to select a pressure to be delivered by the
instrument at the travel extreme. For a fail-closed
valve, this pressure must be sufficient to maintain the
fully open position. For a fail-open valve, this pressure
(which is automatically set to supply pressure) must
be sufficient to fully close the valve and maintain its
rated shutoff classification. For double-acting spring
return actuators, this is the differential pressure
required to either maintain the fully open or fully closed
position, depending on the valve and actuator
configuration. For a double-acting actuator without
springs with a fail-close valve, this is 95% of the
supply pressure. If the valve is fail-open, the upper
operating pressure for all actuator is set to the supply
pressure.
0
−25
EPPC Saturation Time—Pressure Saturation
Time is the amount of time the digital valve controller
stays in hard cutoff before switching to pressure
control. Default is 45 seconds.
Input Characterization (1-2-2-3)
Input Characterization defines the relationship
between the travel target and ranged set point.
Ranged set point is the input to the characterization
function. If the zero power condition equals closed,
then a set point of 0% corresponds to a ranged input
of 0%. If the zero power condition equals open, a set
point of 0% corresponds to a ranged input of 100%.
Travel target is the output from the characterization
function.
To select an input characterization, select Input
Characterization from the Response Control menu.
You can select from the three fixed input
characteristics shown in figure 4-1 or you can select a
custom characteristic. Figure 4-1 shows the
relationship between the travel target and ranged set
point for the fixed input characteristics, assuming the
Zero Power Condition is configured as closed.
4-10
−25
0
Ranged Set Point, %
100
125
Input Characteristic = Equal Percentage
125
100
Travel Target, %
4
PST Start Pt—Defines the travel stop the valve
needs to be at before a partial stroke test can be
initiated. Also defines the travel stop for end point
pressure control. Setting this value to Not Configured
will disable partial stroke tests and end point pressure
control.
125
Travel Target, %
Upper Operating Pressure feature. Because the digital
valve controller is constantly in control and not allowed
to reach a dormant or saturated state, it is constantly
testing its own pneumatic system. If there is an output
pressure deviation, for example, the instrument will
issue an alert. To ensure there is an alert when an
output pressure deviation occurs, setup the alert as
described under Pressure Deviation Alert.
0
−25
−25
A6535-1/IL
0
Ranged Set Point, %
100
125
Input Characteristic = Quick Opening
Figure 4-1. Travel Target Versus Ranged Set Point, for Various
Input Characteristics (Zero Power Condition = Closed)
September 2013
Detailed Setup
You can specify 21 points on a custom characteristic
curve. Each point defines a travel target, in % of
ranged travel, for a corresponding set point, in % of
ranged set point. Set point values range from −6.25%
to 106.25%. Before modification, the custom
characteristic is linear.
Custom Characterization Table (1-2-2-4)
Select Custom Characterization Table from the
Response Control menu and follow the prompts to
define a custom input character.
With input characterization you can modify the overall
characteristic of the valve and instrument combination.
Selecting an equal percentage, quick opening, or
custom (other than the default of linear) input
characteristic modifies the overall valve and
instrument characteristic. However, if you select the
linear input characteristic, the overall valve and
instrument characteristic is the characteristic of the
valve, which is determined by the valve trim (i.e., the
plug or cage).
Dynamic Response (1-2-2-5)
SP Rate Open (Minimum Opening Time in
firmware 2−6)—Maximum rate (% of valve travel per
second) at which the digital valve controller will move
to the open position regardless of the rate of input
current change. A value of 0 will deactivate this
feature and allow the valve to stroke open as fast as
possible. In firmware 10 and below this parameter
should be set to 0.
SP Rate Close (Minimum Closing Time in
firmware 2−6)—Maximum rate (% of valve travel per
second) at which the digital valve controller will move
to the close position regardless of the rate of input
current change. A value of 0 will deactivate this
feature and allow the valve to stroke close as fast as
possible. In firmware 10 and below this parameter
should be set to 0.
Note
Set Point Filter Time (Lag Time) is only
available for instrument level HC, AD,
and PD, firmware 7, 9, 10, and 11.
September 2013
Set Point Filter Time (Lag Time)—Slows the
response of the digital valve controller. A value
ranging from 0.2 to 10.0 can be used for noisy or fast
processes to improve closed loop process control.
Entering a value of 0.0 will deactivate the lag filter.
In Firmware 7, 9, and 10 this parameter should be set
to 0.
Note
Lead/Lag is only available for
instrument level ODV.
4
Lead/Lag Set Point Filter—ODV devices have
access to a lead-lag input filter that can be used to
improve a valve’s dynamic response. The lead-lag
input filter is part of the set point processing routine
that reshapes the input signal before it becomes travel
set point. Lead-lag filters are characterized by lead
and lag time constants.
When the valve is in its active control region (off the
seat), the lead-lag filter improves small amplitude
response by momentarily overdriving the travel set
point. This is useful when the actuator is large and
equipped with accessories. As a result, any volume
boosters that are present will be activated. The longer
the lag time, the more pronounced the overdrive.
Since the lead-lag input filter is used to enhance the
dynamic response of a control valve, filter parameters
should be set after the tuning parameters have been
established.
When the valve is at its seat, the lead-lag filter also
has a boost function that sets the initial conditions of
the filter artificially low so that small amplitude signal
changes appear to be large signal changes to the
filter. The boost function introduces a large spike that
momentarily overdrives the instrument and activates
any external volume boosters that may be present.
The lead-lag boost function is normally disabled
except for those cases where the valve must respond
to small command signals off the seat. By setting the
lead/lag ratio in the opening and closing directions to
1.0, the boost function can be enabled without
introducing lead-lag dynamics in the active control
region. See table 4-7 for typical lead-lag filter settings.
4-11
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Table 4-7. Typical Lead/Lag Filter Settings for Instrument Level ODV
Parameter
4
Description
Typical Value
Lag Time
First order time constant. A value of 0.0 will disable the
lead-lag filter.
Opening Lead/Lag Ratio
Initial response to the filter in the opening direction.
2.0
Closing Lead/Lag Ratio
Initial response to the filter in the closing direction.
2.0
Lead-Lag Boost
Initial conditions of the lead-lag filter when the lower
travel cutoff is active.
Off
0.2 sec
Alert Setup (1-2-3)
Drive Signal < 10% and Calibrated Travel > 3%
The following menus are available for configuring
Alerts. Items on the menus may be changed with the
instrument In Service. Protection does not need to be
removed (no need to set to None). Alerts are not
processed when a Diagnostic is in progress. Select
Configure, Detailed Setup, and Alerts. Follow the
prompts on the Field Communicator display to
configure the following Alerts: Electronic Alerts,
Sensor Alerts, Environment Alerts, Travel Alerts,
Travel History Alerts, SIS Alerts (instrument level ODV
only), and Alert Record.
Drive Signal > 90% and Calibrated Travel < 97%
For the case where Zero Power Condition is defined
as open:
Drive Signal < 10% and Calibrated Travel < 97%
Drive Signal > 90% and Calibrated Travel > 3%
Drive Signal Alert Enable—Yes or No. Activates
checking of the relationship between the Drive Signal
and the calibrated travel.
Drive Signal—Shows the value of the instrument
drive signal in % (percent) of maximum drive.
Note
The Alerts section covers alerts and
shutdowns. An alert, if enabled, can
provide information on operation and
performance issues. A shutdown, if
enabled, and upon the occurrence of
the associated failure alert, will cause
the instrument air output to go to the
Zero Power Condition as per figure
4-6. It will remain latched in that
condition until power to the
instrument is cycled and the failure
alert has cleared. While in shutdown
condition the instrument will remain
powered up and able to communicate
via HART.
Electronics Alerts (1-2-3-1)
Drive Current Shutdown— When enabled, the
instrument shuts down whenever the drive current
does not read as expected.
Drive Signal Alert (1-2-3-1-2)
Drive Signal Alert checks the drive signal and
calibrated travel. If one of the following conditions
exists for more than 20 seconds, the Drive Signal Alert
is set.
For the case where Zero Power Condition is defined
as closed:
4-12
Processor Impaired Alerts (1-2-3-1-3)
Offline/Failed Alert Enable—If enabled, set when
the device is in a failed state and not controlling the
input.
Power Starvation Alrt Enab—When enabled, an
alert is generated whenever power starvation is
detected. Firmware 2−7.
Low Power Write Fail Enable—When enabled, an
alert is generated if a write to the instrument is
attempted and fails when the loop current is less than
3.5 mA. Firmware 9, 10 and 11.
Non-Critical NVM Alert Enable—When enabled,
an alert is generated whenever there is a failure
associated with non-critical NVM (non-volatile
memory).
Critical NVM Shutdown—When enabled, the
instrument shuts down whenever there is a failure
associated with critical NVM (non-volatile memory).
Flash ROM Shutdown—When enabled, the
instrument shuts down whenever there is a failure
associated with flash ROM (read only memory).
No Free Time Shutdown—When enabled, the
instrument shuts down whenever there is a failure
associated with No Free Time.
Reference Voltage Shutdown—When enabled,
the instrument shuts down whenever there is a failure
associated with the internal voltage reference.
September 2013
Detailed Setup
Sensor Alerts (1-2-3-2)
Travel Sensor Shutdown—When enabled, the
instrument shuts down whenever there is a failure
associated with the travel sensor.
Temp Sensor Shutdown—When enabled, the
instrument shuts down whenever there is a failure
associated with the temperature sensor.
point, the supply pressure alert is active. To disable
the supply pressure alert, set Supply Pressure Alert
Point to zero.
Loop Current Validation Enable—When
enabled, the instrument shuts down whenever there is
a failure associated with the measured loop current
being out-of-range. Firmware 9, 10, and 11.
Travel Alerts (1-2-3-4)
Pressure Sensor Shutdown—When enabled,
the instrument shuts down whenever there is a failure
associated with the pressure sensor.
Travel—Displays the actual position of the valve
in percent (%) of calibrated travel.
Environment Alerts (1-2-3-3)
Setpoint—The input to the characterization
function.
Auxiliary Terminal Alerts (1-2-3-3-1)
Auxiliary Terminal Alert Enable—Yes or No.
Activates checking the status of the auxiliary input
when the Auxiliary Terminal Mode is Auxiliary Input
Alert. When enabled, the Auxiliary Input Alert is set
when the auxiliary input terminals are either open or
closed, depending upon the selection for the Auxiliary
Input Alert State. Factory default is No.
Auxiliary Input—The auxiliary input is a contact or
discrete input, which may be open or closed.
Auxiliary Terminal Action—Disabled, Alert on
Open Contact, Alert on Close Contact, or Auto Travel
Calibration. Selecting Alert on Open or Closed Contact
activates checking the status of the auxiliary input
contacts. Selecting Auto Travel Calibration permits
starting an automatic travel calibration procedure by
placing a jumper across the auxiliary input terminals
for 3 to 5 seconds.
Supply Press Lo Alert (1-2-3-3-2)
Note
The Supply Pressure Lo alert is not
available in instrument level HC.
Travel Alrt DB—Travel Alert Deadband is the
travel, in percent (%) of ranged travel, required to
clear a travel alert, once it has been set. The
deadband applies to both Travel Alert Hi/Lo and Travel
Alert Hi Hi/Lo Lo. See figure 4-2.
Travel Deviation Alert (1-2-3-4-4)
If the difference between the travel target and the
actual target exceeds the Travel Deviation Alert Point
for more than the Travel Deviation Time, the Travel
Deviation Alert is set. It remains set until the difference
between the travel target and the actual travel is less
than the Travel Deviation Alert Point minus the Travel
Alert Deadband.
Travel Deviation Alert Enable— Select Yes or
No. When enabled, checks the difference between the
travel target and the actual travel. Factory default is
Yes.
Travel Deviation Alert Point— The alert point for
the difference, expressed in percent (%), between the
travel target and the actual travel. When the difference
exceeds the alert point for more than the Travel
Deviation Time, the Travel Deviation Alert is set.
Travel Deviation Time— The time, in seconds,
that the travel deviation must exceed the Travel
Deviation Alert Point before the alert is set.
Travel Limit Alerts (1-2-3-4-5)
Supply Pressure Lo Alert Enable—When
enabled, the instrument sends an alert when the
supply pressure falls below the supply pressure alert
point. Factory default is Yes.
Travel Alert Hi Hi is set if the ranged travel rises above
the alert high point. Once the alert is set, the ranged
travel must fall below the alert high high point by the
Travel Alert Deadband before the alert is cleared. See
figure 4-2.
Supply—Supply Pressure displays the instrument
supply pressure in kPa,bar, psi, or kg/cm2.
Travel Alert Lo Lo is set if the ranged travel falls below
the alert low low point. Once the alert is set, the
ranged travel must rise above the alert low low point
by the Travel Alert Deadband before the alert is
cleared.
Supply Pressure Lo Alert Point— When the
supply pressure falls below the supply pressure alert
September 2013
4-13
4
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Travel Alert Lo Point—The value of the travel, in
percent (%) of ranged travel, which, when exceeded,
sets the Travel Alert Low alert.
ALERT IS SET
TRAVEL ALERT
HIGH POINT
TRAVEL ALERT
DEADBAND
Travel Limit/Cutoff Alerts (1-2-3-4-7)
Travel Limit/Cutoff Hi Enable—Yes or No.
Activates the Travel Limit / Cutoff Hi alert.
Travel Limit/Cutoff Lo Alert Enable—Yes or No.
Activates the Travel Limit/Cutoff Lo alert.
ALERT IS CLEARED
A6532/IL
Figure 4-2. Travel Alert Deadband
4
Travel Alert Hi Hi Enable—Yes or No. Activates
checking of the ranged travel against the Travel Alert
Hi Hi points. Factory default is No.
Travel Alert Lo Lo Enable—Yes or No. Activates
checking of the ranged travel against the Travel Alert
Lo Lo points. Factory default is No.
Travel Alert Hi Hi Point—The value of the travel,
in percent (%) of ranged travel, which, when
exceeded, sets the Travel Alert Hi Hi alert.
Travel Alert Lo Lo Point—The value of the travel,
in percent (%) of ranged travel, which, when
exceeded, sets the Travel Alert Lo Lo alert.
Travel Limit Hi/Lo Alerts (1-2-3-4-6)
Travel Alert Hi is set if the ranged travel rises above
the alert high point. Once the alert is set, the ranged
travel must fall below the alert high point by the Travel
Alert Deadband before the alert is cleared. See figure
4-2.
Travel Alert Lo is set if the ranged travel falls below
the alert low point. Once the alert is set, the ranged
travel must rise above the alert low point by the Travel
Alert Deadband before the alert is cleared.
Travel Alert Hi Enable—Yes or No. Activates
checking of the ranged travel against the Travel Alert
High Point. Factory default is No.
Travel Alert Lo Enable—Yes or No. Activates
checking of the ranged travel against the Travel Alert
Lo Point. Factory default is No.
Travel Alert Hi Point—The value of the travel, in
percent (%) of ranged travel, which, when exceeded,
sets the Travel Alert High alert.
4-14
Cutoff Hi
Travel Cutoff Hi defines the high cutoff point for the
travel in percent(%) of pre-characterized set point.
Above this cutoff, the travel target is set to 123.0% of
the ranged travel. Travel Cutoff Hi is deactivated by
setting it to 125.0%.
Pressure Cutoff Hi defines the high cutoff point for the
pressure in percent (%) of pre-characterized set point.
Above this cutoff,the pressure target is set to 123.0%.
A Pressure Cutoff Hi of 99.5% is recommended to
ensure valve goes fully open. Pressure Cutoff Hi is
deactivated by setting it to 125%
Cutoff Lo
Travel Cutoff Lo defines the low cutoff point for the
travel in percent (%)of pre-characterized set point.
Below this cutoff, the travel target is set to −23%. A
Travel Cutoff Lo of 0.5% is recommended to help
ensure maximum shutoff seat loading. Travel Cutoff
Lo is deactivated by setting it to−25.0%
Pressure Cutoff Lo defines the low cutoff point for the
pressure in percent (%) of pre-characterized set point.
Below this cutoff,the pressure target is set to −23%. A
Pressure Cutoff Lo of 0.5% is recommended to help
ensure maximum shutoff seat loading. Pressure Cutoff
Lo is deactivated by setting it to −25.0%
Change Cutoffs—Allows you to set Cutoff Hi and
Cutoff Lo. When a cutoff is set the corresponding
travel or pressure limit is disabled.
Travel Limit Hi—Defines the high limit for the
travel in percent (%) of ranged travel. It is the
maximum allowable travel (in percent of ranged travel)
for the valve. During operation, the travel target will
not exceed this limit. When a Travel Limit High is set,
the Travel Cutoff High is deactivated, since only one of
these parameters can be active. Travel Limit High is
deactivated by setting it to 125.0%.
Travel Limit Lo—Defines the low limit for the
travel in percent (%) of ranged travel. It is the
minimum allowable travel (in percent of ranged travel)
for the valve. During operation, the travel target will
not exceed this limit. When a Travel Limit Low is set,
September 2013
Detailed Setup
Deadband exceeded,
new Reference Point
established
Deadband Reference
Point
Deadband exceeded, and direction
changed, new Reference Point
established
This amount of change is
added to the Travel
Accumulator.
Deadband (+/− 5%)
A6534/IL
Figure 4-3. Travel Accumulator Deadband (set at 10%)
the Travel Cutoff Low is deactivated, since only one of
these parameters can be active. Travel Limit Low is
deactivated by setting it to −25.0%.
Change Travel Limits—Allows you to set hi and
lo travel limits. Setting a travel limit will eliminate the
corresponding Tvl/Press Cutoff.
Travel History Alerts (1-2-3-5)
Cycle Counter (1-2-3-5-1)
Cycle Counter Alert Enable—Yes or No.
Activates checking of the difference between the
Cycle Counter and the Cycle Counter Alert point. The
Cycle Counter Alert is set when the value exceeds the
Cycle Counter Alert point. It is cleared after you reset
the Cycle Counter to a value less than the alert point.
Factory default is No.
Cycle Counter—Records the number of times the
travel changes direction. The change in direction must
occur after the deadband has been exceeded before it
can be counted as a cycle. See figure 4-4. You can
reset the Cycle Counter by configuring it as zero.
Point at which
cycle is counted.
Deadband Reference
Point
A6533-1/IL
4
Deadband (+/− 5%)
Figure 4-4. Cycle Counter Deadband (set at 10%)
Travel Accumulator Deadband is the area around the
travel reference point, in percent (%) of ranged travel,
that was established at the last increment of the
accumulator. This area must be exceeded before a
change in travel can be accumulated. See figure 4-3.
Travel Accumulator (1-2-3-5-3)
Travel Accumulator Alert Enable—Yes or No.
Activates checking of the difference between the
Travel Accumulator value and the Travel Accumulator
Alert Point. The Travel Accumulator Alert is set when
the Travel Accumulator value exceeds the Travel
Accumulator Alert Point. It is cleared after you reset
the Travel Accumulator to a value less than the alert
point. Factory default is No.
Travel Accumulator—Records the total change in
travel, in percent (%) of ranged travel, since the
accumulator was last cleared. The value of the Travel
Accumulator increments when the magnitude of the
change exceeds the Travel Accumulator Deadband.
See figure 4-3. You can reset the Travel Accumulator
by configuring it to zero.
Cycle Counter Alert Point—The value of the
Cycle Counter, in cycles, which, when exceeded, sets
the Cycle Counter Alert.
Travel Accumulator Alert Point—The value of the
Travel Accumulator, in percent (%) of ranged travel,
which, when exceeded, sets the Travel Accumulator
Alert.
Cycle Count/Travel Accumulator Deadband
(1-2-3-5-2)
SIS Alerts (1-2-3-6)
Deadband
Cycle Counter Deadband is the area around the travel
reference point, in percent (%) of ranged travel, that
was established at the last increment of the Cycle
Counter. This area must be exceeded before a change
in travel direction can be counted as a cycle. See
figure 4-4.
September 2013
Note
SIS Alerts are only available for
instrument level ODV.
4-15
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
PST Pressure Limit—Defines the output
pressure that will cause the partial stroke test to stop.
For actuators that vent from the test starting point, the
pressure limit will be a minimum value. For actuators
that fill from the test starting point, the pressure limit
will be a maximum value.
4
Pressure Deviation Alert Enable— Select Yes
or No. This alert notifies a monitoring system when a
deviation in the actuator pressure has occurred. This
is used when the instrument is controlling via pressure
(Pressure Control Mode is enabled) to the actuator
(rather than valve position) to prevent saturation of the
pneumatic output. When enabled, this alert checks the
difference between the target pressure and the actual
pressure. If the difference exceeds the Pressure
Deviation Alert Point for more than the pressure
deviation time, the Pressure Deviation Alert is set. It
remains set until the difference between the target
pressure and the actual pressure is less than the
Pressure Deviation Alert Point. The pressure deviation
alert point and deviation alert time are configurable
and can be disabled altogether. Factory default is Yes.
Table 4-8. Alerts Included in Alert Groups for Alert Record
Alert Group
Valve Alerts
Failure Alerts
Miscellaneous Alerts
Alerts Include in Group
Travel Lo Alert
Travel Hi Alert
Travel Lo Lo Alert
Travel Hi Hi Alert
Travel Deviation Alert
Drive Signal Alert
Flash ROM Fail
No Free Time
Reference Voltage Fail
Drive Current Fail
Critical NVM Fail
Temperature Sensor Fail
Pressure Sensor Fail
Travel Sensor Fail
Auxiliary input
View Alert Records—Displays all recorded
alerts and the date and time the alerts were recorded.
Clear ALL Records—Clears the alert record. To
clear the alert record, all alerts in enabled groups must
be inactive.
Alert Groups
(1-2-3-6-5) HC, AD, and PD
(1-2-3-7-5) ODV
Pressure Deviation Alert Point— The alert
point for the difference between the pressure target
and the actual pressure. When the difference exceeds
the alert point for more than the Pressure Deviation
Time, the Pressure Deviation Alert is set. After
completion of the Setup Wizard or Auto Travel
calibration a default value of 2 psi is set. This will
generate an alert when the actuator pressure is not
within $2 psi of the target pressure.
Failure Group Enable—Permits enabling the
Failure Alert group. Factory default is Yes. Table 4-8
lists the alerts included in each of the groups.
Pressure Deviation Time— The time, in
seconds, that the pressure deviation must exceed the
Pressure Deviation Alert Point before the alert is set.
The Pressure Deviation Time is set to 30 seconds by
default.
Miscellaneous Group Enable—Permits enabling
the Miscellaneous Alert group. Factory default is No.
Table 4-8 lists the alerts included in each of the
groups.
Alert Record
(1-2-3-6) HC, AD, and PD
(1-2-3-7) ODV
Status (1-2-4)
To be recorded, an alert must both be enabled for
reporting, and the group in which it resides must be
enabled for recording. Table 4-8 lists the alerts
included in each of the groups. When any alert from
an enabled group becomes active, active alerts in all
enabled groups are stored.
Alert Record Has Entries Enable—Yes or No.
When enabled indicates when an alert has been
recorded. Factory default is Yes.
Alert Record Full Enable—Yes or No. When
enabled indicates when the Alert Record is full.
Factory default is No.
4-16
Valve Group Enable—Permits enabling the Valve
Alert group. Factory default is Yes. Table 4-8 lists the
alerts included in each of the groups.
Select Configure, Detailed Setup, and Status. Follow
the prompts on the Field Communicator display to
configure the following parameters: Instrument Time,
Calibration and Diagnostics, Operational, and
Integrator Saturation.
Instrument Time (1-2-4-1)
Inst Time Invalid Enable—Yes or No. When
enabled indicates if the Instrument Time Invalid alert is
active. Factory default is Yes.
Instrument Date and Time—Permits setting the
instrument clock. When alerts are stored in the alert
record, the record includes the time and date. The
instrument clock uses a 24-hour format.
September 2013
Detailed Setup
Calibration and Diagnostics (1-2-4-2)
Calibration in Progress Enable—Yes or No.
When enabled indicates that calibration is in progress.
Factory default is No.
AutoCal in Progress Enable—Yes or No. When
enabled indicates that auto calibration is in progress.
Factory default is No.
Diagnostic in Progress Enable—Yes or No.
When enabled indicates that a diagnostic test is in
progress. Factory default is No.
Diagnostic Data Avail Enable—Yes or No. When
enabled indicates when there is diagnostic data
available. Factory default is Yes.
Terminal Action, Instrument Date and Time, and Calib
Status and Type.
General (1-2-5-1)
HART Tag—Enter an up to 8 character HART
tag for the instrument. The HART tag is the easiest
way to distinguish between instruments in a
multi-instrument environment. Use the HART tag to
label instruments electronically according to the
requirements of your application. The tag you assign is
automatically displayed when the Field Communicator
establishes contact with the digital valve controller at
power-up.
Message—Enter any message with up to 32
characters. Message provides the most specific
user-defined means for identifying individual
instruments in multi-instrument environments.
Operational (1-2-4-3)
Pressure Control Active Enable—Yes or No.
When enabled indicates when Pressure Control is
active. Factory default is Yes.
Multi-Drop Enable—Yes or No. When enabled
indicates the digital valve controller is operating in a
multi-drop loop. Factory default is No.
Integrator Saturation(1-2-4-4)
Integrator Sat Hi Enable—Yes or No. When
enabled indicates when the Integrator Saturated High
alert is active. Factory default is Yes.
Integrator Sat Lo Enable—Yes or No. When
enabled indicates when the Integrator Saturated Lo
alert is active. Factory default is Yes.
Integral Limit—Provides an upper limit to the
integrator output. The high limit is configurable from 0
to 100% of the I/P drive signal.
Integral Dead Zone—A window around the
Primary Setpoint in which integral action is disabled.
This feature is used to eliminate friction induced limit
cycles around the Primary Setpoint when the
integrator is active. The Dead Zone is configurable
from 0% to 2%, corresponding to a symmetric window
from 0% to +/−2% around the Primary Setpoint.
Default value is 0.25%.
Descriptor—Enter a descriptor for the application
with up to 16 characters. The descriptor provides a
longer user-defined electronic label to assist with more
specific instrument identification than is available with
the HART tag.
Date—Enter a date with the format MM/DD/YY.
Date is a user-defined variable that provides a place to
save the date of the last revision of configuration or
calibration information.
Valve Serial Number—Enter the serial number
for the valve in the application, up to 12 characters.
Instrument Serial Number—Enter the serial
number on the instrument nameplate, up to 12
characters.
Polling Address—If the digital valve controller is
used in point-to-point operation, the Polling Address is
0. When several devices are connected in the same
loop, such as for split ranging, each device must be
assigned a unique polling address. The Polling
Address is set to a value between 0 and 15. To
change the polling address the instrument must be
Out Of Service.
For the Field Communicator to be able to
communicate with a device whose polling address is
not 0, it must be configured to automatically search for
all or specific connected devices.
Units (1-2-5-2)
Instrument (1-2-5)
Pressure Units—Defines the output and supply
pressure units in either psi, bar, kPa, or kg/cm2.
Select Configure, Detailed Setup, and Instrument.
Follow the prompts on the Field Communicator display
to configure the following Instrument parameters:
General, Units, Analog Input Range, Relay Type, Zero
Power Condition, Maximum Supply Pressure, Auxiliary
Temperature Units—Degrees Fahrenheit or
Celsius. The temperature measured is from a sensor
mounted on the digital valve controller’s printed wiring
board.
September 2013
4-17
4
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
TRAVEL
RANGE
HIGH
ZPC = OPEN
ZPC = CLOSED
CALIBRATED TRAVEL, %
4
solenoid valve. See page 2-22 for additional
information.
Lo Bleed: The label affixed to the relay body
indicates whether it is a low bleed version.
Zero Power Condition (Zero Control Signal in
firmware 2−6)—The position of the valve (open or
closed) when the electrical power to the instrument is
removed. Zero Power Condition (ZPC) is determined
by relay and actuator action, as shown in figure 4-6.
THE SHAPE OF
THESE LINES DEPENDS ON
THE INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
LINEAR CHARACTERISTIC SHOWN
TRAVEL
RANGE
LOW
INPUT RANGE
LOW
ANALOG INPUT
mA OR % OF 4-20 mA
INPUT RANGE
HIGH
NOTE:
ZPC = ZERO POWER CONDITION
A6531-1 / IL
Figure 4-5. Calibrated Travel to Analog Input Relationship
Analog In Units—Permits defining the Analog
Input Units in mA or percent of 4−20 mA range.
Analog Input Range (1-2-5-3)
Input Range Hi—Permits setting the Input Range
High value. Input Range High should correspond to
Travel Range High, if the Zero Power Condition is
configured as closed. If the Zero Power Condition is
configured as open, Input Range High corresponds to
Travel Range Low. See figure 4-5.
Input Range Lo—Permits setting the Input Range
Low value. Input Range Low should correspond to
Travel Range Low, if the Zero Power Condition is
configured as closed. If the Zero Power Condition is
configured as open, Input Range Low corresponds to
Travel Range High. See figure 4-5.
Relay Type—There are three categories of
relays that result in combinations from which to select.
Relay Type: The relay type is printed on the label
affixed to the relay body.
A = double-acting or single-acting
B = single-acting, reverse
C= single-acting, direct
Special App: This is used in single-acting
applications where the “unused” output port is
configured to read the pressure downstream of a
4-18
Maximum Supply Pressure—Enter the
maximum supply pressure in psi, bar, kPa, or kg/cm2,
depending on what was selected for pressure units.
Auxiliary Terminal Action—Disabled, Alert on
Open Contact, Alert on Close Contact, or Auto Travel
Calibration. Selecting Alert on Open or Closed Contact
activates checking the status of the auxiliary input
contacts. Selecting Auto Travel Calibration permits
starting an automatic travel calibration procedure by
placing a jumper across the auxiliary input terminals
for 3 to 5 seconds.
Instrument Date and Time—Permits setting the
instrument clock. When alerts are stored in the alert
record, the record includes the time and date. The
instrument clock uses a 24-hour format.
Calib Status and Type (1-2-5-9)
Last AutoCal Status—Indicates the status of the
last instrument calibration.
Last Calibration Type—Indicates the type of the
last instrument calibration.
Valve and Actuator (1-2-6)
Select Configure, Detailed Setup, and Valve and
Actuator. Follow the prompts on the Field
Communicator display to configure the following
instrument parameters: Manufacturer, Valve Serial
Number, Valve Style, Actuator Style, Travel Sensor
Motion, and View/Edit Feedback Connection.
Manufacturer—Enter the manufacturer of the
actuator on which the instrument is mounted. If the
actuator manufacturer is not listed, select Other.
Valve Serial Number—Enter the serial number
for the valve in the application with up to 12
characters.
September 2013
Detailed Setup
Loss of
Pneumatic Supply
Relay Type
Loss of Power
Single-Acting Direct (Relay C)
Instrument goes to zero air output at port A.
Failure direction per
actuator fail mode.
Double-Acting (Relay A)
Instrument goes to full supply
air output at port B. A goes to
zero air output.
Failure direction cannot
be determined.
Single-Acting Reverse (Relay B)
Instrument goes to full supply
air output at port B.
Failure direction per
actuator fail mode.
A
B
4
Figure 4-6. Zero Power Condition
Valve Style—Enter the valve style, rotary or
sliding-stem
ACTUATOR
STEM
TRAVEL SENSOR SHAFT
Actuator Style—Enter the actuator style, spring
and diaphragm, piston double-acting without spring,
piston single-acting with spring, or piston double-acting
with spring.
FEEDBACK ARM
Travel Sensor Motion—Select Clockwise, or
Counterclockwise. Travel Sensor Motion establishes
the proper travel sensor rotation. Determine the
rotation by viewing the end of the travel sensor shaft
from the perspective of the actuator.
ADJUSTMENT
ARM
For instruments with Relay A and C: If increasing
air pressure at output A causes the shaft to turn
clockwise, enter Clockwise. If it causes the shaft to
turn counterclockwise, enter Counterclockwise.
For instruments with Relay B: If increasing air
pressure at output B causes the shaft to turn
counterclockwise, enter Clockwise. If it causes the
shaft to turn clockwise, enter Counterclockwise.
View/Edit Feedback Connection—Select
Rotary All, SStem - Roller or SStem - Standard. For
rotary valves, enter Rotary - All, SStem - Roller. For
sliding-stem valves, if the feedback linkage consists of
a connector arm, adjustment arm, and feedback arm
(similar to figure 4-7), enter SStem - Standard. If the
feedback linkage consists of a roller that follows a cam
(similar to figure 4-8), enter Rotary All, SStem - Roller.
Assembly Specification Sheet— Allows you to
view and edit the Specification Sheet used by
ValveLink Software.
September 2013
CONNECTOR
ARM
Figure 4-7. Feedback Connection for Typical Sliding-Stem
Actuator (Up to 4 inch Travel)
Partial Stroke (1-2-7)
Note
Partial Stroke is only available for
instrument level ODV.
Select Configure, Detailed Setup, and Partial Stroke.
Follow the prompts on the Field Communicator display
to configure the following partial stroke parameters:
PST Enable and View/Edit PST Variables.
4-19
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
ROLLER
STEM
CONNECTOR
CAM
Pause Time—The Setup Wizard sets the Partial
Stroke Pause Time to 5 seconds. This is the pause
time between the up and down strokes of the test. It
can be set for 5, 10, 15, 20 or 30 seconds.
PST Press Limit (single acting actuators)—During the
Setup Wizard, or Auto Calibration, the Partial Stroke
Pressure Limit value will be set to a positive value for
single-acting actuator. For those actuators that vent
from the test starting point, the pressure limit will be a
minimum value. For those actuators that fill from the
test starting point, the pressure limit will be a
maximum value. The pressure signal used for this
threshold depends on relay type and is summarized
below.
4
29B1665-A / DOC
Figure 4-8. Feedback Connection for Typical Long-Stroke
Sliding-Stem Actuator (4 to 24 Inches Travel)
PST Enable—Yes or No. Enables or disables
the Partial Stroke Test.
PST Variables View/Edit—Follow the prompts
on the Field Communicator display to enter or view
information for following PST Variables: Max Travel
Movement, Stroke Speed, Pause Time, PST Press
Limit, PST Mode Enable, Pressure Set Point, and End
Pt Control Enable.
Relay Type
A or C
B
B Special App.
C Special App.
Pressure Signal
Port A − Port B
Port B − Port A
Port B
Port A
PST Press Limit (double-acting actuators)— During
the Setup Wizard or Auto Travel Calibration, the PST
Press Limit will be set to a negative value for actuators
where the Partial Stroke Start Point is opposite of the
Zero Power Condition (e.g., Partial Stroke Start Point
= Open and Zero Power Condition = Closed) and to a
positive value for actuators where the Partial Stroke
Start Point is the same as the Zero Power Condition.
Max Travel Movement—The default value for Max
Travel Movement is 10%. It may be set to a value
between 1 and 30% in 0.1% increments.
Note
The Max Travel Movement is the
percentage of total span that the valve
moves away from its operating state
towards its fail state during a Partial
Stroke Test.
Stroke Speed—The stroke speed can be set for
1%/second, 0.5%/second, 0.25%/second,
0.12%/second, or 0.06%/second. The default value for
Partial Stroke Speed is 0.25%/second.
4-20
Note
In order to manually set the partial
stroke pressure limit with the correct
value, you must be able to run a valve
signature test using ValveLink
software. It is then possible to set the
partial stroke pressure limit with the
Field Communicator, using the
information generated by the valve
signature test.
September 2013
Detailed Setup
To manually set the partial stroke pressure limit,
disable the travel deviation alert by setting Travel Dev
Alert Pt to 125%. Also disable “end point pressure
control” and disable the partial stroke pressure limit by
setting the values shown in table 4-9.
Table 4-9. Values for Disabling Partial Stroke Pressure Limit
Actuator
Type
Run the partial stroke test using the Field
Communicator. Once the test is completed download
the partial stroke test results using ValveLink software.
Relay Type
Zero
Power
Condition
Closed
A or C
Open
SingleActing
Select the Press/Time radio button from the partial
stroke valve signature graph. If actuator pressure
starts high and moves low, find the minimum actuator
pressure, Pmin. Otherwise, find the maximum actuator
pressure, Pmax. Use table 4-10 to estimate the partial
stroke pressure limit.
Closed
B
Open
The default value is 0.
DoubleActing
For double-acting valves, the differential pressure is
used.
Open
Partial
Stroke
Pressure
Limit
(Disabled)
0.0
Closed
Psupply
Open
Psupply
Partial
Stroke
Start Point
Closed
A
Open
Closed
0.0
Open
Psupply
Closed
0.0
Open
0.0
Closed
Psupply
Open
−Psupply
Closed
Psupply
Open
Psupply
Closed
−Psupply
Table 4-10. Estimates for Partial Stroke Pressure Limits
Actuator Style
Relay Type
Zero Power
Condition
Closed
A or C
Open
Spring and
Diaphragm
Closed
B
Open
Closed
A or C
Open
Single-Acting Piston
Closed
B
Open
Double-Acting
Piston
Closed
A
Open
September 2013
PST Starting Point
Partial Stroke Pressure Limit(1)
Open
Pmin − 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)
Closed
Pmax + 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)
Open
Pmax + 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)
Closed
Pmin − 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)
Open
Pmax + 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)
Closed
Pmin − 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)
Open
Pmin − 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)
Closed
Pmax + 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)
Open
0.5 * Pmin
Closed
Pmax + 0.5 * (Psupply − Pmax)
Open
Pmax + 0.5 * (Psupply − Pmax)
Closed
Open
0.5 * Pmin
Pmax + 0.5 * (Psupply − Pmax)
Closed
0.5 * Pmin
Open
0.5 * Pmin
Closed
Pmax + 0.5 * (Psupply − Pmax)
Open
Pmin − 0.5 * (Psupply + Pmin)
Closed
Pmax + 0.5 * (Psupply − Pmax)
Open
Pmax + 0.5 * (Psupply − Pmax)
Closed
Pmin − 0.5 * (Psupply + Pmin)
4-21
4
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
4
4-22
September 2013
Calibration
5-5
Section 5 Calibration
Calibration Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
Travel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
Auto Travel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
Manual Travel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4
5
Analog Calibration Adjust
Digital Calibration Adjust
Touch-Up Travel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6
Sensor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6
Pressure Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6
Output Pressure Sensor Calibration
Supply Pressure Sensor Calibration
Travel Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7
DVC6010, DVC6015, DVC6030 and DVC6035 Digital Valve Controllers
DVC6020 and DVC6025 Digital Valve Controllers
Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10
Relay Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10
Double-Acting Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10
Single-Acting Direct Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11
Single-Acting Reverse Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11
Restore Factory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11
September 2013
5-1
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Calibration Overview
When a DVC6000 digital valve controller is ordered as
part of a control valve assembly, the factory mounts
the digital valve controller on the actuator and
connects the necessary tubing, then sets up and
calibrates the controller. For remote-mounted digital
valve controllers, the DVC6005 base unit ships
separately from the control valve and does not include
tubing, fittings or wiring.
5
For digital valve controllers that are ordered
separately, recalibration of the analog input or
pressure sensors generally is unnecessary. However,
after mounting on an actuator, perform the initial setup
(either auto or manual), then calibrate travel by
selecting Calibrate, Travel Calibration, and Auto
Calibration from the Configure menu. For more
detailed calibration information, refer to the following
calibration procedures, available from the Calibrate
menu:
Travel Calibration
Auto Calibration —This procedure automatically
calibrates the travel. The calibration procedure uses
the valve and actuator stops as the 0% and 100%
calibration points.
Manual Calibration —This procedure permits
manual calibration of the travel. This calibration
procedure allows you to determine the 0% and 100%
calibration points and obtain the optimum linearity on a
sliding-stem valve.
Sensor Calibration
Pressure Sensors—This procedure permits
calibrating the three pressure sensors. Normally the
sensors are calibrated at the factory and should not
need calibration.
Travel Sensor—This procedure permits
calibrating the travel sensor. Normally the travel
sensor is calibrated at the factory. Calibrating the
travel sensor should only be necessary if the travel
sensor is replaced.
Analog In—This procedure permits calibrating
the analog input sensor. Normally the sensor is
calibrated at the factory and should not need
calibration.
Relay Adjustment—This procedure permits
adjustment of the pneumatic relay.
Restore Factory Settings—This procedure permits
you to restore the calibration settings back to the
factory settings.
To display the calibrate menu, from the Online menu,
select Configure and Calibrate.
5-2
Note
The Instrument Mode must be Out Of
Service and the Protection set to None
before the instrument can be calibrated.
If you are operating in burst mode, we
recommend that you disable burst before
continuing with calibration. Once
calibration is complete, burst mode may
then be turned back on.
WARNING
During calibration the valve will move
full stroke. To avoid personal injury
and property damage caused by the
release of process fluid or pressure,
isolate the valve from the process and
equalize pressure on both sides of the
valve or bleed off the process fluid.
Travel Calibration
There are two procedures available for calibrating
travel:
Auto Calibration
Manual Calibration
Once the travel is calibrated by performing either the
Auto Calibration or Manual Calibration procedures, the
travel calibration can be “touched-up” using Touch-Up
Travel Calibration.
Auto Calibration (1-3-1-1)
User interaction is only required with Auto Calibrate
Travel when the feedback connection is SStem Standard (Sliding Stem - Standard). A feedback
connection of Rotary - All, SStem - Roller (Sliding
Stem - Roller) requires no user interaction and you
can start with step 6.
For a SStem - Standard feedback connection,
interaction provides a more accurate crossover
adjustment. Setting crossover establishes the zero
degree point for the geometric correction used to
translate the rotary motion observed by the travel
sensor into the linear motion of the sliding-stem valve.
September 2013
Calibration
When a double-acting actuator is used, you will be
prompted to run the Relay Adjustment when Auto
Travel Calibration is selected. Select Yes to adjust the
relay. Select No to proceed with Auto Travel
Calibration. For additional information, refer to Relay
Adjustment in this section.
ACTUATOR
STEM
90_
Select Calibrate, Travel Calibration, Auto Calibration,
then follow the prompts on the Field Communicator
display to automatically calibrate travel.
FEEDBACK ARM
1. Select the method of crossover adjustment:
manual, last value, or default. Manual is the
recommended choice. If you select Manual, the Field
Communicator will prompt you to adjust the crossover
in step 3.
If you select Last Value, the crossover setting
currently stored in the instrument is used and there
are no further user interactions with the
auto-calibration routine (go to step 6). Use this
selection if you cannot use manual, such as when you
cannot see the valve.
If you select Default, an approximate value for the
crossover is written to the instrument and there are no
further user interactions with the auto-calibration
routine (go to step 6). Use this selection only as a last
resort. Default assumes a midrange position on the
travel sensor as the crossover point, however, this
may not be an appropriate value to use for crossover
because of variations in mounting and travel sensor
calibration.
2. The instrument seeks the high and low drive points
and the minor loop feedback (MLFB) and output bias.
No user interaction is required in this step. For a
description of these actions see step 6.
3. If you select Manual in step 1, you are asked to
select an adjustment source, either analog or digital. If
you use a current source to adjust the crossover,
select Analog and go to step 4. If you wish to adjust
the current source digitally, select Digital and go to
step 5.
4. If you selected Analog as the crossover adjustment
source, the Field Communicator prompts you to adjust
the current source until the feedback arm is 90° to the
actuator stem, as shown in figure 5-1. After you have
made the adjustment, press OK and go to step 6.
5. If you selected Digital as the crossover adjustment
source, the Field Communicator displays a menu to
allow you to adjust the crossover.
Select the direction and size of change required to set
the feedback arm so it is 90° to the actuator stem, as
shown in figure 5-1. Selecting large, medium, and
small adjustments to the crossover causes changes of
September 2013
5
A6536−3 / IL
Figure 5-1. Crossover Point
approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and 0.1°, respectively, to
the rotation of the feedback arm.
If another adjustment is required, repeat step 5.
Otherwise, select Done and go to step 6.
6. The remainder of the auto calibration procedure is
automatic.
During calibration, the instrument seeks the high and
low end points and the minor loop feedback (MLFB)
and output bias. By searching for the end points, the
instrument establishes the limits of physical travel, i.e.,
the actual travel 0 and 100% positions. This also
determines how far the relay beam swings to calibrate
the sensitivity of the beam position sensor.
Adjusting the minor loop feedback bias is done around
mid travel. The valve position is briefly moved back
and forth to determine the relay beam position at
quiescence. Essentially, it establishes the zero point
for the Minor Loop Feedback circuit. The back and
forth motion is performed to account for hysteresis.
Adjusting the output bias aligns the travel set point
with the actual travel by computing the drive signal
required to produce 0% error. This is done while the
valve is at 50% travel, making very small adjustments.
Calibration is complete when the “Auto Calibration has
completed” message appears.
7. Place the instrument In Service and verify that the
travel properly tracks the current source.
If the unit does not calibrate, refer to table 5-1 for error
messages and possible remedies.
5-3
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Manual Calibration (1-3-1-2)
It is recommended that you adjust the relay before
manually calibrating travel. For additional information
refer to Relay Adjustment in this section.
Table 5-1. Auto Calibrate Travel Error Messages
Error Message
Possible Problem and Remedy
Input current must
exceed 3.8 mA for
calibration.
The analog input signal to the instrument
must be greater than 3.8 mA. Adjust the
current output from the control system or the
current source to provide at least 4.0 mA.
Place Out Of Service
and ensure Calibrate
Protection is disabled
before calib.
The Instrument Mode must be Out of Service
and the Protection must be None before the
instrument can be calibrated. For information
on changing instrument protection and mode,
see the beginning of this section.
Calibration Aborted.
An end point was not
reached.
The problem may be one or the other of the
following:
1. The tuning set selected is too low and the
valve does not reach an end point in the
allotted time. Press the Hot Key, select
Stabilize/Optimize then Increase Response
(selects next higher tuning set).
2. The tuning set selected is too high, valve
operation is unstable and does not stay at an
end point for the allotted time. Press the Hot
Key, select Stabilize/Optimize then Decrease
Response (selects next lower tuning set).
Note
Relay Adjustment is only available for
the double-acting relay (Relay A).
5
Two procedures are available to manually calibrate
travel:
Analog Adjust
Digital Adjust
Analog Calibration Adjust
Select Calibrate, Travel Calibration, Manual
Calibration and Analog Adjust. Connect a variable
current source to the instrument LOOP + and LOOP −
terminals. The current source should be capable of
generating 4 to 20 mA. Follow the prompts on the
Field Communicator display to calibrate the
instrument’s travel in percent.
Invalid travel value.
Check travel sensor
and feedback arm
adjustments, and inst
supply press. Then,
repeat Auto Calib.
Aborting due to
response code or
device status.
Prior to receiving this message, did the
instrument output go from zero to full supply?
If not, verify instrument supply pressure by
referring to the specifications in the
appropriate actuator instruction manual. If
supply pressure is correct, check instrument
pneumatic components (I/P converter and
relay).
If the instrument output did go from zero to
full supply prior to receiving this message,
then verify proper mounting by referring to the
appropriate mounting procedure in the
Installation section.
Verify travel sensor adjustment by performing
the appropriate Travel Sensor Adjust
procedure in the Calibration section.
Making the crossover adjustment with the
valve positioned at either end of its travel will
also cause this message to appear.
The instrument may have been taken out of
service by a primary master. Put the
instrument into service with the primary
master or cycle the power off and on.
Note
0% Travel = Valve Closed
100% Travel = Valve Open
Note
In steps 3 through 7, the accuracy of
the current source adjustment affects
the position accuracy.
1. Adjust the input current until the valve is near
mid-travel. Press OK.
2. If the feedback connection is Rotary - All, SStem Roller, go to step 6. If the feedback connection is
SStem - Standard, you are prompted to set the
crossover point. Adjust the current source until the
feedback arm is 90° to the actuator stem, as shown in
figure 5-1. Then press OK.
5-4
3. Adjust the current source until the valve is at 0%
travel, then press OK.
4. Adjust the current source until the valve is at 100%
travel, then press OK.
5. Adjust the current source until the valve is at 50%
travel, then press OK.
September 2013
Calibration
6. Adjust the current source until the valve is at 0%
travel, then press OK.
7. Adjust the current source until the valve is at 100%
travel, then press OK.
5. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
size of change required to set the travel at 0%.
Selecting large, medium, and small adjustments
causes changes of approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and
0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm rotation.
8. Adjust the current source until the valve is near 5%
travel, then press OK.
If another adjustment is required, repeat step 5.
Otherwise, select Done and go to step 6.
9. Adjust the current source until the valve is near
95% travel, then press OK.
6. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
size of change required to set the travel to 100%.
Selecting large, medium, and small adjustments
causes changes of approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and
0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm rotation.
10. Place the instrument In Service and verify that the
travel properly tracks the current source.
Digital Calibration Adjust
Select Calibrate, Travel Calibration, Manual
Calibration and Digital Adjust. Connect a variable
current source to the instrument LOOP + and LOOP −
terminals. The current source should be set between 4
and 20 mA. Follow the prompts on the Field
Communicator display to calibrate the instrument’s
travel in percent.
Note
0% Travel = Valve Closed
100% Travel = Valve Open
If another adjustment is required, repeat step 6.
Otherwise, select Done and go to step 7.
7. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
size of change required to set the travel to 50%.
Selecting large, medium, and small adjustments
causes changes of approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and
0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm rotation.
If another adjustment is required, repeat step 7.
Otherwise, select Done and go to step 8.
8. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
size of change required to set the travel to 0%.
Selecting large, medium, and small adjustments
causes changes of approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and
0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm rotation for a
sliding-stem valve or to the travel for a rotary valve.
If another adjustment is required, repeat step 8.
Otherwise, select Done and go to step 9.
1. Adjust the input current until the valve is near
mid-travel. Press OK.
2. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
size of change required to adjust the output until the
valve is near mid-travel. Selecting large, medium, and
small adjustments causes changes of approximately
10.0°, 1.0°, and 0.1°, respectively, to the feedback
arm rotation.
If another adjustment is required, repeat step 2.
Otherwise, select Done and go to step 3.
3. If the feedback connection is Rotary - All, SStem Roller, go to step 8. If the feedback connection is
SStem - Standard, adjust the feedback arm to the
crossover point by using the adjustment menu.
4. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
size of change required to set the feedback arm so it
is 90° to the actuator stem, as shown in figure 5-1.
Selecting large, medium, and small adjustments to the
crossover causes changes of approximately 10.0°,
1.0°, and 0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm
rotation.
If another adjustment is required, repeat step 4.
Otherwise, select Done and go to step 5.
September 2013
9. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
size of change required to set the travel to 100%.
Selecting large, medium, and small adjustments
causes changes of approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and
0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm rotation for a
sliding-stem valve or to the travel for a rotary valve.
If another adjustment is required, repeat step 9.
Otherwise, select Done and go to step 10.
10. From the adjustment menu, select the direction
and size of change required to set the travel to near
5%. Selecting large, medium, and small adjustments
causes changes of approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and
0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm rotation for a
sliding-stem valve or to the travel for a rotary valve.
If another adjustment is required, repeat step 10.
Otherwise, select Done and go to step 11.
11. From the adjustment menu, select the direction
and size of change required to set the travel to near
95%. Selecting large, medium, and small adjustments
causes changes of approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and
0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm rotation for a
sliding-stem valve or to the travel for a rotary valve.
If another adjustment is required, repeat step 11.
Otherwise, select Done and go to step 12.
5-5
5
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
12. Place the instrument In Service and verify that the
travel properly tracks the current source.
Touch-Up Travel Calibration
Once the travel is calibrated by performing either the
Auto or Manual Calibration procedure, the travel
calibration can be “touched-up” by shorting the
Auxiliary Terminal Connections for 3 to 5 seconds to
activate Touch-Up Calibration. Touch-Up Travel
Calibration uses Last Value for the crossover
adjustment. You can abort the procedure by shorting
the auxiliary terminals for 1 second.
To enable Touch-Up Travel Calibration the Aux
Terminal Mode must be set to Auto Calibration. The
instrument Operational Status during calibration is
Calibration in Progress.
5
Use Touch-Up Calibration to calibrate the digital valve
controller travel whenever the I/P converter or relay is
replaced. Do not use Touch-Up calibration for initial
calibration when mounting the instrument on an
actuator, or if the travel sensor assembly or printed
wiring board assembly was replaced.
You can use Touch-Up Travel Calibration to calibrate
the digital valve controller if you suspect calibration
has changed due to drift. However, prior to initiating
Touch-Up Travel Calibration, perform a Valve
Signature diagnostic test, using ValveLink software.
This will capture the as-found data for future root
cause analysis.
Sensor Calibration
calibrated. The gauge should be capable of measuring
maximum instrument supply pressure. From the
Calibrate menu, select Sensor Calibration and Press
Sensors. Depending upon the sensor you wish to
calibrate, select either Output A Sensor or Output B
Sensor. Follow the prompts on the Field
Communicator display to calibrate the instrument’s
output pressure sensor.
1. Adjust the supply pressure regulator to the desired
supply pressure. Press OK.
2. Select a) Zero only, or b) Zero and Span (gauge
required) sensor calibration.
a. If Zero only calibration is selected, wait until
output x pressure has completely exhausted, then
continue. Once calibration is completed, go to step
6. The output x pressure corresponds to A or B,
depending on which output you are calibrating.
b. If Zero and Span calibration is selected, wait
until output x pressure has completely exhausted,
then continue. You will then be asked to wait until
output x pressure has reached full supply, then
continue. The output x pressure corresponds to A
or B, depending on which output you are
calibrating. Proceed with step 3.
3. The instrument sets the output pressure to full
supply. The following message appears:
Use the Increase and
Decrease selections
until the displayed
pressure matches the
output x pressure.
Pressure Sensors (1-3-2-1)
There are three pressure sensors: output A, output B
and supply. Select the appropriate menu depending
upon which pressure sensor you are calibrating.
The output x pressure corresponds to A or B,
depending on which output you are calibrating. Press
OK when you have read the message.
4. The value of the output pressure appears on the
display.
Note
The pressure sensors are calibrated at
the factory and should not require
calibration.
Output Pressure Sensor Calibration
To calibrate the output pressure sensors, connect an
external reference gauge to the output being
5-6
5. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
size of adjustment to the displayed value. Selecting
large, medium, and small adjustments causes
changes of approximately 3.0 psi/0.207 bar/20.7 kPa,
0.30 psi/0.0207 bar/2.07 kPa, and 0.03 psi/0.00207
bar/0.207 kPa, respectively. Adjust the displayed value
until it matches the output pressure, select Done and
go to step 6.
6. Place the instrument In Service and verify that the
displayed pressure matches the measured output
pressure.
September 2013
Calibration
Supply Pressure Sensor Calibration
Note
Alignment Pin
(key 46)
Feedback Arm
(key 79)
Supply Pressure Sensor Calibration is
not available for instrument level HC.
A
To calibrate the supply pressure sensor, connect an
external reference gauge to the output side of the
supply regulator. The gauge should be capable of
measuring maximum instrument supply pressure.
From the Calibrate menu, select Sensor Calibration,
Pressure Sensors, and Supply Sensor. Follow the
prompts on the Field Communicator display to
calibrate the instrument’s supply pressure sensor.
1. Select a) Zero Only, or b) Zero and Span (gauge
required).
a. If Zero Only calibration is selected, adjust the
supply pressure regulator to remove supply
pressure from the instrument. Press OK. Once
calibration is complete, go to step 5.
b. If Zero and Span calibration is selected, adjust
the supply pressure regulator to remove supply
pressure from the instrument. Press OK. Adjust the
supply regulator to the maximum instrument supply
pressure. Press OK. Proceed with step 2.
2. The following message appears:
Use the Increase and
Decrease selections until
the displayed pressure
matches the instrument
supply pressure.
Press OK when you have read this message.
Travel
Sensor
Shaft
B
5
A7023 / IL
Figure 5-2. FIELDVUE DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller
Showing Feedback Arm in Position for Travel Sensor
Adjustment
5. Place the instrument In Service and verify that the
displayed pressure matches the measured supply
pressure.
Travel Sensor (1-3-2-2)
The travel sensor is normally adjusted at the factory
and should not require adjustment. However, if the
travel sensor has been replaced, adjust the travel
sensor by performing the appropriate procedure. See
the Maintenance section for travel sensor replacement
procedures.
DVC6010, DVC6015, DVC6030 and
DVC6035 Digital Valve Controllers
WARNING
Failure to remove air pressure may
cause personal injury or property
damage from bursting parts.
3. The value of the pressure appears on the display.
4. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
size of adjustment to the displayed value. Selecting
large, medium, and small adjustments causes
changes of approximately 3.0 psi/0.207 bar/20.7 kPa,
0.30 psi/0.0207 bar/2.07 kPa, and 0.03 psi/0.00207
bar/0.207 kPa, respectively. Adjust the displayed value
until it matches the supply pressure, select Done and
go to step 5.
September 2013
1. Remove supply air and remove the instrument from
the actuator.
2. As shown in figure 5-2, align the feedback arm (key
79) with the housing by inserting the alignment pin
(key 46) through the hole marked “A” on the feedback
arm. Fully engage the alignment pin into the tapped
hole in the housing.
5-7
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
BACK EDGE
OF ARM PARALLEL
W/BACK OF HOUSING
ARM ASSEMBLY
ARM ASSEMBLY PIN
Table 5-2. Travel Sensor Counts
Digital Valve Controller
Travel Sensor Counts
DVC6010 / DVC6015
700 ±200
DVC6020 / DVC6025
2100 ±200
DVC6030(1) / DVC6035(2)
Counterclockwise shaft rotation
600 ±200
DVC6030(3) / DVC6035(2)
Clockwise shaft rotation
3400 ±200
1. Refer to figure 2-9 to determine the desired starting position for the DVC6030
based on counterclockwise potentiometer shaft rotation.
2. Refer to figure 2-14 to determine the desired starting position for the DVC6035
based on potentiometer shaft; counterclockwise or clockwise.
3. Refer to figure 2-10 to determine the desired starting position for the DVC6030
based on clockwise potentiometer shaft rotation.
TRAVEL SENSOR
SHAFT
BACK OF HOUSING
Note
A7025 / IL
5
Figure 5-3. FIELDVUE DVC6020 Travel Sensor Arm/Housing
Back Plane Alignment
In the next step, be sure the feedback
arm surface remains flush with the end
of the travel sensor shaft.
7. While observing the travel sensor counts, tighten
the screw that secures the feedback arm to the travel
sensor shaft. Be sure the travel sensor counts remain
within the tolerances listed in table 5-2. Paint the
screw to discourage tampering with the connection.
Note
The alignment pin (key 46) is
stored inside the digital valve
controller housing.
8. Disconnect the Field Communicator and current
source from the instrument.
9. Remove the alignment pin and store it in the
instrument housing.
10. Install the digital valve controller on the actuator.
DVC6020 and DVC6025 Digital Valve
Controllers
3. Loosen the screw that secures the feedback arm to
the travel sensor shaft. Position the feedback arm so
that the surface of the feedback arm is flush with the
end of the travel sensor shaft.
4. Connect a current source to the instrument LOOP
− and LOOP + terminals. Set the current source to
any value between 4 and 20 mA. Connect the Field
Communicator to the TALK terminals.
5. Before beginning the travel sensor adjustment, set
the instrument mode to Out Of Service and the
protection to None.
6. From the Calibrate menu select Sensor Calibration,
Travel Sensor. Follow the prompts on the Field
Communicator display to adjust the travel sensor
counts to the value listed in table 5-2.
5-8
WARNING
Failure to remove air pressure may
cause personal injury or property
damage from bursting parts.
1. Remove supply air and remove the instrument from
the actuator.
2. See figure 5-4 for parts identification. Disconnect
the bias spring (key 82) from the feedback arm
assembly (key 84) and the arm assembly (key 91).
Remove the mounting bracket (key 74) from the back
of the digital controller. Hold the arm assembly
(key 91) so that the arm assembly points toward the
terminal box and the arm is parallel to the back of the
housing, as shown in figure 5-3.
3. Loosen the screw that secures the arm assembly
to the travel sensor shaft. Position the arm assembly
September 2013
Calibration
MOUNTING
ADAPTER
(KEY 117)
CAP SCREW, HEX SOCKET
(KEY 116)
MOUNTING BRACKET
(KEY 74)
5
BIAS SPRING
(KEY 82)
CAP SCREW, HEX HEAD
(KEY 92)
ARM ASSEMBLY PIN
ARM ASSEMBLY
(KEY 91)
A7024-2
FEEDBACK ARM
TORSION SPRING
(KEY 93)
FEEDBACK ARM ASSEMBLY
(KEY 84)
Figure 5-4. FIELDVUE DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller Mounted on Fisher 1052, Size 33 Actuator
so that the outer surface is flush with the end of the
travel sensor shaft.
4. Connect a current source to the instrument LOOP
− and LOOP + terminals. Set the current source to
any value between 4 and 20 mA. Connect the Field
Communicator to the TALK terminals.
5. Before beginning the travel sensor adjustment, set
the instrument mode to Out Of Service and the
protection to None.
6. From the Calibrate menu, select Sensor
Calibration, Travel Sensor. Follow the prompts on the
Field Communicator display to adjust the travel sensor
counts to the value listed in table 5-2.
September 2013
Note
In the next step, be sure the arm
assembly outer surface remains flush
with the end of the travel sensor shaft.
7. While observing the travel sensor counts, tighten
the screw that secures the arm assembly to the travel
sensor shaft. Be sure the travel sensor counts remain
within the tolerances listed in table 5-2. Paint the
screw to discourage tampering with the connection.
8. Disconnect the Field Communicator and current
source from the instrument.
5-9
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
9. Apply lubricant (key 63) to the pin portion of the
arm assembly (key 91).
10. Replace the mounting bracket on the back of the
instrument and reconnect the bias spring between the
feedback arm assembly and the arm assembly on the
travel sensor shaft.
6. The following message appears:
Use Increase and
Decrease selections
until the displayed
current matches the
current source.
11. Install the digital valve controller on the actuator.
Press OK when you have read this message.
7. The value of the Analog Input appears on the
display.
Analog Input (1-3-2-3)
5
To calibrate the analog input sensor, connect a
variable current source to the instrument LOOP+ and
LOOP− terminals. The current source should be
capable of generating an output of 4 to 20 mA. From
the Configure menu select Calibrate, Sensor
Calibration, and Analog In. Follow the prompts on the
Field Communicator display to calibrate the analog
input sensor.
1. Set the current source to the target value shown on
the display. The target value is the Input Range Low
value. Press OK.
2. The following message appears:
Use Increase and
Decrease selections
until the displayed
current matches the
current source.
8. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
size of adjustment to the displayed value. Selecting
large, medium, and small adjustments causes
changes of approximately 0.4 mA, 0.04 mA, and 0.004
mA, respectively. Adjust the displayed value until it
matches the current source, select Done and go to
step 9.
9. Place the instrument In Service and verify that the
analog input displayed matches the current source.
Relay Adjust (1-3-3)
Before beginning travel calibration, check the relay
adjustment. To check relay adjustment, select Relay
from the Calibrate menu, then follow the prompts on
the Field Communicator display. Replace the digital
valve controller cover when finished.
Note
Relay B and C are not user-adjustable.
Press OK when you have read this message.
3. The value of the Analog Input appears on the
display.
4. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
size of adjustment to the displayed value. Selecting
large, medium, and small adjustments causes
changes of approximately 0.4 mA, 0.04 mA, and 0.004
mA, respectively. Adjust the displayed value until it
matches the current source, select Done and go to
step 5.
5. Set the current source to the target value shown on
the display. The target value is the Input Range High
value. Press OK.
5-10
Double-Acting Relay
The double-acting relay is designated by “Relay A” on
a label affixed to the relay itself. For double-acting
actuators, the valve must be near mid-travel to
properly adjust the relay. The Field Communicator will
automatically position the valve when Relay is
selected.
Rotate the adjustment disc, shown in figure 5-5, until
the output pressure displayed on the Field
Communicator is between 50 and 70% of supply
pressure. This adjustment is very sensitive. Be sure to
allow the pressure reading to stabilize before making
another adjustment (stabilization may take up to 30
seconds or more for large actuators).
September 2013
Calibration
FOR SINGLE-ACTING DIRECT RELAYS:
ROTATE ADJUSTMENT DISC IN THIS
DIRECTION UNTIL IT CONTACTS THE
BEAM
FOR DOUBLE-ACTING RELAYS:
ROTATE ADJUSTMENT DISC IN
THIS DIRECTION TO DECREASE
OUTPUT PRESSURE
ADJUSTMENT DISC
FOR DOUBLE-ACTING RELAYS:
ROTATE ADJUSTMENT DISC IN
THIS DIRECTION TO INCREASE
OUTPUT PRESSURE
5
W9034
Figure 5-5. Relay A Adjustment (Shroud Removed for Clarity)
If the low bleed relay option has been ordered
stabilization may take approximately two minutes
longer than the standard relay.
Relay A may also adjusted for use in single-actingdirect applications. Rotate the adjustment disc as
shown in figure 5-5 for single-acting direct operation.
Single-Acting Relays
WARNING
If the unused port is monitoring
pressure, ensure that the pressure
source conforms to ISA Standard
7.0.01 and does not exceed the
pressure supplied to the instrument.
Failure to do so could result in
personal injury or property damage
caused by loss of process control.
September 2013
Single-Acting Direct Relay
The single-acting direct relay is designated by “Relay
C” on a label affixed to the relay itself. Relay C
requires no adjustment.
Single-Acting Reverse Relay
The single-acting reverse relay is designated by
“Relay B” on a label affixed to the relay itself. Relay B
is calibrated at the factory and requires no further
adjustment.
Restoring Factory Settings (1-3-4)
From the Online menu, select Configure, Calibrate,
and Restore Factory Settings. Follow the prompts on
the Field Communicator display to restore calibration
to the factory settings. You should only restore the
calibration if it is not possible to calibrate an individual
sensor. Restoring calibration returns the calibration of
all of the sensors and the tuning set to their factory
settings. Following restoration of the factory
calibration, the individual sensors should be
recalibrated.
5-11
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
5
5-12
September 2013
Viewing Device Variables and Diagnostics
476-6
Section 6 Viewing Device Variables and
Diagnostics
Service Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Alert Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
Device Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
Stroke Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
Partial Stroke Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7
Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7
Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7
Drive Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7
Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7
Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8
DD Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8
September 2013
6
6-1
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Service Tools
Note
Service Tools are not available for
instrument level AC.
Low Power Write Alert— This alert is activated if a
write to the instrument is attempted when the loop
current is less than approximately 3.5 mA. Firmware 9,
10, and 11.
Non-Critical NVM Alert—This alert is indicated if the
checksum for data, which are not critical for instrument
operation, has failed.
Critical NVM Alert—This alert is indicated when the
Non-Volatile Memory integrity test fails. Configuration
data is stored in NVM. If this failure is indicated,
restart the instrument and see if it clears. If it does not
clear, replace the printed wiring board assembly.
Flash ROM Alert—This alert indicates that the Read
Only Memory integrity test failed. If this alert is
indicated, restart the instrument and see if it clears. If
it does not clear, replace the printed wiring board
assembly.
Alert Conditions (2-1)
6
Instrument Alert Conditions, when enabled, detect
many operational and performance issues that may be
of interest. To view these alerts, from the Online menu
select Service Tools, Alert Conditions. The alert
conditions for each group of alerts are listed below. If
there are no alerts active for a particular group the
group will not be displayed on the Field
Communicator. See table 6-1 for alert groups.
Electronics— If an electronics alert is active it
will appear under ELECT ALERTS.
Drive Current
Drive Current Alert—This alert is indicated when the
drive current does not read as expected. If this alert
occurs, check the connection between the I/P
converter and the printed wiring board assembly. Try
removing the I/P converter and re-installing it. If the
failure does not clear, replace the I/P converter or the
printed wiring board assembly.
Drive Signal
Drive Signal Alert—This alert is indicated when the
Drive Signal is greater or less than the expected
maximum or minimum.
No Free Time Alert—This alert is indicated if the
instrument is unable to complete all of the configured
tasks. This will not occur with a properly functioning
instrument.
Reference Voltage Alert—This failure is indicated
whenever there is a failure associated with the internal
voltage reference. If this alert is indicated replace the
printed wiring board assembly.
Internal Sensor Out of Limits—This alert is indicated
if there is a possible problem with either the pressure
sensor or the printed wiring board assembly
submodule.
Variable Out of Range—This alert is indicated if
there is a possible problem with one or more of the
following: the Analog Input Signal, the I/P converter
submodule, the pneumatic relay submodule, or the
printed wiring board.
Field device malfunction—The alert is indicated if
the pressure, position, or temperature sensors are
providing invalid readings.
Sensor— If a sensor alert is active it will appear
under SENSOR ALERTS.
Processor Impaired
Offline/Failed Alert—This alert is indicated if a
failure, enabled from the Self Test Shutdown menu,
caused an instrument shutdown. Press Enter to see
which of the specific failures caused the Offline/Failed
indication.
Travel Sensor
Travel Sensor Alert—This alert is indicated if the
sensed travel is outside the range of −25.0 to 125.0%
of calibrated travel. If this alert is indicated, check the
instrument mounting and the travel sensor adjustment.
Also, check that the electrical connection from the
travel sensor is properly plugged into the printed wiring
board assembly. After restarting the instrument, if the
alert does not clear, troubleshoot the printed wiring
board assembly or travel sensor.
Power Starvation Alert— This alert is activated if the
instrument does not have enough power to function
properly. Firmware 7 and below.
Pressure Sensors
Pressure Sensor Alert—This alert is indicated if the
actuator pressure is outside the range of −24.0 to
125.0% of the calibrated pressure for more than 60
6-2
September 2013
Viewing Device Variables and Diagnostics
seconds. If this alert is indicated, check the instrument
supply pressure. If the failure persists, ensure the
printed wiring board assembly is properly mounted
onto the Module Base Assembly, and the pressure
sensor O-rings are properly installed. If the alert does
not clear after restarting the instrument, replace the
printed wiring board assembly.
Table 6-1. Alerts Included in Alert Groups for Alert Record
Alert Group
Valve Alerts
Failure Alerts
Note
The pressure sensor alert is used for
output A, output B, and the supply
pressure sensor. Check the pressure
values to see which sensor is causing
the alert.
Temperature Sensor
Temperature Sensor Alert—This alert is indicated
when the instrument temperature sensor fails, or the
sensor reading is outside of the range of −40 to 85C
(−40 to 185F). The temperature reading is used
internally for temperature compensation of inputs. If
this alert is indicated, restart the instrument and see if
it clears. If it does not clear, replace the printed wiring
board assembly.
Environment— If an environment alert is active
it will appear under ENVIRO ALERTS.
Supply Pressure
Supply Pressure Lo Alert—This alert is indicated
when supply pressure is lower than the configured
limit.
Auxiliary Terminal Alert
Aux Terminal Alert—This alert is set when the
auxiliary input terminals are either open or closed,
depending upon the selection for the Auxiliary Input
Alert State.
Loop Current Validation Alert— This alert is
activated if the loop current is out of valid range. If the
control system is known to output currents outside of
this range, the loop current shutdown should not be
enabled. If this alert is indicated, clear the alert by
restarting the instrument with the loop current verified
to be in the valid range. If the alert does not clear,
replace the printed wiring board. Only available in
firmware 9, 10, and 11.
Travel— If a travel alert is active it will appear
under TRAVEL ALERTS.
September 2013
Miscellaneous Alerts
Alerts Include in Group
Travel Alert Lo
Travel Alert Hi
Travel Alert Lo Lo
Travel Alert Hi Hi
Travel deviation
Drive signal
No free time
Flash ROM fail
Drive current fail
Ref Voltage fail
NVM fail
Temperature sensor fail
Pressure sensor fail
Travel sensor fail
Auxiliary input
Travel Deviation
Travel Deviation Alert—The difference between
Setpoint and Travel is greater than the configured
limits.
6
Travel Limit
Travel Alert Hi Hi—This alert is indicated if the
Travel is greater than the configured limit.
Travel Alert Lo Lo—This alert is indicated if the
Travel is lower than the configured limit.
Travel Limit Hi/Lo
Travel Alert Hi—This alert is indicated if the Travel
is greater than the configured limit.
Travel Alert Lo—This alert is indicated if the Travel
is lower than the configured limit.
Travel Limit / Cutoff
Travel Limit/Cutoff Hi—This alert is indicated if the
Travel is limited high or the high cutoff is in effect.
Travel Limit/Cutoff Lo—This alert is indicated if the
Travel is limited low or the low cutoff is in effect.
Travel History— If a travel history alert is active
it will appear under TVL HIST ALERTS.
Cycle Count
Cycle Count Alert—This alert is indicated if the
Cycle Counter exceeds the Cycle Count Alert Point.
Travel Accumulator
Travel Accumulator Alert—This alert is indicated if
the Travel Accumulator exceeds the Travel
Accumulator Alert Point.
SIS (ODV tier only)— If an SIS alert is active it
will appear under SIS ALERTS.
Partial Stroke Test (PST)
Valve Stuck or Pressure/Travel Path
Obstructed—This alert is indicated if the valve is stuck
or the pressure/travel path is obstructed.
End Point Pressure Deviation
Pressure Deviation Alert—The alert is indicated if
6-3
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
the difference between the target pressure and the
actual pressure exceeds the Pressure Deviation Alert
Point for a period of time greater than the Pressure
Deviation Time.
Locked in Safety Alert—This alert is indicated if the
ODV unit is locked in the safety position.
Alert Record
Alert Record has Entries—This alert indicates that
an alert has been saved to the alert record.
Alert Record Full—This alert indicates that the alert
record is full.
Viewing Instrument Status (2-2)
Device Record (2-3)
Note
Device Record is not available for
instrument level AC.
From the Online menu, select Service Tools, Device
Record. Follow the prompts on the Field
Communicator display to view the following
parameters:
Maximum Recorded Temperature—shows the
maximum temperature the instrument has experienced
since installation.
Mininum Recorded Temperature—shows the
minimum temperature the instrument has experienced
since installation.
6
Note
Status is not available with instrument
level AC.
To view the instrument status, from the Service Tools
menu select Status. This menu item indicates the
status of the Operational items listed below. The
status of more than one operational item may be
indicated.
Instrument Time
Inst Time Invalid
Calibration and Diagnostics
View Number of Days Powered Up—indicates
in hours or days the total elapsed time the instrument
has been powered up.
Number of Power Ups—indicates how many
times the instrument has cycled power.
Stroking the Digital Valve Controller
Output (2-4)
Note
Stroke Valve is not available with
instrument level AC.
Cal in Progress
Autocal in Progress
Diag in Progress
Diag Data Avail
Operational
Press Ctrl Active
Multi-Drop
Integrator
Integrator Sat Hi
Integrator Sat Lo
6-4
From the Online menu, select Service Tools,Stroke
Valve. Follow the prompts on the Field Communicator
display to select from the following:
Done—Select this if you are done. All ramping is
stopped when DONE is selected.
Ramp Open—Ramps the travel toward open at
the rate of 1.0% per second of the ranged travel.
Ramp Closed—Ramps the travel toward closed
at the rate of 1.0% per second of the ranged travel.
Ramp to Target—Ramps the travel to the
specified target at the rate of 1.0% per second of the
ranged travel.
September 2013
Viewing Device Variables and Diagnostics
Step to Target—Steps the travel to the specified
target.
Partial Stroke Test (2-5)
Device (Digital Valve Controller)
The Auto Partial Stroke Test allows the partial stroke
test to be scheduled by the DVC6000. The test is
scheduled in number of hours between tests. Any
power cycle will reset the test clock timer.
Auxiliary Terminal
Note
Partial Stroke Test is only available for
instrument level ODV.
The auxiliary terminal can be used for different
applications. The default configuration is for a partial
stroke test initiated by shorting the contacts wired to
the auxiliary +/− terminals of the DVC6000. Refer to
Auxiliary Terminal Wiring Length Guidelines below.
Local Push Button
WARNING
During the partial stroke test the valve
will move. To avoid personal injury
and property damage caused by the
release of pressure or process fluid,
provide some temporary means of
control for the process.
The Partial Stroke Test allows the DVC6000 digital
valve controllers with instrument level ODV to perform
a Valve Signature type of test while the instrument is
in service and operational. In some applications, it is
important to be able to exercise and test the valve to
verify that it will operate when commanded. This
feature allows the user to partially stroke the valve
while continually monitoring the input signal. If a
demand arises, the test is aborted and the valve
moves to its commanded position. The partial stroke
valve travel is configurable between 1 and 30%
maximum travel, in 0.1% increments. Data from the
last partial stroke test is stored in the instrument
memory for retrieval by ValveLink software.
The Partial Stroke Test allows you to perform a partial,
10%, stroke test (standard) or a custom stroke test.
With the custom stroke test, the stroke may be
extended up to 30%. Be sure to check plant guidelines
before performing a custom stroke test. The purpose
of this test is to ensure that the valve assembly moves
upon demand.
A partial stroke test can be initiated when the valve is
operating at either 4 or 20 mA (point-to-point mode). In
applications where a spurious trip is to be minimized, 4
mA is the normal operating position.
When enabled, a partial stroke test may be initiated by
the device (as a scheduled, auto partial stroke test), a
remote push button located in the field or at the valve,
the 475 Field Communicator, or ValveLink software.
September 2013
A partial stroke test command may be sent to the
digital valve controller using a set of contacts wired to
the auxiliary +/− terminals. To perform a test, the
contacts must be closed for 3 to 5 seconds and then
opened. To abort the test, close the contacts for 1
second. The last set of diagnostic data is stored in the
instrument memory for later retrieval via ValveLink
software.
Local DI
When configured by the user interface, the Auxiliary
Terminal can be used as a discrete input from a
pressure switch, temperature switch etc., to provide an
alert.
Auxiliary Terminal Wiring Length Guidelines
The Auxiliary Input Terminals of a DVC6000 with
instrument level ODV can be used with a
locally-mounted switch for initiating a partial stroke
test. Some applications require that the partial stroke
test be initiated from a remote location.
The length for wiring connected to the Auxiliary Input
Terminals is limited by capacitance. For proper
operation of the Auxiliary Input Terminals capacitance
should not exceed 18000 pF. As with all control signal
wiring, good wiring practices should be observed to
minimize adverse effect of electrical noise on the Aux
Switch function.
Example Calculation: Capacitance per foot or per
meter is required to calculate the length of wire that
may be connected to the Aux switch input. The wire
should not exceed the capacitance limit of 18000 pF.
Typically the wire manufacturer supplies a data sheet
which provides all of the electrical properties of the
wire. The pertinent parameter is the highest possible
capacitance. If shielded wire is used, the appropriate
number is the “Conductor to Other Conductor &
Shield” value.
6-5
6
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Example — 18AWG Unshielded Audio, Control
and Instrumentation Cable
Manufacturer’s specifications include:
1. Connect the Field Communicator to the LOOP
terminals on the digital valve controller.
Nom. Capacitance Conductor to Conductor @ 1 KHz: 26 pF/ft
2. Turn on the Field Communicator.
Nom. Conductor DC Resistance @ 20 Deg. C: 5.96 Ohms/1000 ft
3. From the Online menu, select Service Tools,
Partial Stroke Test.
Max. Operating Voltage − UL 200 V RMS (PLTC, CMG),150 V RMS
(ITC)
Allowable Length with this cable = 18000pF /(26pF/ft) = 692 ft
Example — 18AWG Shielded Audio, Control and
Instrumentation Cable
Manufacturer’s specifications include:
Nom. Characteristic Impedance: 29 Ohms
Nom. Inductance: .15 μH/ft
Nom. Capacitance Conductor to Conductor @ 1 KHz: 51 pF/ft
Nom. Cap. Cond. to other Cond. & Shield @ 1 KHz 97 pF/ft
6
Field Communicator
Allowable Length with this cable = 18000pF /(97pF/ft) = 185 ft
The AUX switch input passes less than 1 mA through
the switch contacts, and uses less than 5V, therefore,
neither the resistance nor the voltage rating of the
cable are critical. Ensure that switch contact corrosion
is prevented. It is generally advisable that the switch
have gold-plated or sealed contacts.
6-6
4. Select either Standard (10%) or Custom. With the
Custom Stroke Test, the stroke may be entered up to
30% with configurable stroking speed and pause time.
5. The currently configured Stroke, Stroking Speed,
and Pause Time is displayed. Choose “Yes” to run the
test using these values. Choose “No” to modify the
values. The default value for Stroke Speed is
0.25%/second.
6. The valve begins to move and the actual travel
reported by the digital valve controller is displayed on
the Field Communicator.
7. Once the valve has reached the endpoint, check
that the valve has reached the desired set point. The
valve should return to its original position.
For information on configuring the Partial Stroke Test,
see Partial Stroke Variables in the Detailed Setup
section.
September 2013
Viewing Device Variables and Diagnostics
Overview (3)
Variables
The following menus are available to define and/or
view information about the instrument. From the
Online menu select Overview.
The Variables menu is available to view additional
variables, including; Auxiliary Input, Temperature,
Maximum Temperature, Minimum Temperature, Cycle
Counter, Travel Accumulator, Raw Travel Input, Run
Time, and Number of Power Ups.
Note
These variables are not available for
instrument level AC. Supply Pressure
alert is not available for instrument
level HC.
Analog In—the value of the instrument analog input in
mA (milliamperes) or % (percent) of ranged input.
Setpoint—the requested valve position in % of ranged
travel.
Travel—the value of the DVC6000 digital valve
controller travel in % (percent) of ranged travel. Travel
always represents how far the valve is open.
Drive Signal—the value of the instrument drive signal
in % (percent) of maximum drive.
Pressure
Shows the value of the instrument supply and output
pressures in psi, bar, kPa, or kg/cm2. Also shows the
output pressure differential. To display pressures may
require selecting the variable; a detail display of that
variable with its values will appear.
Pressure A—the value of Output Pressure A in
psi, bar, kPa, or kg/cm2.
Pressure B— the value of Output Pressure A in
psi, bar, kPa, or kg/cm2.
A Minus B—the value of the output pressure
differential in psi, bar, kPa, or kg/cm2.
Pressure—the instrument supply pressure in psi,
bar, kPa, or kg/cm2. Not available in instrument level
HC.
September 2013
Note
These variables are not available for
instrument level AC.
If a value for a variable does not appear on the
display, select the variable and a detailed display of
that variable with its value will appear. A variable’s
value does not appear on the menu if the value
becomes too large to fit in the allocated space on the
display, or if the variable requires special processing,
such as Aux Input.
Auxiliary Input—A discrete input that can be
used with an independent limit or pressure switch. Its
value is either open or closed.
Temperature—The internal temperature of the
instrument is displayed in either degrees Fahrenheit or
Celsius.
Maximum Recorded Temperature—Shows the
maximum temperature the instrument has experienced
since installation.
Minimum Recorded Temperature—Shows the
minimum temperature the instrument has experienced
since installation.
Cycle Counter—Displays the number of times
the valve travel has cycled. Only changes in direction
of the travel after the travel has exceeded the
deadband are counted as a cycle. Once a new cycle
has occurred, a new deadband around the last travel
is set. The value of the Cycle Counter can be reset
from the Cycle Count Alert menu. See page 4-15 of
the Detailed Setup section for additional information.
Travel Accumulator—contains the total change
in travel, in percent of ranged travel. The accumulator
only increments when travel exceeds the deadband.
Then the greatest amount of change in one direction
from the original reference point (after the deadband
has been exceeded) will be added to the Travel
Accumulator. The value of the Travel Accumulator can
be reset from the Travel Accumulator menu. See page
4-15 of the Detailed Setup section for additional
information.
6-7
6
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Table 6-2. Functions Available for Instrument Level
Note
Do not use the following raw travel
input indication for calibrating the
travel sensor. The following should
only be used for a relative indication to
be sure the travel sensor is working
and that it is moving in the correct
direction. Perform the Travel Sensor
Adjust procedure in the Calibration
section to calibrate the travel sensor.
Instrument
Level
AC
Communicates with the Field Communicator.
Provides basic setup and calibration.
HC
Communicates with the Field Communicator and
ValveLink software.
In addition to above, provides: travel cutoffs and limits,
minimum opening and closing times, input
characterization (linear, equal percentage, quick
opening, and custom), trending with ValveLink Solo,
and the following alerts: travel deviation; travel alert
high, low, high high, and low low; drive signal; auxiliary
terminal; cycle counter; and travel accumulation.
AD
Includes all functions listed above plus (with ValveLink
software) all offline diagnostic tests (dynamic error
band, drive signal, step response, and valve signature)
plus online trending
PD
ODV
6
Raw Travel Input—Indicates the travel sensor
position in analog-to-digital converter counts. When
the travel sensor is operating correctly, this number
changes as the valve strokes.
Functions Available
Includes all functions listed above plus all Performance
Diagnostics online/in-service valve testing (valve
friction, electronics, and mechanical condition)
Includes all functions listed above plus partial stroke
test and lead/lag input filter.
Manufacturer—Identifies the manufacturer of
the instrument.
Model—Identifies the instrument model.
View Number of Days Powered Up—Indicates
in hours or days the total elapsed time the instrument
has been powered up.
Number of Power Ups—Indicates how many
times the instrument has cycled power.
Device Revision—The revision number of the
software for communication between the Field
Communicator and the instrument.
Firmware Revision—The revision number of the
firmware in the instrument.
Device Information
Hardware Revision—The revision number of the
electrical circuitry within the instrument printed wiring
board.
The Device Information menu is available to view
information about the instrument. Follow the prompts
on the Field Communicator display to view information
in the following fields: HART Tag, Device ID,
Manufacturer, Model, Device Revision, Firmware
Revision, Hardware Revision, Instrument Level, and
HART Universal Revision.
Instrument Level—Indicates the instrument
level
AC—Auto Calibrate
HC—HART Communicating
AD—Advanced Diagnostics
PD—Performance Diagnostics
ODV—Optimized Digital Valve
Hart Tag—A HART tag is a unique name (up to
eight characters) that identifies the physical
instrument.
Device ID—Each instrument has a unique
Device Identifier. The device ID provides additional
security to prevent this instrument from accepting
commands meant for other instruments.
6-8
Table 6-2 lists the functions available for each
instrument level.
HART Universal Revision—The revision
number of the HART Universal Commands which are
used as the communications protocol for the
instrument.
DD Information
Contains the device description in the Field
Communicator.
September 2013
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
7-7
Section 7 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Module Base Maintenance
Removing the Module Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3
Replacing the Module Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4
Submodule Maintenance
I/P Converter
Removing the I/P Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the I/P Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6
7-6
Printed Wiring Board (PWB) Assembly
Removing the Printed Wiring Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the Printed Wiring Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Printed Wiring Board Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6
7-7
7-7
7
Pneumatic Relay
Removing the Pneumatic Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the Pneumatic Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7
7-7
Gauges, Pipe Plugs or Tire Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7
Terminal Box
Removing the Terminal Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-8
Replacing the Terminal Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-8
Travel Sensor
Disassembly
DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller and DVC6015 Remote
Feedback Unit (Sliding-Stem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller and DVC6025 Remote
Feedback Unit (Rotary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVC6030 Digital Valve Controller and DVC6035 Remote
Feedback Unit (Rotary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9
7-9
7-10
Assembly
DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller and DVC6015 Remote
Feedback Unit (Sliding-Stem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller and DVC6025 Remote
Feedback Unit (Rotary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVC6030 Digital Valve Controller and DVC6035 Remote
Feedback Unit (Rotary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-10
7-12
7-13
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-14
Checking Voltage Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-14
Checking Loop Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-15
September 2013
7-1
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
The DVC6000 digital valve controller enclosure is
rated NEMA 4X and IP66, therefore periodic cleaning
of internal components is not required. If the DVC6000
is installed in an area where the exterior surfaces tend
to get heavily coated or layered with industrial or
atmospheric contaminants, however, it is
recommended that the vent (key 52) be periodically
inspected to ensure it is fully open. If the vent appears
to be clogged, the vent can be removed, cleaned and
replaced. Lightly brush the exterior of the vent to
remove contaminant and run a mild water/detergent
solution through the vent to ensure it is fully open.
WARNING
Personal injury or property damage
can occur from cover failure due to
overpressure. Ensure that the
housing vent opening is open and
free of debris to prevent pressure
buildup under the cover.
7
sure the actuator cannot suddenly open
or close the valve.
Use bypass valves or completely
shut off the process to isolate the valve
from process pressure. Relieve process
pressure from both sides of the valve.
Use lock-out procedures to be sure
that the above measures stay in effect
while you work on the equipment.
Check with your process or safety
engineer for any additional measures
that must be taken to protect against
process media.
Vent the pneumatic actuator
loading pressure and relieve any
actuator spring precompression so the
actuator is not applying force to the
valve stem; this will allow for the safe
removal of the stem connector.
WARNING
WARNING
To avoid static discharge from the
plastic cover when flammable gases
or dust are present, do not rub or
clean the cover with solvents. To do
so could result in a spark that may
cause the flammable gases or dust to
explode, resulting in personal injury
or property damage. Clean with a mild
detergent and water only.
WARNING
Avoid personal injury or property
damage from sudden release of
process pressure or bursting of parts.
Before performing any maintenance
procedures on the DVC6000 digital
valve controller:
Always wear protective clothing,
gloves, and eyewear.
Do not remove the actuator from
the valve while the valve is still
pressurized.
Disconnect any operating lines
providing air pressure, electric power,
or a control signal to the actuator. Be
7-2
When using natural gas as the supply
medium, or for explosion proof
applications, the following warnings
also apply:
Remove electrical power before
removing the housing cap. Personal
injury or property damage from fire or
explosion may result if power is not
disconnected before removing the cap.
Remove electrical power before
disconnecting any of the pneumatic
connections.
When disconnecting any of the
pneumatic connections or any
pressure retaining part, natural gas will
seep from the unit and any connected
equipment into the surrounding
atmosphere. Personal injury or
property damage may result from fire
or explosion if natural gas is used as
the supply medium and appropriate
preventive measures are not taken.
Preventive measures may include, but
are not limited to, one or more of the
following: Remote venting of the unit,
re-evaluating the hazardous area
classification, ensuring adequate
ventilation, and the removal of any
ignition sources. For information on
remote venting of this controller, refer
to page 2-22.
September 2013
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Ensure that all caps and covers
are correctly installed before putting
this unit back into service. Failure to
do so could result in personal injury or
property damage from fire or
explosion.
Tools Required
Table 7-1 lists the tools required for maintaining the
DVC6000 digital valve controller.
Table 7-1. Tools Required
Tool
Size
Component
5 mm
1.5 mm
2.5 mm
5 mm
6 mm
1/2-inch
9/64-inch
7/16-inch
3/16-inch
Relay, printed wiring board
assembly, and cover screws
Terminal box screw
Terminal box cover screw
I/P converter screws
Travel sensor screws
Module base screws
Connector Arm screw (DVC6010)
Feedback arm screw
DVC6010 mounting bolts
DVC6020 mounting bolts
Phillips Screwdriver
CAUTION
When replacing components, use only
components specified by the factory.
Always use proper component
replacement techniques, as presented
in this manual. Improper techniques or
component selection may invalidate
the approvals and the product
specifications, as indicated in table
1-2. It may also impair operations and
the intended function of the device.
Hex key
Hex key
Hex key
Hex key
Hex key
Open-end wrench
Hex key
Open-end wrench
Hex key
Removing the Module Base
To remove the module base for DVC6010, DVC6020
and DVC6030 digital valve controllers, perform the
following steps. Refer to figures 8-2, 8-3 and 8-4,
respectively, for key number locations.
Note
If the feedback arm (key 79) or
feedback arm assembly (key 84) is
removed from the digital valve
controller, the travel sensor (key 77)
must be recalibrated.
Because of the diagnostic capability of the DVC6000,
predictive maintenance is available through the use of
ValveLink software. Using the digital valve controller,
valve and instrument maintenance can be enhanced,
thus avoiding unnecessary maintenance. For
information on using the ValveLink software, refer to
the ValveLink software online help.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or equipment
damage from bursting of parts, turn
off the supply pressure to the digital
valve controller and bleed off any
excess supply pressure before
attempting to remove the module
base assembly from the housing.
1. For sliding-stem applications only, a protective
shield for the feedback linkage is attached to the side
of the module base assembly (see figures 2-1
and 2-2). Remove this shield and keep for reuse on
the replacement module. The replacement module will
not have this protective shield.
Module Base Maintenance
2. Unscrew the four captive screws in the cover
(key 43) and remove the cover from the module
base (key 2).
The digital valve controller contains a module base
consisting of the I/P converter, printed wiring board
assembly, and pneumatic relay. The module base may
be easily replaced in the field without disconnecting
field wiring or tubing.
3. Using a 6 mm hex socket wrench, loosen the
three-socket head screws (key 38). These screws
are captive in the module base by retaining rings
(key 154).
September 2013
7-3
7
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
TERMINAL BOX
Note
MODULE BASE
ASSEMBLY
The module base is linked to the
housing by two cable assemblies.
Disconnect these cable
assemblies after you pull the
module base out of the housing.
4. Pull the module base straight out of the housing
(key 1). Once clear of the housing, swing the module
base to the side of the housing to gain access to the
cable assemblies.
HOUSING
W8073
7
5. The digital valve controller has two cable
assemblies, shown in figure 7-1, which connect the
module base, via the printed wiring board assembly, to
the travel sensor and the terminal box. Disconnect
these cable assemblies from the printed wiring board
assembly on the back of the module base.
CABLE TO
TERMINAL BOX
CABLE TO
TRAVEL SENSOR
PRINTED WIRING
BOARD ASSEMBLY
Figure 7-1. Printed Wiring Board Cable Connections
Note
CAUTION
To avoid affecting performance of the
instrument, take care not to damage
the module base seal or guide surface.
Do not bump or damage the bare
connector pins on the PWB assembly.
Damaging either the module base or
guide surface may result in material
damage, which could compromise the
instruments ability to maintain a
pressure seal.
To avoid affecting performance of the
instrument, inspect the guide surface
on the module and the corresponding
seating area in the housing before
installing the module base assembly.
These surfaces must be free of dust,
dirt, scratches, and contamination.
Ensure the module base seal is in
good condition. Do not reuse a
damaged or worn seal.
1. Ensure the module base seal (key 237) is properly
installed in the housing (key 1). Ensure the O-ring
(key 12) is in place on the module base assembly.
2. Connect the terminal box connector to the PWB
assembly (key 50). Orientation of the connector is
required.
Replacing the Module Base
To replace the module base, for DVC6010, DVC6020
and DVC6030 digital valve controllers, perform the
following steps. Refer to figures 8-2, 8-3 and 8-4,
respectively, for key number locations.
7-4
3. Connect the travel sensor connector to the PWB
assembly (key 50). Orientation of the connector is
required.
4. Insert the module base (key 2) into the housing
(key 1).
September 2013
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
5. Install three socket head screws (key 38) in the
module base into the housing. If not already installed,
press three retaining rings (key 154) into the module
base. Evenly tighten the screws in a crisscross pattern
to a final torque of 16 Nm (138 lbfin).
WARNING
Personal injury, property damage, or
disruption of process control can
result if the cable assemblies/wiring
are damaged when attaching the
cover to the module base assembly.
Ensure that the cable assemblies/
wiring are position in the cavity of the
module base so they do not get
compressed or damaged when
attaching the cover to the module
base assembly in step 6.
6. Attach the cover (key 43) to the module base
assembly.
7. For sliding-stem applications only, install the
protective shield onto the side of the replacement
module base assembly (see figures 2-1 and 2-2).
O-RING LOCATED
IN I/P CONVERTER
OUTPUT PORT
SCREEN (FILTER)
LOCATED IN I/P
CONVERTER
SUPPLY PORT
W8072
Figure 7-2. I/P Filter Location
I/P Converter
Refer to figures 8-2 through 8-9 for key number
locations. The I/P converter (key 41) is located on the
front of the module base.
Note
Submodule Maintenance
The digital valve controller’s module base contains the
following submodules: I/P converter, PWB assembly,
and pneumatic relay. If problems occur, these
submodules may be removed from the module base
and replaced with new submodules. After replacing a
submodule, the module base may be put back into
service.
CAUTION
Exercise care when performing
maintenance on the module base.
Reinstall the cover to protect the I/P
converter and gauges when servicing
other submodules.
In order to maintain accuracy
specifications, do not strike or drop
the I/P converter during submodule
maintenance.
September 2013
After I/P converter submodule
replacement, calibrate the digital valve
controller to maintain accuracy
specifications.
Replacing the I/P Filter
A screen in the supply port beneath the I/P converter
serves as a secondary filter for the supply medium. To
replace this filter, perform the following procedure:
1. Remove the I/P converter (key 41) and shroud
(key 169) as described in the Removing the I/P
Converter procedure.
2. Remove the screen (key 231) from the supply port.
3. Install a new screen in the supply port as shown in
figure 7-2.
4. Inspect the O-ring (key 39) in the I/P output port. if
necessary, replace it.
5. Reinstall the I/P converter (key 41) and shroud
(key 169) as described in the Replacing the I/P
Converter procedure.
7-5
7
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
SHROUD
(KEY 169)
BACK OF PWB ASSEMBLY
SUB-MODULE
DIP SWITCH
SOCKET-HEAD
SCREWS (4)
(KEY 23)
I/P CONVERTER
(KEY 41)
UP
DOWN
BOOTS
(KEY 210)
Figure 7-3. I/P Converter
W9328
TERMINAL BOX
CONNECTOR
TRAVEL SENSOR
CONNECTOR
PINS REMOVED FOR CONNECTOR KEYING.
Removing the I/P Converter
7
1. Remove the front cover (key 43), if not already
removed.
2. Refer to figure 7-3. Using a 2.5 mm hex socket
wrench, remove the four socket-head screws (key 23)
that attach the shroud (key 169) and I/P converter
(key 41) to the module base (key 2).
3. Remove the shroud (key 169); then pull the I/P
converter (key 41) straight out of the module base
(key 2). Be careful not to damage the two electrical
leads that come out of the base of the I/P converter.
4. Ensure that the O-ring (key 39) and screen
(key 231) stay in the module base and do not come
out with the I/P converter (key 41).
Replacing the I/P Converter
1. Refer to figure 7-2. Inspect the condition of the
O-ring (key 39) and screen (key 231) in the module
base (key 2). Replace them, if necessary. Apply
silicone lubricant to the O-rings.
2. Ensure the two boots (key 210) shown in figure 7-3
are properly installed on the electrical leads.
3. Install the I/P converter (key 41) straight into the
module base (key 2), taking care that the two electrical
leads feed into the guides in the module base. These
guides route the leads to the printed wiring board
assembly submodule.
4. Install the shroud (key 169) over the I/P converter
(key 41).
5. Install the four socket-head screws (key 23) and
evenly tighten them in a crisscross pattern to a final
torque of 1.6 Nm (14 lbfin).
7-6
Figure 7-4. DIP Switch Location
6. After replacing the I/P converter, calibrate travel or
perform touch-up calibration to maintain accuracy
specifications.
PWB (Printed Wiring Board) Assembly
Refer to figures 8-2 through 8-9 for key number
locations. The PWB assembly (key 50) is located on
the back of the module base assembly (key 2).
Note
If the PWB assembly submodule is
replaced, calibrate and configure
the digital valve controller to
maintain accuracy specifications.
Removing the Printed Wiring Board
Assembly
1. Separate the module base from the housing by
performing the Removing the Module Base procedure.
2. Remove three screws (key 33).
3. Lift the PWB assembly (key 50) straight out of the
module base (key 2).
4. Ensure that the O-rings (key 40) remain in the
pressure sensor bosses on the module base assembly
(key 2) after the PWB assembly (key 50) has been
removed.
September 2013
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Table 7-2. DIP Switch Configuration(1)
Operational Mode
Multidrop Loop
Switch Position
UP
Point-to-Point Loop
DOWN
1. Refer to figure 7-4 for switch location.
RELAY SEAL
Replacing the PWB Assembly and Setting
the DIP Switch
1. Apply silicone lubricant to the pressure sensor
O-rings (key 40) and install them on the pressure
sensor bosses in the module base assembly.
2. Properly orient the PWB assembly (key 50) as you
install it into the module base. The two electrical leads
from the I/P converter (key 41) must guide into their
receptacles in the PWB assembly and the pressure
sensor bosses on the module base must fit into their
receptacles in the PWB assembly.
3. Push the PWB assembly (key 50) into its cavity in
the module base.
4. Install and tighten three screws (key 33) to a torque
of 1 Nm (10.1 lbfin).
5. Set the DIP switch on the PWB assembly
according to table 7-2.
Note
For the digital valve controller to
operate with a 4 to 20 mA control
signal, be sure the DIP switch is in the
point-to-point loop position, i.e.,
switch in down position.
6. Reassemble the module base to the housing by
performing the Replacing the Module Base procedure.
W8074
Figure 7-5. Pneumatic Relay Assembly
Note
After relay submodule replacement,
calibrate the digital valve controller
to maintain accuracy specifications.
7
Removing the Pneumatic Relay
1. Loosen the four screws that attach the relay
(key 24) to the module base. These screws are
captive in the relay.
2. Remove the relay.
Replacing the Pneumatic Relay
1. Visually inspect the holes in the module base to
ensure they are clean and free of obstructions. If
cleaning is necessary, do not enlarge the holes.
2. Apply silicone lubricant to the relay seal and
position it in the grooves on the bottom of the relay as
shown in figure 7-5. Press small seal retaining tabs
into retaining slots to hold relay seal in place.
3. Position the relay (with shroud) on the module
base. Tighten the four screws, in a crisscross pattern,
to a final torque of 2 Nm (20.7 lbfin).
4. Using the Field Communicator, verify that the value
for the parameter Relay matches the relay type
installed.
5. After replacing the relay and verifying the relay
type, calibrate travel or perform touch-up calibration to
maintain accuracy specifications
7. Setup and calibrate the digital valve controller.
Gauges, Pipe Plugs, or Tire Valves
Pneumatic Relay
Refer to figures 8-2 through 8-9 for key number
locations. The pneumatic relay (key 24) is located on
the front of the module base.
September 2013
Depending on the options ordered, the DVC6000 will
be equipped with either gauges (key 47), pipe plugs
(key 66), or tire valves (key 67). Single-acting direct
instruments will also have a screen (key 236, figure
8-6). These are located on the top of the module base
next to the relay.
7-7
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Perform the following procedure to replace the
gauges, tire valves, or pipe plugs. Refer to figures 8-5
through 8-6 for key number locations.
1. Remove the front cover (key 43).
2. Remove the gauge, pipe plug, or tire valve as
follows:
For gauges (key 47), the flats are on the gauge case.
Use a wrench on the flats of the gauge to remove the
gauge from the module base. For double-acting
instruments, to remove the supply gauge remove one
of the output gauges.
For pipe plugs (key 66) and tire valves (key 67),
use a wrench to remove these from the module base.
3. Apply sealant (key 64) to the threads of the
replacement gauges, pipe plugs, or tire valves.
4. Using a wrench, screw the gauges, pipe plugs, or
tire valves into the module base.
7
Removing the Terminal Box
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or property
damage caused by fire or explosion,
remove power to the instrument
before removing the terminal box
cover in an area which contains a
potentially explosive atmosphere or
has been classified as hazardous.
1. Loosen the set screw (key 58) in the cap (key 4) so
that the cap can be unscrewed from the terminal box.
2. After removing the cap (key 4), note the location of
field wiring connections and disconnect the field wiring
from the terminal box.
3. Separate the module base from the housing by
performing the Removing the Module Base procedure.
4. Remove the screw (key 72). Pull the terminal box
assembly straight out of the housing.
5. Remove two wire retainers (key 44), internal and
external to the terminal box.
Replacing the Terminal Box
Terminal Box
Note
WARNING
Refer to the Maintenance WARNING at
the beginning of this section.
Refer to figures 8-2 through 8-9 for key number
locations.
The terminal box is located on the housing and
contains the terminal strip assembly for field wiring
connections.
Inspect all O-rings for wear and
replace as necessary.
1. Install two wire retainers (key 44), internal and
external to the terminal box.
2. Apply silicone lubricant to the O-ring (key 35) and
install the O-ring over the stem of the terminal box.
3. Insert the terminal box assembly stem into the
housing until it bottoms out. Position the terminal box
assembly so that the hole for the screw (key 72) in the
terminal box aligns with the threaded hole in the
housing. Install the screw (key 72).
4. Connect the terminal box connector to the PWB
assembly (key 50). Orientation of the connector is
required.
Note
This procedure also applies to the
DVC6005 remote terminal box.
7-8
5. Reassemble the module base to the housing by
performing the Replacing the Module Base procedure.
6. Reconnect the field wiring as noted in step 2 in the
Removing the Terminal Box procedure.
7. Apply silicone lubricant to the O-ring (key 36) and
install the O-ring over the 2-5/8 inch threads of the
September 2013
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
terminal box. Use of a tool is recommended to prevent
cutting the O-ring while installing it over the threads.
DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller and
DVC6015 Remote Feedback Unit
8. Apply lubricant (key 63) to the 2-5/8 inch threads
on the terminal box to prevent seizing or galling when
the cap is installed.
Refer to figure 8-2 for DVC6010 and 8-7 for DVC6015
key number locations.
9. Screw the cap (key 4) onto the terminal box.
2. Disconnect the adjustment arm from the connector
arm and the feedback arm (see figures 2-1 and 2-2).
10. Install a set screw (key 58) into the cap (key 4).
Loosen the cap (not more than 1 turn) to align the set
screw over one of the recesses in the terminal box.
Tighten the set screw (key 58).
11. Apply sealant (key 64) to the conduit entrance
plug (key 62) and install it into the unused conduit
entry of the terminal box.
1. Remove piping and fittings from the instrument.
3. Remove the instrument from the actuator.
4. Loosen the screw (key 80) that secures the
feedback arm (key 79) to the travel sensor shaft.
5. Remove the feedback arm (key 79) from the travel
sensor shaft.
If disassembling a DVC6010 digital valve controller,
use step 6a. If disassembling a DVC6015 remote
feedback unit, use step 6b.
6. a. Separate the module base from the housing by
performing the Removing the Module Base procedure.
Travel Sensor
WARNING
Refer to the Maintenance WARNING at
the beginning of this section.
Replacing the travel sensor requires removing the
digital valve controller from the actuator.
WARNING
b. Disconnect the three potentiometer assembly
wires from the terminals.
7. Remove the screw (key 72) that fastens the travel
sensor assembly to the housing.
8. Pull the travel sensor assembly (key 223) straight
out of the housing.
DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller and
DVC6025 Remote Feedback Unit
Refer to figure 8-3 for DVC6020 and 8-8 for DVC6025
key number locations.
1. Remove piping and fittings from the instrument.
To avoid personal injury or property
damage caused by fire or explosion,
remove power to the instrument
before removing the potentiometer in
an area which contains a potentially
explosive atmosphere or has been
classified as hazardous.
Disassembly
Note
If the feedback arm (key 79) or
feedback arm assembly (key 84) is
removed from the digital valve
controller, the travel sensor (key 77)
must be recalibrated.
September 2013
2. Remove the digital valve controller from the
actuator.
3. Disconnect the bias spring (key 82) from the
feedback arm assembly (key 84) and the arm
assembly (key 91). Remove the mounting bracket (key
74) from the back of the digital controller. If the torsion
spring (key 93) needs to be replaced, ensure that the
shaft on which it is installed is smooth and free of
rough spots. Replace the entire feedback arm
assembly if necessary.
4. Loosen the screw (key 80) that secures the arm
assembly to the travel sensor shaft.
5. Remove the arm assembly (key 91) from the travel
sensor assembly (key 77) shaft.
If disassembling a DVC6020 digital valve controller,
use step 6a. If disassembling a DVC6025 remote
feedback unit use step 6b.
6. a. Separate the module base from the housing by
performing the Removing the Module Base procedure.
b. Disconnect the three potentiometer assembly
wires from the terminals.
7-9
7
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
7. Remove the screw (key 72) that fastens the travel
sensor assembly to the housing.
8. Pull the travel sensor assembly (key 223) straight
out of the housing.
2. a. Connect the travel sensor connector to the PWB
as described in the Replacing the Module Base
procedure.
b. Connect the three travel sensor wires to the
terminals.
DVC6030 Digital Valve Controller and
DVC6035 Remote Feedback Unit
Refer to figure 8-4 for DVC6030 and 8-9 for DVC6035
key number locations.
1. Remove piping and fittings from the instrument.
2. Remove the digital valve controller from the
actuator. Loosen the screw (key 80) that secures the
feedback arm (key 79) to the travel sensor shaft.
Remove the feedback arm from the travel sensor
shaft.
If disassembling a DVC6030 digital valve controller
use step 3a. If disassembling a DVC6035 remote
feedback unit use step 3b.
7
3. a. Separate the module base from the housing by
performing the Removing the Module Base procedure.
b. Disconnect the three potentiometer assembly
wires from the terminals.
4. From within the housing, unscrew the travel sensor
assembly (key 223) from the housing.
Assembly
Note
For the DVC6015 feedback unit,
connect the potentiometer assembly
(key 223) wires to the terminals as
follows:
red terminal 1
white terminal 2
black terminal 3
3. Loosely assemble the bias spring (key 78), screw
(key 80), plain washer (key 163), and nut (key 81) to
the feedback arm (key 79), if not already installed.
4. Attach the feedback arm (key 79) to the travel
sensor shaft.
Two methods are available for adjusting the travel
sensor. You can use a multimeter to measure the
potentiometer resistance, or if you have a Field
Communicator, you can use the procedure in the
Calibration section. To use the multimeter, perform
steps 5 through 13. To use the Field Communicator,
skip to step 14.
Travel Sensor Adjustment with a Multimeter
Note
If the feedback arm (key 79) or
feedback arm assembly (key 84) is
removed from the digital valve
controller, the travel sensor (key 77)
must be recalibrated.
DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller and
DVC6015 Remote Feedback Unit
5. Align the feedback arm (key 79) to the housing
(key 1) by inserting the alignment pin (key 46) through
the hole marked “A” on the feedback arm. Fully
engage the alignment pin into the tapped hole in the
side of the housing. Position the feedback arm so that
the surface is flush with the end of the travel sensor
shaft.
6. Connect a multimeter set to a resistance range of
50,000 ohms. Measure the resistance between pins 1
and 3 of the travel sensor connector. Refer to figure
7-6 for pin location. The resistance should be between
40,000 and 50,000 ohms.
Refer to figure 8-2 for DVC6010 and 8-7 for DVC6015
key number locations.
7. Multiply the result in step 6 by 0.046 to get a
calculated resistance. The calculated resistance
should be in the range of 1840 to 2300 ohms.
1. Insert the travel sensor assembly (key 223) into the
housing (key 1). Secure the travel sensor assembly
with screw (key 72).
8. Re-range the multimeter to a resistance of 3000
ohms between pins 2 and 3 of the travel sensor
connector. Refer to figure 7-6 for pin location.
If assembling a DVC6010 digital valve controller, use
step 2a. If assembling a DVC6015 remote feedback
unit, use step 2b.
9. Adjust the travel sensor shaft to obtain the
calculated resistance determined in step 7, $100
ohms.
7-10
September 2013
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
PIN 2
PIN 3
1
KEYED
TRAVEL SENSOR WIRES,
REMOTE MOUNT FEEDBACK UNITS
(DVC6015, DVC6025 AND DVC6035)
19B6835-B
7
3
TRAVEL SENSOR CONNECTOR
(DVC6010, DVC6020 AND DVC6030)
1
CW
A6481/IL
NOTE:
1 THE POTENTIOMETER RESISTANCE BETWEEN PINS 2 AND 3 CAN BE
MEASURED AT THE CONNECTOR. INSERT TWO SHORT LENGTHS OF
22 AWG WIRE INTO THE PIN 2 AND 3 RECEPTACLES IN THE CONNECTOR.
CLIP ON LEADS FROM A DVM (DIGITAL VOLTMETER) TO MEASURE THE
RESISTANCE.
Figure 7-6. Potentiometer Resistance Measurement
Note
In the next step, be sure the feedback
arm surface remains flush with the end
of the travel sensor shaft.
10. While observing the resistance, tighten the screw
(key 80) to secure the feedback arm to the travel
sensor shaft. Be sure the resistance reading remains
at the calculated resistance determined in step 7,
$100 ohms. Paint the screw to discourage tampering
with the connection.
11. Disconnect the multimeter from the travel sensor
connector.
September 2013
12. For the DVC6010, connect the travel sensor
connector to the PWB as described in Replacing the
Module Base.
13. Travel sensor replacement is complete. Install the
digital valve controller on the actuator.
Travel Sensor Adjustment with the Field
Communicator
The next two steps do not apply if you used a
multimeter to adjust the travel sensor. Perform these
steps only if you elected to adjust the travel sensor
using the Field Communicator.
14. For the DVC6010, connect the travel sensor
connector to the PWB as described in Replacing the
Module Base.
7-11
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
15. For both the DVC6010 and the DVC6015, perform
the appropriate Travel Sensor Adjust procedure in the
Calibration section.
BIAS SPRING
(KEY 82)
FEEDBACK
ARM
ASSEMBLY
(KEY 84)
DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller and
DVC6025 Remote Feedback Unit
Refer to figure 8-3 for DVC6020 and 8-8 for DVC6025
key number locations.
1. Insert the travel sensor assembly (key 223) into the
housing. Secure the travel sensor assembly with
screw (key 72).
If assembling a DVC6020 digital valve controller, use
step 2a. If assembling a DVC6025 remote feedback
unit, use step 2b.
2. a. Connect the travel sensor connector to the PWB
as described in Replacing the Module Base.
7
b. Connect the three travel sensor wires to the
terminals.
ARM ASSEMBLY
(KEY 91)
NOTE:
INSTALL BIAS SPRING WITH SMALLER DIAMETER HOOK
CONNECTED TO ARM ASSEMBLY (KEY 91) AND WITH BOTH HOOK
OPENINGS TOWARD CENTER OF BRACKET.
Figure 7-7. FIELDVUE DVC6020 digital Valve Controller,
Bias Spring (key 82) Installation
Travel Sensor Adjustment with a Multimeter
Note
For the DVC6025 feedback unit,
connect the potentiometer assembly
(key 223) wires to the terminals as
follows:
red terminal 1
white terminal 2
black terminal 3
3. Loosely assemble the screw (key 80), plain washer
(key 163), and nut (key 81) to the arm assembly
(key 91), if not already installed.
4. Attach the arm assembly (key 91) to the travel
sensor assembly (key 223) shaft.
Two methods are available for adjusting the travel
sensor. You can use a multimeter to measure the
potentiometer resistance, or if you have a Field
Communicator, you can use the procedure in the
Calibration section. To use the multimeter, perform
steps 5 through 17. To use the Field Communicator,
skip to step 18.
7-12
5. Connect a multimeter set to a resistance range of
50,000 ohms. Measure the resistance between pins 1
and 3 of the travel sensor connector. Refer to figure
7-6 for pin location. The resistance should be between
40,000 and 50,000 ohms.
6. Multiply the result in step 5 by 0.142 to get a
calculated resistance. The calculated resistance
should be in the range of 5680 to 7100 ohms.
7. Re-range the multimeter to a resistance of 7000
ohms between pins 2 and 3 of the travel sensor
connector. Refer to figure 7-6 for pin location.
8. Hold the arm assembly (key 91) in a fixed position
so that the arm is parallel to the housing back plane
and pointing toward the terminal box. Position the arm
assembly so that the outer surface is flush with the
end of the travel sensor shaft.
9. Adjust the travel sensor shaft to obtain the
calculated resistance determined in step 6, $100
ohms.
Note
In the next step, be sure the arm
assembly outer surface remains flush
with the end of the travel sensor shaft.
September 2013
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
10. While observing the resistance, tighten the screw
(key 80) to secure the feedback arm to the travel
sensor shaft. Be sure the resistance reading remains
at the calculated resistance determined in step 6,
$100 ohms. Paint the screw to discourage tampering
with the connection.
3. a. Connect the travel sensor connector to the PWB
as described in the Replacing the Module Base
procedure.
b. Connect the three travel sensor wires to the
terminals.
11. Disconnect the multimeter from the travel sensor
connector.
12. Apply anti-seize (key 64) to the pin portion of the
arm assembly (key 91).
13. Position the mounting bracket over the back of the
digital valve controller. Push the feedback arm
assembly (key 84) toward the housing and engage
the pin of the arm assembly into the slot in the
feedback arm.
14. Install the mounting bracket (key 74).
15. Install the bias spring (key 82) as shown in
figure 7-7.
16. For the DVC6020 only, connect the travel sensor
connector to the PWB as described in Replacing the
Module Base.
17. Travel sensor replacement is complete. Install the
digital valve controller on the actuator.
Travel Sensor Adjustment with the Field
Communicator
The next two steps do not apply if you used a
multimeter to adjust the travel sensor. Perform these
steps only if you elected to adjust the travel sensor
using the Field Communicator.
18. For the DVC6020 only, connect the travel sensor
connector to the PWB as described in Replacing the
Module Base.
19. For both the DVC6020 and the DVC6025, perform
the appropriate Travel Sensor Adjust procedure in the
Calibration section.
DVC6030 Digital Valve Controller and
DVC6035 Remote Feedback Unit
Refer to figure 8-4 for DVC6030 and 8-9 for DVC6035
key number locations.
1. Apply lubricant (key 63) to the travel sensor
assembly threads.
Note
For the DVC6035 feedback unit,
connect the potentiometer assembly
(key 223) wires to the terminals as
follows:
red terminal 1
white terminal 2
black terminal 3
4. Loosely assemble the bias spring (key 78), screw
(key 80), plain washer (key 163), and nut (key 81) to
the feedback arm (key 79), if not already installed.
5. Attach the feedback arm (key 79) to the travel
sensor shaft.
Two methods are available for adjusting the travel
sensor. You can use a multimeter to measure the
potentiometer resistance, or if you have a Field
Communicator, you can use the procedure in the
Calibration section. To use the multimeter, perform
steps 6 through 14. To use the Field Communicator,
skip to step 15.
Travel Sensor Adjustment with a Multimeter
6. Align the feedback arm (key 79) to the housing
(key 1) by inserting the alignment pin (key 46) through
the hole marked “A” on the feedback arm. Fully
engage the alignment pin into the tapped hole in the
housing. Position the feedback arm so that the outer
surface is flush with the end of the travel sensor shaft.
7. Connect a multimeter set to a resistance range of
50,000 ohms. Measure the resistance between pins 1
and 3 of the travel sensor connector. Refer to figure
7-6 for pin location. The resistance should be between
40,000 and 50,000 ohms.
8. Multiply the result in step 7 by 0.042 to get a
calculated resistance. The calculated resistance
should be in the range of 1680 to 2100 ohms.
2. Screw the travel sensor assembly (key 223) into
the housing until it is tight.
9. Re-range the multimeter to a resistance of 3000
ohms between pins 2 and 3 of the travel sensor
connector. Refer to figure 7-6 for pin location.
If assembling a DVC6030 digital valve controller, use
step 3a. If assembling a DVC6035 remote feedback
unit, use step 3b.
10. Adjust the travel sensor shaft to obtain the
calculated resistance determined in step 8, $100
ohms.
September 2013
7-13
7
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Troubleshooting
Note
In the next step, be sure the feedback
arm outer surface remains flush with
the end of the travel sensor shaft.
If communication or output difficulties are experienced
with the instrument, refer to the troubleshooting chart
in table 7-3. Also see the DVC6000 Troubleshooting
Checklist on page 7-18.
Checking Voltage Available
11. While observing the resistance, tighten the screw
(key 80) to secure the feedback arm to the travel
sensor shaft. Be sure the resistance reading remains
at the calculated resistance determined in step 8,
$100 ohms. Paint the screw to discourage tampering
with the connection.
12. Disconnect the multimeter from the travel sensor
connector.
13. For the DVC6030 only, connect the travel sensor
connector to the PWB as described in Replacing the
Module Base.
7
14. Travel sensor replacement is complete. Install the
digital valve controller on the actuator as described in
the Installation section.
Travel Sensor Adjustment with the Field
Communicator
The next two steps do not apply if you used a
multimeter to adjust the travel sensor. Perform these
steps only if you elected to adjust the travel sensor
using the Field Communicator.
15. For the DVC6030 only, connect the travel sensor
connector to the PWB as described in Replacing the
Module Base.
16. For both the DVC6030 and the DVC6035, perform
the appropriate Travel Sensor Adjust procedure in the
Calibration section.
7-14
WARNING
Personal injury or property damage
caused by fire or explosion may occur
if this test is attempted in an area
which contains a potentially explosive
atmosphere or has been classified as
hazardous.
To check the Voltage Available at the instrument,
perform the following:
1. Connect the equipment in figure 2-26 to the field
wiring in place of the FIELDVUE instrument.
2. Set the control system to provide maximum output
current.
3. Set the resistance of the 1 kilohm potentiometer
shown in figure 2-26 to zero.
4. Record the current shown on the milliammeter.
5. Adjust the resistance of the 1 kilohm potentiometer
until the voltage read on the voltmeter is 11.0 volts.
6. Record the current shown on the milliammeter.
7. If the current recorded in step 6 is the same as that
recorded in step 4 (± 0.08 mA), the voltage available is
adequate.
8. If the voltage available is inadequate, refer to
Wiring Practices in the Installation section.
September 2013
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
0.020
LOOP + / TEST +
MULTIMETER
(SEE NOTES
BELOW)
TEST −
LOOP + / TEST +
LOOP −
−
+
4−20mA
CURRENT
SOURCE
TEST −
LOOP + / TEST +
DCS SYSTEM (OR OTHER
CURRENT SOURCE)
DVC6000 DIGITAL VALVE
CONTROLLER TERMINAL BOX
7
NOTES:
1. MULTIMETER MEASURING 0.000 TO 1.0000 VDC
2. TYPICAL READINGS 0.004 VDC TO 0.020 VDC
3. OHM’S LAW—V = I x R, WHERE R = PRECISION 1 OHM RESISTOR, V = I x 1, SO V= I
Figure 7-8. Check the Loop Current using the TEST Terminals
Checking the Loop Current Without
Disturbing the Loop Wiring
WARNING
Personal injury or property damage
caused by fire or explosion may occur
if this test is attempted in an area
which contains a potentially explosive
atmosphere or has been classified as
hazardous.
September 2013
To check the loop current without disturbing the loop
wiring perform the following procedure.
1. With the FIELDVUE instrument connected to a
current source connect a digital multimeter reading
Volts DC ( 0 to 1 VDC or mV scale) to the TEST
terminals as shown in figure 7-8.
2. The reading at the test terminals is proportional to
the loop current [0.004 V = 0.004 A (4 MA)] mA of
loop current). Refer to Specifications, table 1-2, to
determine if the current is sufficient.
7-15
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Table 7-3. Instrument Troubleshooting
Symptom
1. Analog input reading at
instrument does not match
actual current provided.
Possible Cause
1a. Check the control mode using the Field Communicator. If
in the Digital or Test mode, the instrument receives its set
point as a digital signal. Control is not based on input current.
Change Control Mode to Analog.
1b. Low control system compliance voltage.
1b. Check system compliance voltage (see Wiring Practices
in the Installation section.
1c. Instrument shutdown due to self test failure.
1c. Check instrument status using the Field Communicator
(see Viewing Instrument Status in the Viewing Device
Information section).
1d. Calibrate the analog input sensor (see Analog Input
Calibration in the Calibration section).
1d. Analog input sensor not calibrated.
1e. Current leakage.
2. Instrument will not
communicate.
2a. Insufficient Voltage Available.
2b. Controller output Impedance too low.
2c. Cable capacitance too high.
7
2d. Check filter adjustment (see the appropriate HART filter
instruction manual).
2e. Improper field wiring.
2e. Check polarity of wiring and integrity of connections. Make
sure cable shield is grounded only at the control system.
2f. Controller output providing less than 4 mA to loop.
2f. Check control system minimum output setting, which
should not be less than 3.8 mA.
2g. Disconnected loop wiring cable at PWB.
2g. Verify connectors are plugged in correctly.
2h. PWB DIP switch not set properly.
2h. Check for incorrect setting or broken DIP switch on the
back of the PWB. Reset switch or replace PWB, if switch is
broken. See table 7-2 for switch setting information
2j. Use a 4−20 mA current source to apply power to the
instrument. Terminal voltage across the LOOP+ and LOOP−
terminals should be 9 to 10.5 VDC. If the terminal voltage is
not 9 to 10.5 VDC, replace the PWB.
2k. Polling address incorrect.
2k. Use the Field Communicator to set the polling address
(refer to the Detailed Setup section). From the Utility menu,
select Configure Communicator and Polling. Select Always
Poll. Set the instrument polling address to 0.
2l. Defective terminal box.
2l. Check continuity from each screw terminal to the
corresponding PWB connector pin. If necessary, replace the
terminal box assembly.
2m. If necessary, repair or replace cable.
2m. Defective Field Communicator or ValveLink
modem cable.
7-16
1e. Excessive moisture in the terminal box can cause current
leakage. Typically the current will vary randomly if this is the
case. Allow the inside of the terminal box to dry, then retest.
2a. Calculate Voltage Available (see Wiring Practices in the
Installation section). Voltage Available should be greater than
or equal to 11 VDC.
2b. Install a HART filter after reviewing Control System
Compliance Voltage requirements (see Wiring Practices in the
Installation section).
2c. Review maximum cable capacitance limits (see Wiring
Practices in the Installation section).
2d. HART filter improperly adjusted.
2j. PWB failure.
3. Instrument will not
calibrate, has sluggish
performance or oscillates.
Action
1a. Control mode not Analog.
2n. ValveLink modem defective or not compatible
with PC.
2n. Replace ValveLink modem.
2p. ValveLink hardlock defective or not programmed.
2p. Replace if defective or return to factory for programming.
3a. Travel sensor seized, will not turn.
3a. Rotate feedback arm to ensure it moves freely. If not,
replace the pot/bushing assy.
3b. Broken travel sensor wire(s).
3b. Inspect wires for broken solder joint at pot or broken wire.
Replace pot/bushing assy.
3c. Travel sensor misadjusted.
3c. Perform Travel Sensor Adjust procedure in the Calibration
section.
3d. Open travel sensor.
3d. Check for continuity in electrical travel range. If necessary,
replace pot/bushing assy.
3e. Cables not plugged into PWB correctly.
3e. Inspect connections and correct.
3f. Feedback arm loose on pot.
3f. Perform Travel Sensor Adjust procedure in the Calibration
section.
3g. Feedback arm bent/damaged or bias spring
missing/damaged.
3g. Replace feedback arm and bias spring.
September 2013
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Table 7-3. Instrument Troubleshooting (Continued)
Symptom
3. Instrument will not
calibrate, has sluggish
performance or oscillates.
Possible Cause
3h. Configuration errors.
Action
3h. Verify configuration:
If necessary, set protection to None.
If Out of Service, place In Service.
Check:
Travel Sensor Motion
Tuning set
Zero control signal
Feedback Connection
Control mode (should be Analog)
Restart control mode (should be Analog)
3j. Restricted pneumatic passages in I/P converter.
3j. Check screen in I/P converter supply port of the module
base. Replace if necessary. If passages in I/P converter
restricted, replace I/P converter.
3k. O-ring(s) between I/P converter ass’y missing or hard 3k. Replace O-ring(s).
and flattened losing seal.
3l. I/P converter ass’y damaged/corroded/clogged.
3l. Check for bent flapper, open coil (continuity),
contamination, staining, or dirty air supply. Coil resistance
should be between 1680 - 1860 ohms. Replace I/P assy if
damaged, corroded, clogged, or open coil.
3m. I/P converter ass’y out of spec.
3m. I/P converter ass’y nozzle may have been adjusted. Verify
drive signal (55 to 80% for double-acting; 60 to 85% for
single-acting) with the valve off the stops. Replace I/P
converter ass’y if drive signal is continuously high or low.
3n. Defective module base seal.
3n. Check module base seal for condition and position. If
necessary, replace seal.
3p. Defective relay.
3p. Depress relay beam at adjustment location in shroud, look
for increase in output pressure. Remove relay, inspect relay
seal. Replace relay seal or relay if I/P converter ass’y good
and air passages not blocked. Check relay adjustment.
3q. Defective 67CFR regulator, supply pressure gauge
jumps around.
3q. Replace 67CFR regulator.
4. ValveLink diagnostic tests 4a. Bent or defective pressure sensor.
provide erroneous results.
4b. Pressure sensor O-ring missing.
4a. Replace PWB.
5. Field Communicator does 5a. Battery pack not charged.
not turn on.
5a. Charge battery pack.
Note: Battery pack can be charged while attached to the Field
communicator or separately. The Field Communicator is fully
operable while the battery pack is charging. Do not attempt to
charge the battery pack in a hazardous area.
September 2013
4b. Replace O-ring.
7-17
7
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
DVC6000 Troubleshooting Checklist
1. Instrument serial number as read from nameplate ________________________________________________
2. Is the digital valve controller responding to the control signal? Yes _________ No _________
If not, describe ___________________________________________________________________________
3. Measure the voltage across the “Loop −” and Loop +” terminal box screws when the commanded current is
4.0 mA and 20.0 mA: __________V @ 4.0 mA __________V @ 20.0 mA.
(For a DVC6000 pwb built prior to 2003, these values should be around 9.4 V @ 4.0 mA. For a DVC6000 pwb
built after 2003, these values should be around 9.6 V @ 4.0 mA and 10.3 V @ 20 mA.
4. Is it possible to communicate via HART to the digital valve controller? Yes _________ No _________
5. What is the Diagnostic Tier of the digital valve controller? AC ____ HC ____ AD ____ PD ____ ODV____
6. What is the firmware version of the digital valve controller? ______________
7. What is the hardware version of the digital valve controller? ______________
8. Is the digital valve controller’s Instrument Mode “In Service”? Yes _________ No _________
9. Is the digital valve controller’s Control Mode set to “Analog”?
Yes _________ No _________
10. Is it on Travel or Pressure control?
7
11. What are the following parameter readings?
Input Signal _________
Drive Signal _________%
Supply Pressure _________ Pressure A _________
Pressure B _________
Travel Target _________% Travel _________%
12. What are the following alert readings?
Fail alerts _______________________________________________________________________________
Valve alerts _____________________________________________________________________________
Operational status ________________________________________________________________________
Alert event record entries __________________________________________________________________
13. Export ValveLink data (if available) for the device (Status Monitor, Detailed Setup, etc.).
Mounting
1. Which DVC6000 do you have?
DVC6010 ____ DVC6020 ____ DVC6030 ____ Remote Mount? ____
2. What Make, Brand, Style, Size, etc. actuator is the DVC6000 mounted on? ________________________
3. What is the full travel of the valve? ____________________________________________________________
4. What is the Mounting Kit part number? _________________________________________________________
5. If mounting kits are made by LBP/Customer, please provide pictures of installation.
6. Is the Mounting kit installed per the instructions? Yes _________ No _________
7. What is the safe position of the valve? Fail closed _________ Fail open _________
8. For a DVC6010 or DVC6030: During full travel of the actuator, does the DVC6000 feedback arm move below
the “A” or above the “B” alignment positions? (It should not) Yes _________ No _________
7-18
September 2013
Parts
8-8
Section 8 Replaceable Parts
Parts Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2
Parts Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2
Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3
Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3
Common Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3
Module Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4
I/P Converter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4
Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4
Terminal Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4
Feedback Connections Terminal Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4
PWB Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5
Pressure Gauges, Pipe Plugs, or Tire Valve Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5
Feedback / Remote Travel Sensor Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5
HART Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-6
September 2013
8
8-1
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Key
Parts Ordering
Whenever corresponding with your Emerson Process
Management sales office about this equipment,
always mention the controller serial number. When
ordering replacement parts, refer to the 11−character
part number of each required part as found in the
following parts list. Parts which do not show part
numbers are not orderable.
WARNING
8
Conversion Kit (to convert a DVC6020 to DVC6010 or
a DVC6025 to DVC6015)
14B5072X112
5
Feedback Arm Kit (contains feedback arm assembly, qty. 5,
to convert a 2052 size 2 and 3 DVC6020 to a
2051 size 1 DVC6020)
GE44419X012
6
Alignment Pin Kit
[kit contains 15 alignment pins (key 46)]
8*
9
Pipe-Away Bracket Kit (DVC6020) [kit contains
mounting bracket (key 74) and O−ring (key 75)]
Standard
Extreme Temperature option
(fluorosilicone elastomers)
Seal Screen Kit
[kit contains 25 seal screens (key 231)
and 25 O−rings (key 39)]
Standard and Extreme Temperature option
(fluorosilicone elastomers)
10*
Terminal Box Kit, aluminum
Standard
Standard, Natural Gas approved
Parts Kits
Description
Part Number
Elastomer Spare Parts Kit (kit contains parts to
service one digital valve controller)
Standard
Extreme Temperature option
(fluorosilicone elastomers)
19B5402X012
11
Small Hardware Spare Parts Kit (kit contains parts
to service one digital valve controller)
19B5403X012
3
Conversion Kit (To convert a DVC6010 to DVC6020 or
a DVC6015 to DVC6025)
Also see note below
19B5405X012
Note
When converting a DVC6010 to a DVC6020 for
pipe−away construction, also order pipe−away bracket
kit, item 7.
Adjustment Arm Kit
(includes washer, nut and adjustment arm)
19B5404X022
19B5401X012
19B5401X072
19B5401X022
19B5401X082
19B5401X092
19B5401X112
38B6041X152
38B6041X132
14B5072X132
12*
PTFE Sleeve Kit
[For pot bushing assembly (kit includes 10 sleeves and
Lubricant)]
DVC6010 and DVC6020
GE08726X012
DVC6030
GE08727X012
13*
Spare Module Base Assembly Kit
[kit contains module base (key 2); drive screws, qty. 2,
(key 11); shield/label (key 19); hex socket cap screw, qty. 3,
(key 38); self tapping screw, qty. 2 (key 49); pipe plug, qty. 3
(key 61); retaining ring, qty. 3 (key 154); screen (key 236);
and flame arrestors, qty. 3 (key 243)]
Aluminum
GE18654X012
Stainless Steel
GE18654X022
19B5402X022
2*
I/P Converter Kit
Standard
For Extreme Temperature option
(fluorosilicone elastomers)
19B5404X012
14B5072X182
Stainless Steel, Natural Gas Approved
Stainless Steel, Extreme Temperature option
(fluorosilicone elastomers), Natural Gas
approved
All part numbers are for both
aluminum and stainless steel
constructions, unless otherwise
indicated.
1*
14B5072X092
Extreme Temperature option (fluorosilicone
elastomers)
Extreme Temperature option (fluorosilicone
elastomers) Natural Gas Approved
Note
Kit
Part Number
4
7
Use only genuine Fisher replacement
parts. Components that are not
supplied by Emerson Process
Management should not, under any
circumstances, be used in any Fisher
instrument. Use of components not
supplied by Emerson Process
Management may void your warranty,
might adversely affect the
performance of the instrument, and
could cause personal injury and
property damage.
Description
*Recommended spare
8-2
September 2013
Parts
Kit
14*
15
16*
17
Description
Part Number
Spare Housing Assembly Kit,
[kit contains housing (key 1); drive screw, qty. 2 (key 11);
shield (key 20); and screen (key 271)]
Aluminum
DVC6010/DVC6020
GE18652X012
DVC6030
GE18653X012
Stainless Steel
DVC6010/DVC6020
GE18652X022
DVC6030
GE18653X022
DVC6020 Cam Adjustment Tool
Spare Shroud Kit
Travel Sensor with Feedback Arm Assembly
and PTFE Sleeve Kit
DVC6010
DVC6015
DVC6020
DVC6025
GE12742X012
GE29183X012
Kit
25
Description
Part Number
Kit, Spring
DVC6010 0.25 to 2 inch travel [kit contains 10 bias
springs w/tungsten carbon coating]
GE37413X012
DVC6010 2 to 4 inch travel, [kit contains 10 bias
springs w/tungsten carbon coating]
GE37414X012
Parts List
Parts which do not show part numbers are not
orderable as individual parts. In most cases, they are
available in one of the parts kits listed under Parts
Kits.
GG09947X012
GG09948X012
GG09949X012
GG09950X012
Note
Remote Mount Kits
18
19
20
Remote Terminal Box Kit
Standard
Feedback Unit
DVC6015
DVC6025 long arm
DVC6025 Short Arm
DVC6035
DVC6035 (for GX actuator)
49B7986X012
49B7987X012
49B7987X022
49B7988X012
49B7988X022
DVC6010 to DVC6005/DVC6015
DVC6010 to DVC6005/DVC6035
DVC6020 to DVC6005/DVC6025 (short arm
DVC6020 to DVC6005/DVC6025 (long arm)
Feedback Unit Termination Strip Kit
Pipestand/Wall Mounting Kit
DVC6015RMTR
DVC6035RMTR
DVC6025RMSA
DVC6025RMLA
GE00419X012
GE00420X012
Severe Service Linkage Kits
Note
All metallic parts (except coil springs) in the corrosion
kit and parts that experience rubbing or wear in the
wear kit are coated with a proprietary tungsten carbon
coating.
24
Description
8
Housing
This kit converts an existing DVC6000 in the remote
mounted version. Note that the DVC6030 cannot be
converted to the DVC6035.
23
Key
Remote Mount Retrofit Kit
Note
21
22
Parts with footnote numbers shown
are available in parts kits. Also see
footnote information at the bottom of
the page.
GE00418X012
Corrosion Kit
DVC6010 0.25 to 2 Inch travel
DVC6010 2 to 4 Inch travel
DVC6020 short arm
DVC6020 long arm
DVC6030 rotary
DVC6030 linear
Wear Kit
DVC6010 0.25 to 2 Inch travel
DVC6010 2 to 4 Inch travel
DVC6020 short arm
DVC6020 long arm
DVC6030 rotary
DVC6030 linear
September 2013
GE22667X012
GE22668X012
GE22670X012
GE22671X012
GE22672X012
GE22673X012
GE22674X012
GE22675X012
GE22676X012
GE22677X012
GE22678X012
GE22679X012
DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6005
(see figures 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, and 8-5)
1
11
20
52
74
75*
245
248
249
250
267
271
Housing(14)
Drive Screw(14) (2 req’d)
Shield(14)
Vent, plastic(2) DVC6010, DVC6030, and DVC6005 only
Mounting Bracket
DVC6020 Std(3) or pipe−away(7), and DVC6005(22)
O−Ring(7), DVC6020 only
Pipe Plug, pl stl(7), DVC6020 Vent−away only
Screw, hex head(22) (4 req’d), (DVC6005 only)
Screw, hex head(22) (4 req’d), (DVC6005 only)
Spacer(22) (4 req’d), (DVC6005 only)
Standoff(22) (2 req’d), ( (DVC6005 only)
Screen(14)
Common Parts
DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6005
(see figures 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, and 8-5)
16*
29
33
38
O−ring(1) (3 req’d)
Warning label, for use only with LCIE hazardous area
classifications
Mach Screw, pan hd, SST(2) (3 req’d)
Cap Screw, hex socket, SST(2,13) (3 req’d)
*Recommended spare
1. Available in the Elastomer Spare Parts Kit
2. Available in the Small Hardware Spare Parts Kit
3. Available in the DVC6010 to DVC6020 Conversion Kit
7. Available in the Pipe−Away Bracket Kit
13. Available in the Spare Module Base Assembly Kit
14. Available in the Spare Housing Assembly Kit
22. Available in the Pipestand/Wall Mounting Kit
8-3
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Key
43*
48
49
63
64
65
154
237
Description
Part Number
Cover Assembly (includes cover screws)
Standard
38B9580X022
Extreme temperature option (fluorosilicone elastomers)
Aluminum Construction
38B9580X032
Stainless Steel Construction
38B9580X042
Nameplate
Screw, self tapping (2 req’d)(13)
Lithium grease (not furnished with the instrument)
Anti−seize compound (not furnished with the instrument)
Lubricant, silicone sealant (not furnished with the instrument)
Retaining Ring(2) (3 req’d)
Module Base Seal(1)
GAS−BLOCKING
PRESS−FIT ADAPTOR
Module Base
WIRING CONNECTOR
DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6005
(see figures 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, 8-5, and 8-6)
2
11
12
19
61
236
243
Module Base(13)
Drive Screw(13) (2 req’d)
O−ring(1)
Label, Shield Assembly(13)
Pipe Plug, hex socket(13) (3 req’d)
Screen, for single−acting direct units only(13)
Flame Arrestor Assy(13) (3 req’d)
W9528
Figure 8-1. Terminal Box of Natural Gas Certified
FIELDVUE DVC6000 Digital Valve Controller
Key
8
Description
Part Number
I/P Converter Assembly
Terminal Box
DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6005
(see figures 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, and 8-5)
DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6005
(see figures 8-1, 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, and 8-5)
23
39*
41
169
210*
231*
Cap Screw, hex socket, SST(2,16) (4 req’d)
O−ring (1,10)
I/P Converter(10)
Shroud(10,16)
Boot, nitrile(1,10) (2 req’d) (also see figure 7-3)
Seal Screen(1,8,10)
4
34*
36*
44
58
72
164
Terminal Box Cap(18)
O−ring(1,9,18)
O−ring(1,9,18)
Wire Retainer, pl stl(2) (6 req’d) (not shown)
Set Screw, hex socket, SST(2,18)
Cap Screw, hex socket, SST(2,18)
Terminal Box Assembly(9)
Relay
Feedback Connections Terminal Box
DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6005
(see figures 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, and 8-5)
DVC6005 (see figure 8-5)
24*
8-4
Relay Assembly, (includes shroud, relay seal, mounting screws)
Standard
Single−acting direct (relay C)
38B5786X132
Double−acting (relay A)
38B5786X052
Single−acting reverse (relay B)
38B5786X092
Low Bleed
Single−acting direct (relay C)
38B5786X152
Double−acting (relay A)
38B5786X072
Single−acting reverse (relay B)
38B5786X112
Extreme Temperature option (fluorosilicone elastomers)
Standard Bleed
Single−acting direct (relay C)
38B5786X142
Double−acting (relay A)
38B5786X032
Single−acting reverse (relay B)
38B5786X102
Low Bleed
Single−acting direct (relay C)
38B5786X162
Double−acting (relay A)
38B5786X082
Single−acting reverse (relay B)
38B5786X122
4
34*
36*
44
58
62
72
262
263*
264
Terminal Box Cap(18)
O−ring(1,9,18)
O−ring(1,9,18)
Wire Retainer, pl stl(2,19) (5 req’d) (not shown)
Set Screw, hex socket, SST(2,18)
Pipe Plug, hex hd, SST(18)
Cap Screw, hex socket, SST(2,18) (3 req’d)
Adapter(18)
O−ring(18)
Standard
Extreme temperature option, (fluorosilicone)
Terminal Box Assembly, remote(18)
1F463606992
1F4636X0092
*Recommended spare
1. Available in the Elastomer Spare Parts Kit
2. Available in the Small Hardware Spare Parts Kit
8. Available in the Seal Screen Kit
9. Available in the Terminal Box Kit
10. Available in the I/P Converter Kit
13. Available in the Spare Module Base Assembly Kit
16. Available in the Spare Shroud Kit
18. Available in the Remote Terminal Box Kit
19. Available in Feedback Unit Kit
September 2013
Parts
Key
Description
Part Number
PWB Assembly
DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6005
(see figures 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, and 8-5)
Key
79
80
81
104
Note
Contact your Emerson Process Management sales
office for PWB Assembly FS numbers.
50*
PWB Assembly
Standard
For instrument level AC
For instrument level HC
For instrument level AD
For instrument level PD
For instrument level ODV
Extreme Temperature option (fluorosilicone elastomers)
For instrument level AC
For instrument level HC
For instrument level AD
For instrument level PD
For instrument level ODV
Pressure Gauges, Pipe Plugs, or Tire
Valve Assemblies (see figure 8-6)
47*
66
67
Pressure Gauge, nickel−plated brass case, brass connection
Double−acting (3 req’d); Single−acting (2 req’d)
PSI/MPA Gauge Scale
To 60 PSI, 0.4 MPa
18B7713X042
To 160 PSI, 1.1 MPa
18B7713X022
PSI/bar Gauge Scale
To 60 PSI, 4 bar
18B7713X032
To 160 PSI, 11 bar
18B7713X012
PSI/KG/CM2 Gauge Scale
To 60 PSI, 4 KG/CM2
18B7713X072
To 160 PSI, 11 KG/CM2
18B7713X082
Pipe Plug, hex hd
For double−acting and single acting direct w/gauges
(none req’d)
For Single−acting reverse w/gauges (1 req’d)
For all units w/o gauges (3 req’d)
Tire Valve Assembly (3 req’d)
Stainless Steel Construction
DVC6010 (oversized) (4 req’d)
Not for mounting on 1250 and 1250R actuators.
Feedback / Remote Travel Sensor Parts
Common Feedback Parts
DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6015, DVC6025,
and DVC6035 (see figures 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, 8-7, 8-8,
and 8-9)
46
64
65
72
78
Alignment Pin(6,19)
for DVC6010, DVC6030, DVC6015 and DVC6035
Anti−seize compound (not furnished with the instrument)
Lubricant, silicone sealant (not furnished with the instrument)
Cap Screw, hex socket(2,19) (2 req’d)
for DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6015, and DVC6025
Bias Spring, SST(2,19)
for DVC6010, DVC6030, DVC6015 and DVC6035
Description
Part Number
Feedback Arm
for DVC6010, DVC6015, DVC6030 and DVC6035
Cap Screw, hex socket, SST(2,19)
Square Nut, SST(2,19)
Cap Screw, hex hd(19) (4 req’d)
Aluminum Construction
DVC6010 and DVC6015
Not for mounting on 1250 and 1250R actuators.
Mounting parts for 1250 and 1250R actuators are
included in the mounting kit for these actuators.
Mounting Bracket(4,19), DVC6010 and DVC6015 only
Not for mounting on 1250 and 1250R actuators.
Mounting parts for 1250 and 1250R actuators are
included in the mounting kit for these actuators.
− − − Feedback Linkage Shield, see figures 2-1 and 2-2
Up to 50.4 mm (2 inch) travel
All sliding−stem actuators except 585C size 60 39B2268X012
50.4 mm (2 inch) to 104mm (4 inch) travel
All sliding−stem actuators except 585C size 60 49B2267X012
585C size 60, 19 mm (0.75 inch) to
104 mm (4 inch) travel
49B3844X012
163
Plain Washer, SST(2,19)
223* Potentiometer/Bushing Assy
Standard Elastomers
DVC6010, DVC6020
GE31447X012
DVC6030
GE31448X012
Extreme Temperature option
(fluorosilicone elastomers)
DVC6010 and DVC6020
GE31450X012
DVC6030
GE31451X012
DVC6015 and DVC6025(19)
GE31453X012
GE31454X012
DVC6035(19)
107
DVC6020 and DVC6025
(see figures 8-3 and 8-8)
74
82
83
84
85
86
87
Mounting Bracket, DVC6025 only
(also in Housing parts for DVC6020)
Bias Spring, SST(3)
Bearing Flange, PTFE−based(3) (2 req’d)
Feedback Arm Assy, SST(3)
E−ring, pl stl(3) (2 req’d)
Plain Washer, pl stl(3) (2 req’d)
Follower Post, SST(3)
88
89
90
91
92
93
Roller, SST/PTFE(3)
Spring Lock Washer, pl stl(3)
Hex Nut, pl stl(3)
Arm Assy, SST
Cap Screw, hex socket(3) (4 req’d)
Torsion Spring, Feedback Arm(3)
DVC6015, DVC6025, and DVC6035
(see figures 8-7, 8-8, and 8-9)
23
44
49
58
62
Cap Screw, hex socket(19,21) (2 req’d)
Wire Retainer, pl stl(19,21) (9 req’d)
Screw, self tapping (2 req’d)
Set Screw, hex socket(19)
Pipe Plug, hex hd, SST(19)
*Recommended spare
2. Available in the Small Hardware Spare Parts Kit
3. Available in the DVC6010 to DVC6020 Conversion Kit
4.
6.
19.
21.
September 2013
Available in the DVC6020 to DVC6010 Conversion Kit
Available in Alignment Pin Kit
Available in Feedback Unit Kit
Available in Feedback Unit Termination Strip Kit
8-5
8
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
11
A
20
11
19
OUTPUT A
A
SECTION A-A
243
64
8
SECTION C-C
E
61
OUTPUT B
49
E
271
SUPPLY
1
SECTION E-E
SECTION D-D
APPLY LUB, SEALANT
NOTES:
SEE FIGURE 8-6 FOR GAUGE CONFIGURATIONS
1
2. APPLY LUBRICANT KEY 65 TO ALL O−RINGS UNLESS OTHERWISE
SPECIFIED
48B7710−K SHT 1 & 2 / DOC
Figure 8-2. FIELDVUE DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller Assembly
Key
131
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
260
Description
Part Number
Retainer Wire
Feedback housing(19)
Assembly Plate Shield(19) (DVC6015 only)
Terminal bracket(19,21)
Terminal Strip(19,21)
Terminal Cap(19)
O−ring, fluorosilicone(19)
Machine Screw, pan head(19) (2 req’d) (DVC6015 only)
Label, cover(19)
Hex Nut, SST (2 req’d)
Key
261
Description
Nameplate
265
Plug(19) (DVC6015 and DVC6035 only)
Part Number
HART Filters
HF340, DIN rail mount
HF341, DIN rail Mount, pass through (no filter)
39B5411X022
39B5412X012
*Recommended spare
19. Available in Feedback Unit Kit
21. Available in Feedback Unit Termination Strip Kit
8-6
September 2013
Parts
A
B
B
H
C
C
E
D
D
E
H
A
SECTION A-A
8
SECTION H-H
SECTION B-B
SECTION C-C
SECTION D-D
SECTION E-E
APPLY LUB, SEALANT
1. APPLY LUBRICANT KEY 65 TO ALL O−RINGS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
48B9596−K/IL SHT 1 & 2 / DOC
Figure 8-3. FIELDVUE DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller Assembly
September 2013
8-7
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
1
61
64
APPLY LUB, SEALANT
NOTES:
1
SEE FIGURE 8-6 FOR GAUGE CONFIGURATIONS
2. APPLY LUBRICANT KEY 65 TO ALL O-RINGS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
48B9596-K SHT 3 / DOC
Figure 8-3. FIELDVUE DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller Assembly (continued)
8
8-8
September 2013
Parts
11
243
20
SECTION B-B
19
11
OUTPUT A
271
SUPPLY
64
B
B
D
61
A
49
D
OUTPUT B
8
SECTION A-A
A
1
C
C
SECTION C-C
SECTION D-D
APPLY LUB, SEALANT, THREAD LOCK
NOTES:
SEE FIGURE 8-6 FOR GAUGE CONFIGURATIONS
1
2. APPLY LUBRICANT KEY 65 TO ALL O−RINGS UNLESS OTHERWISE
SPECIFIED
48B9597−K SHT 1 & 2 / DOC
Figure 8-4. FIELDVUE DVC6030 Digital Valve Controller Assembly
September 2013
8-9
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
8
SECTION A-A
SECTION C-C
SECTION B-B
APPLY LUB, SEALANT
NOTES:
1. APPLY LUBRICANT KEY 65 TO ALL O−RINGS UNLESS OTHERWISE
SPECIFIED
49B3261−C SHT 1 & 2
Figure 8-5. FIELDVUE DVC6005 Base Unit
8-10
September 2013
Parts
1
E
E
SECTION E-E
OUTPUT A
8
OUTPUT A
OUTPUT B
OUTPUT B
SUPPLY
SUPPLY
WALL MOUNTING
PIPESTAND MOUNTING
APPLY LUB, SEALANT
NOTES:
SEE FIGURE 8-6 FOR GAUGE CONFIGURATIONS
1
2. APPLY LUBRICANT KEY 65 TO ALL O−RINGS UNLESS OTHERWISE
SPECIFIED
49B3261−C SHT 2 & 3 / DOC
Figure 8-5. FIELDVUE DVC6005 Base Unit (continued)
September 2013
8-11
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
2
1
DOUBLE−ACTING
SINGLE−ACTING DIRECT
SINGLE−ACTING REVERSE
APPLY LUB, SEALANT
NOTE:
1 FOR SINGLE−ACTING DIRECT, OUTPUT B IS PLUGGED.
2 FOR SINGLE−ACTING REVERSE, OUTPUT A IS PLUGGED.
48B7710−K SHT 2 / DOC
Figure 8-6. Typical FIELDVUE DVC6000 Digital Valve Controller Gauge Configuration
8
SECTION C-C
SECTION B-B
SECTION A-A
APPLY LUB, SEALANT
NOTE:
1. APPLY LUBRICANT KEY 65 TO ALL O−RINGS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
SECTION D-D
49B7986−A
Figure 8-7. FIELDVUE DVC6015 Digital Valve Controller Assembly
8-12
September 2013
Parts
SECTION B-B
8
SECTION A-A
APPLY LUB, SEALANT, THREAD LOCK
NOTE:
1. APPLY LUBRICANT KEY 65 TO ALL O−RINGS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
49B7987−A/IL
Figure 8-8. FIELDVUE DVC6025 Digital Valve Controller Assembly
September 2013
8-13
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
SECTION C-C
SECTION B-B
8
APPLY LUB, SEALANT, THREAD LOCK
NOTE:
1. APPLY LUBRICANT KEY 65 TO ALL O−RINGS
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
SECTION A-A
49B7988−A
Figure 8-9. FIELDVUE DVC6035 Digital Valve Controller Assembly
8-14
September 2013
Principle of Operation
A-A-
Appendix A
Principle of Operation
HART Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-2
DVC6000 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-2
A
September 2013
A-1
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
+0.5 V
CONTROL SYSTEM
0
ANALOG
SIGNAL
−0.5V
HART
MODEM
1200 Hz
“1”
2200 Hz
“0”
AVERAGE CURRENT CHANGE DURING COMMUNICATION = 0
A6174/IL
Figure A-1. HART Frequency Shift Keying Technique
FIELD
TERM.
HART Communication
The HART (Highway Addressable Remote
Transducer) protocol gives field devices the capability
of communicating instrument and process data
digitally. This digital communication occurs over the
same two-wire loop that provides the 4-20 mA process
control signal, without disrupting the process signal. In
this way, the analog process signal, with its faster
update rate, can be used for control. At the same time,
the HART protocol allows access to digital diagnostic,
maintenance, and additional process data. The
protocol provides total system integration via a host
device.
A
The HART protocol uses frequency shift keying (FSK).
Two individual frequencies of 1200 and 2200 Hz are
superimposed over the 4-20 mA current signal. These
frequencies represent the digits 1 and 0 (see figure
A-1). By superimposing a frequency signal over the
4–20 mA current, digital communication is attained.
The average value of the HART signal is zero,
therefore no dc value is added to the 4-20 mA signal.
Thus, true simultaneous communication is achieved
without interrupting the process signal.
The HART protocol allows the capability of
multidropping, i.e., networking several devices to a
single communications line. This process is well suited
for monitoring remote applications such as pipelines,
custody transfer sites, and tank farms. See table 7-2
for instructions on changing the printed wiring board
DIP switch configuration to multidrop.
DVC6000 Operation
The DVC6000 digital valve controller housing contains
the travel sensor, terminal box, pneumatic input and
output connections and a module base that may be
easily replaced in the field without disconnecting field
wiring or tubing. The module base contains the
A-2
A6761 / IL
Figure A-2. Typical FIELDVUE Instrument to Personal
Computer Connections for ValveLink Software
following submodules: I/P converter, printed wiring
board (pwb) assembly, and pneumatic relay. The relay
position is detected by sensing the magnet on the
relay beam via a detector on the printed wiring board.
This sensor is used for the minor loop feedback
(MLFB) reading. The module base can be rebuilt by
replacing the submodules. See figures A-3 and A-4.
DVC6000 digital valve controllers are loop-powered
instruments that provide a control valve position
proportional to an input signal from the control room.
The following describes a double-acting DVC6010
digital valve controller mounted on a piston actuator.
The input signal is routed into the terminal box through
a single twisted pair of wires and then to the printed
wiring board assembly submodule where it is read by
the microprocessor, processed by a digital algorithm,
and converted into an analog I/P drive signal.
As the input signal increases, the drive signal to the
I/P converter increases, increasing the I/P output
pressure. The I/P output pressure is routed to the
pneumatic relay submodule. The relay is also
connected to supply pressure and amplifies the small
pneumatic signal from the I/P converter. The relay
accepts the amplified pneumatic signal and provides
two output pressures. With increasing input (4 to 20
mA signal), the output A pressure always increases
September 2013
Principle of Operation
4−20 mA
INPUT SIGNAL
+
HART
AUXILIARY
TERMINALS
TERMINAL BOX
VALVE TRAVEL
FEEDBACK
PRINTED
WIRING BOARD
DRIVE
SIGNAL
OUTPUT A
I/P
CONVERTER
PNEUMATIC
RELAY
SUPPLY
PRESSURE
OUTPUT B
VALVE AND ACTUATOR
E0408 / IL
Figure A-3. FIELDVUE DVC6000 Digital Valve Controller Block Diagram
and the output B pressure decreases. The output A
pressure is used for double-acting and single-acting
direct applications. The output B pressure is used for
double-acting and single-acting reverse applications.
As shown in figure A-3 the increased output A
pressure causes the actuator stem to move
downward. Stem position is sensed through the
feedback linkage by the travel sensor which is
electrically connected to the printed wiring board
assembly submodule. The stem continues to move
downward until the correct stem position is attained. At
this point the printed wiring board assembly stabilizes
September 2013
the I/P drive signal. This positions the flapper to
prevent any further increase in nozzle pressure.
As the input signal decreases, the drive signal to the
I/P converter submodule decreases, decreasing the
I/P output pressure. The pneumatic relay decreases
the output A pressure and increases the output B
pressure. The stem moves upward until the correct
position is attained. At this point the printed wiring
board assembly stabilizes the I/P drive signal. This
positions the flapper to prevent any further decrease in
nozzle pressure.
A-3
A
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
TERMINAL BOX
TERMINAL BOX COVER
HOUSING
PNEUMATIC RELAY
GAUGES
COVER
TRAVEL SENSOR
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ASSEMBLY
W9329
MODULE BASE ASSEMBLY
I/P CONVERTER
Figure A-4. FIELDVUE DVC6000 Digital Valve Controller Assembly
A
A-4
September 2013
Loop Schematics/Nameplates
B-B-
Appendix B
Loop Schematics/Nameplates
B
September 2013
B-1
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
This section includes loop schematics required for
wiring of intrinsically safe installations. It also contains
the approvals nameplates. If you have any questions,
contact your Emerson Process Management sales
office.
HAZARDOUS LOCATION
NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION
CLASS I, DIV 1, GROUPS A,B,C,D
CLASS II, DIV 1, GROUPS E,F,G
CLASS III
DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030
DVC6010S, DVC6020S, DV6030S
Vmax = 30 VDC
Imax = 226 mA
Ci = 5 nF
Li = 0.55 mH
Pi = 1.4 W
CSA APPROVED BARRIER
1
T CODE
T (amb)
1
1
NOTE 1, 3, 4, 5, 6
T5
≤ 80_C
T6
≤ 75_C
NOTE 7
SEE NOTES IN FIGURE B-4
GE42818 sheet 2, Rev. E
Figure B-1. CSA Loop Schematic for FIELDVUE DVC6010, DVC6020, and DVC6030
B
Figure B-2. Typical CSA/FM Nameplate for FIELDVUE DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, and DVC6005
B-2
September 2013
Loop Schematics/Nameplates
1
1
1
1
SEE NOTES IN FIGURE B-4
GE42818 sheet 5, Rev. E
Figure B-3. CSA Loop Schematic for FIELDVUE DVC6005 with DVC6015, DVC6025, and DVC6035
THE ENTITY CONCEPT ALLOWS INTERCONNECTION OF INTRINSICALLY SAFE APPARATUS TO ASSOCIATED APPARATUS NOT
SPECIFICALLY EXAMINED IN SUCH COMBINATION. THE CRITERIA FOR INTERCONNECTION IS THAT THE VOLTAGE (Vmax or Ui), THE
CURRENT (Imax or Ii), AND THE POWER (Pmax or Pi) OF THE INTRINSICALLY SAFE APPARATUS MUST BE EQUAL TO OR GREATER THAN
THE VOLTAGE (Voc or Uo), AND THE CURRENT (Isc or Io), AND THE POWER(Po) DEFINED BY THE ASSOCIATED APPARATUS. IN
ADDITION, THE SUM OF THE MAX UNPROTECTED CAPACITANCE (Ci) AND MAX UNPROTECTED INDUCTANCE (Li), INCLUDING THE
INTERCONNECTING CABLING CAPACITANCE (Ccable) AND CABLING INDUCTANCE (Lcable) MUST BE LESS THAN THE ALLOWABLE
CAPACITANCE (Ca) AND INDUCTANCE (La) DEFINED BY THE ASSOCIATED APPARATUS. IF THE ABOVE CRITERIA IS MET, THEN THE
COMBINATION MAY BE CONNECTED.
Vmax or Ui Voc or Uo
Imax or Ii Isc or Io
Pmax or Pi Po
Ci + Ccable ≤ Ca
Li + Lcable ≤ La
INSTALLATION MUST BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CANADIAN ELECTRICAL CODE (CEC) AND ANSI/ISA RP12.6.
MAXIMUM SAFE AREA VOLTAGE SHOULD NOT EXCEED 250 Vrms.
B
RESISTANCE BETWEEN INTRINSICALLY SAFE GROUND AND EARTH GROUND MUST BE LESS THAN ONE OHM
LOOPS MUST BE CONNECTED ACCORDING TO THE BARRIER MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS.
IF HAND-HELD COMMUNICATOR OR MULTIPLEXER IS USED, IT MUST BE CSA APPROVED WITH ENTITY PARAMETERS AND
INSTALLED PER THE MANUFACTURER’S CONTROL DRAWINGS.
GE42818, Sheet 8
Figure B-4. Notes for CSA Loop Schematics
Figure B-5. Typical CSA Nameplate for FIELDVUE DVC6015, DVC6025, and DVC6035
September 2013
B-3
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
HAZARDOUS LOCATION
NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION
I.S. CLASS I,II,III, DIV 1, GROUPS A,B,C,D,E,F,G
N.I. CLASS I, DIV 2, GROUPS A,B,C,D
DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030
DVC6010S, DVC6020S,
DV6030S
Vmax = 30 VDC
Imax = 226 mA
Ci = 5 nF
Li = 0.55 mH
Pi = 1. 4W
FM APPROVED BARRIER
1
1
T CODE
1
NOTE 1, 3, 4, 5, 6
NOTE 7
T (amb)
T5
≤ 80_C
T6
≤ 75_C
SEE NOTES IN FIGURE B-8
GE42819 Sheet 2, Rev. D
Figure B-6. FM Loop Schematic for FIELDVUE DVC6010, DVC6020, and DVC6030
1
1
B
1
1
SEE NOTES IN FIGURE B-8
GE42819 Sheet 5, Rev. D
Figure B-7. FM Loop Schematic for FIELDVUE DVC6005 with DVC6015, DVC6025, and DVC6035
B-4
September 2013
Loop Schematics/Nameplates
THE ENTITY CONCEPT ALLOWS INTERCONNECTION OF INTRINSICALLY SAFE APPARATUS TO ASSOCIATED APPARATUS NOT
SPECIFICALLY EXAMINED IN SUCH COMBINATION. THE CRITERIA FOR INTERCONNECTION IS THAT THE VOLTAGE (Vmax or Ui), THE
CURRENT (Imax or Ii), AND THE POWER (Pmax or Pi) OF THE INTRINSICALLY SAFE APPARATUS MUST BE EQUAL TO OR GREATER
THAN THE VOLTAGE (Voc or Uo), AND THE CURRENT (Isc or Io), AND THE POWER (Po) DEFINED BY THE ASSOCIATED APPARATUS. IN
ADDITION, THE SUM OF THE MAX UNPROTECTED CAPACITANCE (Ci) AND MAX UNPROTECTED INDUCTANCE (Li), INCLUDING THE
INTERCONNECTING CABLING CAPACITANCE (Ccable) AND CABLING INDUCTANCE (Lcable) MUST BE LESS THAN THE ALLOWABLE
CAPACITANCE (Ca) AND INDUCTANCE (La) DEFINED BY THE ASSOCIATED APPARATUS. IF THE ABOVE CRITERIA IS MET, THEN THE
COMBINATION MAY BE CONNECTED.
Vmax or Ui Voc or Uo
Imax or Ii Isc or Io
Pmax or Pi Po
Ci + Ccable ≤ Ca
Li + Lcable ≤ La
INSTALLATION MUST BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC) NFPA70 AND ANSI/ISA RP12.6.01
MAXIMUM SAFE AREA VOLTAGE SHOULD NOT EXCEED 250 Vrms.
RESISTANCE BETWEEN INTRINSICALLY SAFE GROUND AND EARTH GROUND MUST BE LESS THAN ONE OHM
LOOPS MUST BE CONNECTED ACCORDING TO THE BARRIER MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTION
IF HAND-HELD COMMUNICATOR OR MULTIPLEXER IS USED IT MUST BE FM APPROVED WITH ENTITY PARAMETERS AND
INSTALLED PER THE MANUFACTURER’S CONTROL DRAWING
GE42819 Sheet 8, Rev. E
Figure B-8. Notes for FM Loop Schematics
Figure B-9. Typical FM Nameplate for FIELDVUE DVC6015, DVC6025, and DVC6035
B
September 2013
B-5
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
1
SEE NOTES IN FIGURE B-13
GE60771 sheet 3, Rev. B
Figure B-10. ATEX Loop Schematic For FIELDVUE DVC6010, DVC6020, and DVC6030
B
DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6005
DVC6015, DVC6025, DVC6035
Figure B-11. Typical ATEX Nameplates; Intrinsically Safe
B-6
September 2013
Loop Schematics/Nameplates
1
1
1
1
SEE NOTES IN FIGURE B-13
GE60771 sheet 6, Rev. B
Figure B-12. ATEX Loop Schematic for DVC6005 with DVC6015, DVC6025, and DVC6035
THE ENTITY CONCEPT ALLOWS INTERCONNECTION OF INTRINSICALLY SAFE APPARATUS TO ASSOCIATED APPARATUS NOT
SPECIFICALLY EXAMINED IN SUCH COMBINATION. THE CRITERIA FOR INTERCONNECTION IS THAT THE VOLTAGE (Vmax or Ui), THE
CURRENT (Imax or Ii), AND THE POWER (Pmax or Pi) OF THE INTRINSICALLY SAFE APPARATUS MUST BE EQUAL TO OR GREATER THAN
THE VOLTAGE (Voc or Uo), AND THE CURRENT (Isc or Io), AND THE POWER(Po) DEFINED BY THE ASSOCIATED APPARATUS. IN ADDITION,
THE SUM OF THE MAX UNPROTECTED CAPACITANCE (Ci) AND MAX UNPROTECTED INDUCTANCE (Li), INCLUDING THE INTERCONNECTING
CABLING CAPACITANCE (Ccable) AND CABLING INDUCTANCE (Lcable) MUST BE LESS THAN THE ALLOWABLE CAPACITANCE (Ca) AND
INDUCTANCE (La) DEFINED BY THE ASSOCIATED APPARATUS. IF THE ABOVE CRITERIA IS MET, THEN THE COMBINATION MAY BE
CONNECTED.
Vmax or Ui Voc or Uo
Imax or Ii Isc or Io
Pmax or Pi Po
Ci + Ccable ≤ Ca
Li + Lcable ≤ La
INSTALLATION MUST BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NATIONAL WIRING PRACTICES OF THE COUNTRY IN USE.
LOOPS MUST BE CONNECTED ACCORDING TO THE BARRIER MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS.
IF HAND-HELD COMMUNICATOR OR MULTIPLEXER IS USED, IT MUST BE ATEX APPROVED WITH ENTITY PARAMETERS AND INSTALLED
PER THE MANUFACTURER’S CONTROL DRAWINGS.
GE60771, Sheet 2
Figure B-13. Notes for ATEX Schematics
September 2013
B-7
B
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6005
DVC6015, DVC6025, DVC6035
Figure B-14. Typical ATEX Nameplates; Flameproof
B
DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6005
DVC6015, DVC6025, DVC6035
Figure B-15. Typical ATEX Nameplates; Type n
B-8
September 2013
Loop Schematics/Nameplates
1
1
1
SEE NOTES IN FIGURE B-18
GE42990 Sheet 2, Rev. E
Figure B-16. IECEx Loop Schematic for FIELDVUE DVC6010, DVC6020, and DVC6030
B
1
1
1
1
SEE NOTES IN FIGURE B-18
GE42990 Sheet 5, Rev. D
Figure B-17. IECEx Loop Schematic for FIELDVUE DVC6005 with DVC6015, DVC6025, and DVC6035
September 2013
B-9
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
THE ENTITY CONCEPT ALLOWS INTERCONNECTION OF INTRINSICALLY SAFE APPARATUS TO ASSOCIATED APPARATUS NOT
SPECIFICALLY EXAMINED IN SUCH COMBINATION. THE CRITERIA FOR INTERCONNECTION IS THAT THE VOLTAGE (Vmax or Ui), THE
CURRENT (Imax or Ii), AND THE POWER (Pmax or Pi) OF THE INTRINSICALLY SAFE APPARATUS MUST BE EQUAL TO OR GREATER
THAN THE VOLTAGE (Voc OR Uo), AND THE CURRENT (Isc or Io), AND THE POWER (Po) DEFINED BY THE ASSOCIATED APPARATUS. IN
ADDITION, THE SUM OF THE MAX UNPROTECTED CAPACITANCE (Ci) AND MAX UNPROTECTED INDUCTANCE (Li), INCLUDING THE
INTERCONNECTING CABLING CAPACITANCE (Ccable) AND CABLING INDUCTANCE (Lcable) MUST BE LESS THAN THE ALLOWABLE
CAPACITANCE (Ca) AND INDUCTANCE (La) DEFINED BY THE ASSOCIATED APPARATUS. IF THE ABOVE CRITERIA IS MET, THEN THE
COMBINATION MAY BE CONNECTED.
Vmax or Ui Voc or Uo Imax or Ii Isc or Io Pmax or Pi Po Ci + Ccable ≤ Ca Li + Lcable ≤ La
INSTALLATION MUST BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NATIONAL WIRING PRACTICES OF THE COUNTRY IN USE
LOOPS MUST BE CONNECTED ACCORDING TO THE BARRIER MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS
IF HAND-HELD COMMUNICATOR OR MULTIPLEXER IS USED IT MUST BE IECEx APPROVED WITH ENTITY PARAMETERS AND
INSTALLED PER THE MANUFACTURERS CONTROL DRAWING
GE42990 Sheet 8
Figure B-18. Notes for IECEx Schematics
Figure B-19. Typical IECEx Nameplate for FIELDVUE DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, and DVC6005
B
Figure B-20. Typical IECEx Nameplate for DVC6015, DVC6025, and DVC6035
B-10
September 2013
Glossary
C-C-
Glossary
Alert Point
An adjustable value that, when exceeded,
activates an alert.
Algorithm
A set of logical steps to solve a problem or
accomplish a task. A computer program contains
one or more algorithms.
Byte
A unit of binary digits (bits). A byte consists of
eight bits.
Calibration Location
Where the instrument was last calibrated; either
in the factory or in the field.
Configuration
Alphanumeric
Consisting of letters and numbers.
Analog Input Units
Units in which the analog input is displayed and
maintained in the instrument.
ANSI (acronym)
The acronym ANSI stands for the American
National Standards Institute
ANSI Class
Stored instructions and operating parameters for
a FIELDVUE Instrument.
Control Loop
An arrangement of physical and electronic
components for process control. The electronic
components of the loop continuously measure
one or more aspects of the process, then alter
those aspects as necessary to achieve a desired
process condition. A simple control loop
measures only one variable. More sophisticated
control loops measure many variables and
maintain specified relationships among those
variables.
Valve pressure/temperature rating.
B
Control Mode
Auxiliary Input Alert
Checks the status of the auxiliary input; a discrete
input. When enabled, the Auxiliary Input Alert is
active when the auxiliary input terminals are open
or closed (shorted), depending upon the selection
for Auxiliary Input Alert State.
Auxiliary Terminal (Indicator)
Indicates whether auxiliary wiring terminals are
open or closed (such as by an external switch
contact).
Bench Set
Pressure, supplied to an actuator, required to
drive the actuator through rated valve travel.
Expressed in pounds per square inch.
September 2013
Defines where the instrument reads its set point.
The following control modes are available for a
FIELDVUE Instrument:
Analog The instrument receives its travel set
point over the 4-20 mA loop.
Digital The instrument receives its set point
digitally, via the HART communications link.
Test This is not a user-selectable mode. The
Field Communicator or ValveLink software places
the instrument in this mode whenever it needs to
move the valve, such as for calibration or
diagnostic tests.
Control Mode, Restart
Determines the instrument control mode after a
restart. See Control Mode for the available
restart control modes.
Glossary-1
Glossary
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Controller
A device that operates automatically to regulate a
controlled variable.
Crossover Point
The point at which the feedback pin is closest to
the axis of rotation of the travel sensor. A visual
indication of the crossover point is found when
the slot in the instrument feedback arm forms a
90-degree angle with the valve stem.
Current-to-Pressure (I/P) Converter
An electronic component or device that converts
a milliamp signal to a proportional pneumatic
pressure output signal.
Cycle Counter
The capability of a FIELDVUE instrument to
record the number of times the travel changes
direction. The change in direction must occur
after the deadband has been exceeded before it
can be counted as a cycle.
Device ID
Unique identifier embedded in the instrument at
the factory.
Device Revision
Revision number of the interface software that
permits communication between the Field
Communicator and the instrument.
Drive Signal
The signal to the I/P converter from the printed
wiring board. It is the percentage of the total
microprocessor effort needed to drive the valve
fully open.
Drive Signal Alert
Checks the drive signal and calibrated travel. If
one of the following conditions exists for more
than 20 seconds, the Drive Signal Alert is active.
If none of the conditions exist, the alert is cleared.
If Zero Power Condition = Closed
The alert is active when:
drive signal <10% and calibrated travel >3%
drive signal >90% and calibrated travel <97%
If Zero Power Condition = Open
Cycle Counter Alert
Checks the difference between the Cycle Counter
and the Cycle Counter Alert Point. Cycle Counter
Alert is active when the cycle counter value
exceeds the Cycle Counter Alert Point. It clears
after you reset the Cycle Counter to a value less
than the alert point.
B
Glossary
Cycle Counter Alert Point
An adjustable value which, when exceeded,
activates the Cycle Counter Alert. Valid entries
are 0 to 4 billion cycles.
Cycle Counter Deadband
Region around the travel reference point, in
percent of ranged travel, established at the last
increment of the Cycle Counter. The deadband
must be exceeded before a change in travel can
be counted as a cycle. Valid entries are 0% to
100%. Typical value is between 2% and 5%.
The alert is active when:
drive signal <10% and calibrated travel <97%
drive signal >90% and calibrated travel >3%
Equal Percentage
A valve flow characteristic where equal
increments of valve stem travel produce equal
percentage changes in existing flow. One of the
input characteristics available for a FIELDVUE
Instrument. See also, Linear and Quick Opening.
Feedback Arm
The mechanical connection between the valve
stem linkage and the FIELDVUE Instrument
travel sensor.
Feedback Connection
Identifies the type of feedback linkage: rotary,
sliding-stem roller or sliding-stem standard.
Feedback Signal
Deviation
Usually, the difference between set point and
process variable. More generally, any departure
from a desired or expected value or pattern.
Glossary-2
Indicates to the instrument the actual position of
the valve. The travel sensor provides the
feedback signal to the instrument printed wiring
board assembly. A mechanical linkage connects
the travel sensor to the valve stem or shaft.
September 2013
Glossary
Firmware Revision
The revision number of the instrument firmware.
Firmware is a program that is entered into the
instrument at time of manufacture and cannot be
changed by the user.
Free Time
Percent of time that the microprocessor is idle. A
typical value is 25%. The actual value depends
on the number of functions in the instrument that
are enabled and on the amount of communication
currently in progress.
Input Range
The analog input signal range that corresponds to
the travel range.
Input Signal
The current signal from the control system. The
input signal can be displayed in milliamperes or in
percent of ranged input.
Instrument Level
Determines the functions available for the
instrument. See table 6-2, page 6-8.
Full Ranged Travel
Current, in mA, that corresponds with the point
where ranged travel is maximum, i.e., limited by
the mechanical travel stops.
Gain
The ratio of output change to input change.
Hardware Revision
Revision number of the Fisher Controls
instrument hardware. The physical components
of the instrument are defined as the hardware.
Instrument Mode
Determines if the instrument responds to its
analog input signal. There are two instrument
modes:
In Service: For a fully functioning instrument, the
instrument output changes in response to analog
input changes. Typically changes to setup or
calibration cannot be made when the instrument
mode is In Service.
Out of Service: The instrument output does not
change in response to analog input changes
when the instrument mode is Out of Service.
Some setup parameters can be changed only
when the instrument mode is Out of Service.
HART (acronym)
The acronym HART stands for Highway
Addressable Remote Transducer.
HART Tag
An eight-character name that identifies the
physical instrument.
HART Universal Revision
Revision number of the HART Universal
Commands which are the communications
protocol for the instrument.
Input Characteristic
The relationship between the ranged travel and
ranged input. Possible values include: linear,
equal percentage, and quick opening.
Input Current
The current signal from the control system that
serves as the analog input to the instrument. See
also Input Signal.
September 2013
Instrument Protection
Determines if commands from a HART device
can calibrate and/or configure certain parameters
in the instrument. There are two types of
instrument protection:
Configuration and Calibration: Prohibits
changing protected setup parameters; prohibits
calibration.
None: Permits both configuration and calibration.
The instrument is ”unprotected.”
Instrument Serial Number
The serial number assigned to the printed wiring
board by the factory but can be changed during
setup. The instrument serial number should
match the serial number on the instrument
nameplate.
Leak Class
Defines the allowable leakage by a valve when it
is closed. Leak class numbers are listed in two
standards: ANSI/FCI 70-2 and IEC 534-4.
Glossary-3
B
Glossary
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Linear
A valve flow characteristic where changes in flow
rate are directly proportional to changes in valve
stem travel. One of the input characteristics
available for a FIELDVUE Instrument. See also,
Equal Percentage and Quick Opening.
Linearity, dynamic
Linearity (independent) is the maximum deviation
from a straight line best fit to the opening and
closing curves and a line representing the
average value of those curves.
Memory
A type of semiconductor used for storing
programs or data. FIELDVUE instruments use
three types of memory: Random Access Memory
(RAM), Read Only Memory (ROM), and
Non-Volatile Memory (NVM). See also these
listings in this glossary.
Menu
A list of programs, commands, or other activities
that you select by using the arrow keys to
highlight the item then pressing ENTER, or by
entering the numeric value of the menu item.
Minimum Closing Time
B
Glossary
Minimum time, in seconds, for the travel to
decrease through the entire ranged travel. This
rate is applied to any travel decrease. Valid
entries are 0 to 400 seconds. Deactivate by
entering a value of 0 seconds.
Minimum Opening Time
Minimum time, in seconds, for the travel to
increase through the entire ranged travel. This
rate is applied to any travel increase. Because of
friction, actual valve travel may not respond in
exactly the same time frame. Valid entries are 0
to 400 seconds. Deactivate by entering a value of
0 seconds.
Parallel
Simultaneous: said of data transmission on two or
more channels at the same time.
Polling Address
Address of the instrument. If the digital valve
controller is used in a point-to-point configuration,
set the polling address to 0. If it is used in a
multidrop configuration, or split range application,
set the polling address to a value from 0 to 15.
Pressure Sensor
A FIELDVUE instrument internal device that
senses pneumatic pressure. DVC6000 digital
valve controllers have three pressure sensors:
one to sense supply pressure and two to sense
the output pressures.
Primary Master
Masters are communicating devices. A primary
master is a communicating device permanently
wired to a field instrument. Typically, a
HART-compatible control system or a computer
running ValveLink software is the primary master.
In contrast, a secondary master is not often
permanently wired to a field instrument. The Field
Communicator or a computer running ValveLink
software communicating through a HART modem
could be considered a secondary master.
Note: If one type of master takes an instrument
Out Of Service, the same type must put it In
Service. For example, if a device set up as a
primary master takes an instrument Out Of
Service, a device set up as a primary master
must be used to place the instrument In Service.
Quick Opening
A valve flow characteristic where most of the
change in flow rate takes place for small amounts
of stem travel from the closed position. The flow
characteristic curve is basically linear through the
first 40 percent of stem travel. One of the input
characteristics available for a FIELDVUE
Instrument. See also, Equal Percentage and
Linear.
Non-Volatile Memory (NVM)
A type of semiconductor memory that retains its
contents even though power is disconnected.
NVM contents can be changed during
configuration unlike ROM which can be changed
only at time of instrument manufacture. NVM
stores configuration restart data.
Glossary-4
Random Access Memory (RAM)
A type of semiconductor memory that is normally
used by the microprocessor during normal
operation that permits rapid retrieval and storage
of programs and data. See also Read Only
Memory (ROM) and Non-Volatile Memory (NVM).
September 2013
Glossary
Rate
Amount of change in output proportional to the
rate of change in input.
Read-Only Memory (ROM)
A memory in which information is stored at the
time of instrument manufacture. You can
examine but not change ROM contents.
Travel Accumulator Alert
Checks the difference between the Travel
Accumulator value and the Travel Accumulator
Alert Point. The Travel Accumulator Alert is active
when the Travel Accumulator value exceeds the
Travel Accumulator Alert Point. It clears after you
reset the Travel Accumulator to a value less than
the alert point.
Travel Accumulator Alert Point
Seat Load
Force exerted on the valve seat, typically
expressed in pounds force per lineal inch of port
circumference. Seat load is determined by shutoff
requirements.
Set Point Filter Time
The time constant, in seconds, for the first-order
input filter.
An adjustable value which, when exceeded,
activates the Travel Accumulator Alert. Valid
entries are 0% to 4 billion %.
Travel Accumulator Deadband
Region around the travel reference point
established at the last increment of the
accumulator. This region must be exceeded
before a change in travel can be accumulated.
Valid entries are 0% to 100%.
Travel Alert
Software
Microprocessor or computer programs and
routines that reside in alterable memory (usually
RAM), as opposed to firmware, which consists of
programs and routines that are programmed into
memory (usually ROM) when the instrument is
manufactured. Software can be manipulated
during normal operation, firmware cannot.
Checks the ranged travel against the travel high
and low alert points. The travel alert is active if
either the high or low point is exceeded. Once a
high or low point is exceeded, the ranged travel
must clear that point by the Travel Alert
Deadband before the alert clears. Four travel
alerts are available: Travel Alert Hi, Travel Alert
Lo, Travel Alert Hi Hi, and Travel Alert Lo Lo.
Travel Alert Deadband
Stroking Time
The time, in seconds, required to move the valve
from its fully open position to fully closed, or vice
versa.
Temperature Sensor
A device within the FIELDVUE instrument that
measures the instrument’s internal temperature.
Travel
Movement of the valve stem or shaft which
changes the amount the valve is open or closed.
Travel Accumulator
The capability of a FIELDVUE instrument to
record total change in travel. The value of the
Travel Accumulator increments when the
magnitude of the change exceeds the Travel
Accumulator Deadband. To reset the Travel
Accumulator, set it to zero.
September 2013
Travel, in percent of ranged travel, required to
clear a travel alert, once it is active. Valid entries
are −25% to 125%.
B
Travel Alert High Point
Value of the travel, in percent of ranged travel,
which, when exceeded, sets the Travel Alert Hi
alert. Valid entries are −25% to 125%.
Travel Alert High High Point
Value of the travel, in percent of ranged travel,
which, when exceeded, sets the Travel Alert Hi Hi
alert. Valid entries are −25% to 125%.
Travel Alert Low Point
Value of the travel, in percent of ranged travel,
which, when exceeded, sets the Travel Alert Lo
alert. Valid entries are −25% to 125%.
Travel Alert Low Low Point
Value of the travel, in percent of ranged travel,
which, when exceeded, sets the Travel Alert Lo
Lo alert. Valid entries are −25% to 125%.
Glossary-5
Glossary
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Travel Cutoff
Defines the cutoff point for the travel, in percent
of ranged travel. There are two travel cutoffs:
high and low. Once travel exceeds the cutoff, the
drive signal is set to either maximum or minimum,
depending on the Zero Control Signal and if the
cutoff is high or low. Minimum opening time or
minimum closing time are not in effect while the
travel is beyond the cutoff. Use the travel cutoff to
obtain the desired seat load or to be sure the
valve is fully open.
Travel Deviation
The difference between the analog input signal (in
percent of ranged input), the “target” travel, and
the actual “ranged” travel.
Travel Sensor
A device within the FIELDVUE instrument that
senses valve stem or shaft movement. The travel
sensor is mechanically connected to the valve
stem or shaft.
Travel Sensor Motion
Establishes motion of the travel sensor. While
viewing the end of the travel sensor shaft, if
increasing air pressure to the actuator causes the
shaft to rotate clockwise, travel sensor motion is
CW. If increasing air pressure causes the shaft to
rotate counterclockwise, travel sensor motion is
CCW.
Tuning
Travel Deviation Alert
Checks the difference between the target and the
ranged travel. If the difference exceeds the Travel
Deviation Alert Point for more than the Travel
Deviation Time, the Travel Deviation Alert is
active. It remains active until the difference is less
than the Travel Deviation Alert Point.
Travel Deviation Alert Point
An adjustable value for the target travel and the
ranged travel difference, expressed in percent,
When this value is exceeded by the travel
deviation for more than the Travel Deviation
Time, the Travel Deviation Alert is active. Valid
entries are 0% to 100%. Typically this is set to
5%.
B
Glossary
Travel Deviation Time
The time, in seconds. that the travel deviation
must exceed the Travel Deviation Alert Point
before the alert is active. Valid entries are 1 to 60
seconds.
Travel Limit
A setup parameter that defines the maximum
allowable travel (in percent of ranged travel) for
the valve. During operation, the travel target will
not exceed this limit. There are two travel limits:
high and low. Typically the travel limit low will be
used to keep the valve from going completely
closed.
Travel Range
Travel, in percent of calibrated travel, that
corresponds to the input range.
Glossary-6
The adjustment of control terms or parameter
values to produce a desired control effect.
Tuning Set
Preset values that identify gain settings for a
FIELDVUE instrument. The tuning set and supply
pressure together determine an instrument’s
response to input signal changes.
Watch Dog Timer
A timer that the microprocessor must rearm
periodically. If the microprocessor is unable to
rearm the timer, the instrument goes through
reset.
Zero Power Condition
The position of the valve (open or closed) when
the electrical power to the instrument is removed.
Zero Power Condition (ZPC) is determined by
relay and actuator action as follows:
Single Acting Direct (Relay C) Upon loss of
power instrument goes to zero air output at port
A. On loss of pneumatic supply failure direction is
per the actuator fail mode.
Double Acting (Relay A) Upon loss of power
instrument goes to full supply air output at port B.
A goes to zero air output. The failure direction
upon loss of pneumatic supply cannot be
determined.
Single Acting Reverse (Relay B) Upon loss of
power instrument goes to full supply air output at
Port B. On loss of pneumatic supply failure
direction is per the actuator fail mode.
September 2013
Index
D-D-
Index
A
A Minus B, 6-7
AC, (Auto Calibrate), 6-8
Actuator Style, 4-19
AD, (Advanced Diagnostics), 6-8
Advanced Diagnostics, (AD), 6-8
Alert Conditions, 6-2
Alert Record, 6-4
Electronics, 6-2
Environment, 6-3
Sensor, 6-2
SIS, 6-3
Travel, 6-3
Travel History, 6-3
Alert Groups, 4-16
Failure Alerts, 4-16
Miscellaneous, 4-16
Valve Alerts, 4-16
Alert Record, 4-16
Alert Records
Clear, 4-16
View, 4-16
Alert Setup, 4-12
Alerts
Alert Record, 4-16
Alert Groups, 4-16
Enabling Alert Groups, 4-16
configuring, 4-12
Electronic, 4-12
Drive Signal Alert, 4-12
Processor Impaired Alerts, 4-12
Environment, 4-13
Environmental
Auxiliary Terminal Alerts, 4-13
Supply Press Lo Alert, 4-13
Sensor, 4-13
SIS, 4-15
Travel, 4-13
Deviation Alert, 4-13
Limit Alerts, 4-13
September 2013
Travel Limit Cutoff Alerts, 4-14
Travel Limit Hi/Lo Alerts, 4-14
Travel History, 4-15
Cycle Count, 4-15
Cycle Count/Tvl Accum Deadband, 4-15
Travel Accumulator, 4-15
Analog Calibration Adjust, 5-4
Analog Input
Displaying Value, 6-7
Units, 4-18
Analog Input Calibration, 5-10
Analog Input Range, 4-18
Assembly Specification Sheet, 4-19
ATEX
Hazardous Area Classifications, 1-6, 1-10,
1-11
Loop Schematic, B-6, B-7
Nameplates, B-6, B-8
Special Conditions for Safe Use, 2-4, 2-5
Auto Calibrate, (AC), 6-8
Auto Calibrate Travel, 5-2
Error Messages, 5-3, 5-4
Auxiliary Input, Displaying Status, 6-7
Auxiliary Terminal, Wiring Length Guidelines,
6-5
Auxiliary Terminal Action, 4-4, 4-18
B
Basic Setup, 3-2
bias spring, 2-14
Burst Command, 4-3
Change, 4-3
Burst Enable, Change, 4-3
Burst Mode, 4-3
Commands, 2-34, 4-3
Enabling, 4-3
Burst Operation, 2-34
Index
G
C
Calibration
Index-1
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Analog Input, 5-10
Auto Calibrate Travel, 5-2
Error Messages, 5-4
Manual Calibrate Travel, 5-4
Pressure Sensors, 5-6
Relay Adjustment, 5-10
Sensor Calibration, 5-6
Pressure Sensors, 5-6
Touch−Up Travel, 5-6
Travel
Auto, 5-2
Manual, 5-4
Analog Calibration Adjust, 5-4
Digital Calibration Adjust, 5-5
Travel Sensor, 5-7
Travel Sensor Adjust, 5-7
Calibration , Travel, 5-2
Calibration and Diagnostics, 4-17
Calibration Status and Location, 4-18
G
Cutoff Hi
Travel Limit/Cutoff Alerts, 4-14
Travel/Pressure Control, 4-9
Cutoff Lo
Travel Limit/Cutoff Alerts, 4-14
Travel/Pressure Control, 4-9
Cutoffs and Limits, Travel/Pressure Control,
4-9
Cycle Counter, 4-15
Alert Point, 4-15
Displaying Value, 6-7
Enabling Alert, 4-15
Resetting, 4-15
Cycle Counter Deadband, 4-15
D
Change Cutoffs
Travel Limit/Cutoff Alerts, 4-14
Travel/Pressure Control, 4-9
Date, 4-17, 4-18
Change Travel Limits, Travel Limit/Cutoff
Alerts, 4-15
Description, DVC6000 Series, 1-3
Classifications/Certifications, 1-6
Index
Custom Characterization, 4-11
Define , 4-11
DD Information, 6-8
Define Custom Characterization, 4-11
Descriptor, 4-17
Detailed Setup, 4-2
Clear ALL Records, 4-16
Device Information, 6-8
Command 3, 4-3
Device Record, 6-4
Communication Cable Capacitance, 2-33
Device Revision, 6-8
Connections
Electrical
4 to 20 mA Loop, 2-24
Communication, 2-29
Test, 2-29
Pneumatic
Output, 2-21
to support solenoid testing, 2-22
Supply, 2-19
Vent, 2-22
Digital Calibration Adjust, 5-5
Control Mode, 4-3
Electromagnetic Compatibility, 1-5
Control System Requirements
Compliance Voltage, 2-32
HART Filter, 2-30
Voltage Available, 2-31
End Point Pressure Control, 4-9, 4-10
CSA
Hazardous Area Classifications, 1-6, 1-8
Loop Schematic, B-3
Loop Schematics, B-2
Nameplates, B-2, B-3
Index-2
DIP Switch, Setting, 7-7
Drive Signal, Displaying Value, 6-7
Dynamic Response, 4-11
E
Educational Services, 1-4
Electrical Classification, Hazardous Area, 1-6
EPPC Saturation Time, 4-10
EPPC Setup Point, 4-10
Error Messages, Auto Calibrate Travel, 5-4
F
Factory Default Settings, Initial Setup, 3-3
September 2013
Index
Factory Settings, Restoring, 5-11
Instrument Clock, Setting, 4-16, 4-18
Failure Group Enable, 4-16
Instrument Date and Time, 4-18
Feedback Connection, 4-19
Instrument Level, 6-8
capabilities, 1-2
Firmware Revision, 6-8
FM
Hazardous Area Classifications, 1-6, 1-9
Loop Schematic, B-4
Nameplates, B-5
Special Conditions of Safe Use, 2-4
Free Time, Self Test Failure, enabling to
cause instrument shutdown, 4-12
Instrument Mode, 3-2, 4-2
Instrument Serial Number, 4-17
Instrument Status, 6-4
Viewing, 6-4
Instrument Time , 4-16
Integral Action, Enable Integral Settings, 4-6
Integral Dead Zone, 4-17
G
Gauges, Tire Valves, & Pipe Plugs
Parts List, 8-5
Replacing, 7-7
Integral Enable
Pressure, 4-8
Travel, 4-6
Integral Gain
Pressure, 4-8
Travel, 4-6
Integral Limit, 4-7, 4-17
H
Hardware Revision, 6-8
HART Communicating, (HC), 6-8
Integral Settings, 4-7
Integrator Saturation, Status, 4-17
Internal Temperature, Displaying Value, 6-7
HART Filter, Part Numbers, 8-6
HART Tag, 4-17
L
HART Tri−Loop, Configuring DVC6000 for use
with, 2-33
Lag Time, 4-11
Hazardous Area Approvals, 2-4
Lead/Lag, 4-11
typical filter settings, 4-12
HC, (HART Communicating), 6-8
Lead/Lag Set Point Filter, 4-11
Loop Current, checking, 7-15
I
I/P Converter
Parts List, 8-4
Removing, 7-6
Replacing, 7-6
Replacing Filter, 7-5
Loop Schematic
ATEX, B-6, B-7
CSA, B-3
FM, B-4
IECEx, B-9
Loop Schematics, CSA, B-2
IECEx
Conditions of Certification, 2-5
Hazardous Area Classifications, 1-6, 1-11
Loop Schematic, B-9
Nameplates, B-10
M
Input Characterization, 4-10
Manufacturer, 4-18
Input Range, 4-18
Maximum Output Capacity, 1-5
Installation, 2-3
maximum supply pressure, 4-18
September 2013
Index
Manual Calibrate Travel, 5-4
Manual Conventions, 1-2
G
Index-3
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Message, 4-17
P
Minimum Closing Time, 4-11
Minimum Opening Time, 4-11
Parameters, Factory Default, Detailed Setup,
4-2
Miscellaneous Group Enable, 4-16
Partial Stroke, 4-19
Module Base
Removal, 7-3
Replacing, 7-4
Partial Stroke Test, 6-5
Configuring
Partial Stroke Pressure Limit, 4-20
Partial Stroke Tvl, 4-20
Pause Time, 4-20
Stroke Speed, 4-20
initiating, 6-5
Device (Digital Valve Controller), 6-5
Field Communicator, 6-6
Remote Push Button, 6-5
Local DI, 6-5
Local Push Button, 6-5
Module Base, Parts List, 8-4
Module Base Maintenance, 7-3
Mounting, 2-6
67CFR, 2-18
DVC6005 base unit, 2-13
Pipestand, 2-13
Wall, 2-13
DVC6010, 2-6
DVC6015, 2-13
DVC6020, 2-8
DVC6025, 2-15
DVC6030, 2-10
DVC6035, 2-16
N
Nameplates
ATEX, B-6, B-8
CSA, B-2, B-3
FM, B-5
IECEx, B-10
natural gas, as supply medium, 7-2
Natural Gas Certified, Single Seal device,
2-20
Index
Number of Power Ups, Displaying Status, 6-8
Parts
Common Parts, 8-3
Feedback Parts, 8-5
Gauges, Tire Valves, & Pipe Plugs, 8-5
HART Filters, 8-6
I/P Converter Assembly, 8-4
Kits, 8-2
Module Base, 8-4
Ordering, 8-2
Printed Wiring Board Assembly, 8-5
Relay, 8-4
Terminal Box, 8-4
PD, (Performance Diagnostics), 6-8
Performance Diagnostics, (PD), 6-8
Performance Tuner, 3-4, 4-7
Pneumatic Relay
Adjusting, 5-10
Parts List, 8-4
Removing, 7-7
Replacing, 7-7
Polling Address, 4-17
G
O
Press Set Point, 4-10
ODV, (Optimized Digital Valve), 6-8
Pressure Control, 4-9
Operational, 4-17
Status, 4-17
Pressure Range Hi, 4-9
Optimized Digital Valve, (ODV), 6-8
Pressure Sensor Calibration, 5-6
Output Pressure, Displaying Value, 6-7
Pressure Tuning Sets, Gain Values, 4-7
Overview, 6-7
Pressure Units, 4-17
Index-4
Pressure A, 6-7
Pressure Range Lo, 4-9
September 2013
Index
Principle of Operation
DVC6000, A-2
HART Communication, A-2
Printed Wiring Board Assembly
Parts List, 8-5
Removing, 7-6
Replacing, 7-7
Setting DIP Switch, 7-7
Protection, 3-2, 4-3
PST Press Limit, double acting actuators,
4-20
R
Raw Travel Input, Displaying Status, 6-8
Related Documents, 1-3
Relay
Double−Acting, 5-10
Single−Acting Direct, 5-11
Single−Acting Reverse, 5-11
Relay A, 5-10
Relay Adjustment, 5-10
Double−Acting, 5-10
Relay B, 5-11
Relay C, 5-11
Relay Type, 4-18
Remote Travel Sensor Connections, 2-25
Using a 10 kOhm External Potentiometer
as, 2-25
Using a Two−Resistor Series as, 2-27
Using the DVC6015, DVC6025 and
DVC6035 Feedback unit as, 2-25
Set Point Filter Time, 4-11
Set Point Rate Close, 4-11
Set Point Rate Open, 4-11
Setpoint, 6-7
Setup Wizard, 3-2
SIS, Pressure Mode Enable, 4-10
SIS Alerts, 4-15
Solenoid Valve Testing, 2-22
special application, 2-22
Special Instructions for Safe Use and
Installations in Hazardous Locations, 2-4
ATEX Flameproof, 2-5
ATEX Intrinsic Safety, 2-4
ATEX Type n, 2-5
CSA, 2-4
FM, 2-4
IECEx Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Flameproof,
2-5
Specifications, 1-3
Stabilize/Optimize, 3-4, 4-6
Status, 4-16, 6-4
Calibration & Diagnostics, 4-17
Instrument Time, 4-16
Integrator, 4-17
Integrator Saturation, 4-17
Operational, 4-17
Steady−State Air Consumption, 1-5
Stroke Valve, 6-4
Stroking the Output, with Field Communicator,
6-4
Supply Pressure, 1-5
Displaying Value, 6-7
reset, 4-8
Restart Control Mode, 4-3
Revision Information, DVC6000
Device, 6-8
Firmware, 6-8
Hardware, 6-8
HART Universal, 6-8
S
Serial Number
Instrument, 4-17
Valve, 4-17, 4-18
Service Tools, 6-2
September 2013
T
Index
Temperature
Maximum Recorded, Displaying Value, 6-7
Minimum Recorded, Displaying Value, 6-7
Units, 4-17
Terminal Box
Parts List, 8-4
Removing, 7-8
Replacing, 7-8
G
TEST Terminals, 7-15
Third−Party Approvals, 2-4
Touch−Up Travel Calibration, 5-6
Index-5
DVC6000 Digital Valve Controllers
Travel, Displaying Value, 6-7
Travel Sensor Motion, 4-19
Travel / Pressure Control, 4-9
End Point Pressure Control, 4-9
Pressure Control, 4-9
Travel Target, Displaying Value, 6-7
Travel Accumulation Alert Enable, 4-15
Travel Accumulator
Displaying Value, 6-7
Enabling Alert, 4-15
Resetting, 4-15
Travel Accumulator Alerts, 4-15
Travel Cutoffs, 4-9
Travel Tuning Sets, Gain Values, 4-4
Troubleshooting, Instrument, 7-14
Tuning, 4-4
Pressure, 4-7
Travel, 4-4
Tuning Sets
Pressure, 4-7
Gain Values, 4-7
Travel, 4-4
Gain Values, 4-4
Travel Deviation Alert, 4-13
Travel History Alerts, 4-15
travel indicator, 2-11
Travel Limit Lo, Travel/Pressure Control, 4-9
U
Upper Operating Pressure, 4-10
Travel Limit/Cutoff Alerts, 4-14
Travel Limits
Change, 4-9, 4-15
Setting, 4-9
Travel Limit Hi
Travel Limit/Cutoff Alerts, 4-14
Travel/Pressure Control, 4-9
Index
G
Travel Sensor
Adjusting
DVC6010, 5-7
DVC6015, 5-7
DVC6020, 5-8
DVC6025, 5-8
DVC6030, 5-7
DVC6035, 5-7
Parts List, 8-5
Removing
DVC6010, 7-9
DVC6015, 7-9
DVC6020, 7-9
DVC6025, 7-9
DVC6030, 7-10
DVC6035, 7-10
Replacing
DVC6010, 7-10
DVC6015, 7-10
DVC6020, 7-12
DVC6025, 7-12
DVC6030, 7-13
DVC6035, 7-13
Travel Sensor Adjust, 5-7
Index-6
V
Valve Group Enable, 4-16
Valve Serial Number, 4-17, 4-18
Valve Style, 4-19
View Alert Records, 4-16
View Number of Days Powered Up, 6-8
Voltage Available
Calculating, 2-31
Checking, 7-14
W
Wiring Length Guidelines, Auxiliary Terminal ,
6-5
Wiring Practices
Communication Cable Capacitance, 2-33
Control System Requirements, 2-30
Compliance Voltage, 2-32
HART Filter, 2-30
Voltage Available, 2-31
Z
Zero Control Signal, 4-18
Zero Power Condition, 4-18
September 2013
Neither Emerson, Emerson Process Management, nor any of their affiliated entities assumes responsibility for the selection, use or
maintenance of any product. Responsibility for proper selection, use, and maintenance of any product remains solely with the
purchaser and end user.
Fisher, FIELDVUE, ValveLink, PlantWeb, PROVOX, Rosemount, Tri-Loop, DeltaV, RS3 and THUM are marks owned by one of the companies in
the Emerson Process Management business unit of Emerson Electric Co. Emerson Process Management, Emerson, and the Emerson logo are
trademarks and service marks of Emerson Electric Co. HART is a mark owned by the HART Comunication Foundation. All other marks are the
property of their respective owners.
The contents of this publication are presented for informational purposes only, and while every effort has been made to ensure their accuracy,
they are not to be construed as warranties or guarantees, express or implied, regarding the products or services described herein or their use or
applicability. All sales are governed by our terms and conditions, which are available upon request. We reserve the right to modify or improve the
designs or specifications of such products at any time without notice.
Emerson Process Management
Marshalltown, Iowa 50158 USA
Sorocaba, 18087 Brazil
Chatham, Kent ME4 4QZ UK
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Singapore 128461 Singapore
www.Fisher.com
2001, 2013 Fisher Controls International LLC. All rights reserved.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement